# Sign-up & Plans Everything you need to get started on Better Building, including access to our free 14-day trial. It's quick and easy to jump in. # Welcome We help architects, engineers, and builders not just meet building codes but confidently exceed them, whether they’re working on commercial or residential projects. {% embed url="." %} This evolving knowledge base provides practical, easy-to-follow guidance on admin, plans, energy, daylight, moisture, and carbon modelling. # Sign-in {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Create an Account First, pick a region ([International](https://app.betterbuilding.io/), [Australia](https://au.betterbuilding.io/) or [New Zealand](https://nz.betterbuilding.io/)) and then all we just need a 'Email address' and 'Password' to get you going.

{% hint style="danger" %} To make sure you receive important updates, support and newsletters, we recommend using **professional work emails with a registered business domain only.** Role-based emails, such as those starting with "admin@", "support@", "billing@" or non-professional email addresses (@gmail, @outlook, @qq, etc) may be **removed without warning.** {% endhint %} {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Verification Pop over to your email (don’t forget the junk folder) and click the 'Verify Email Address' link we sent to finish signing up. Once verified, you will be returned to the sign-in page. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Terms & Conditions Next up... please read our [Terms & Conditions](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/sign-up-and-plans/platform-terms-and-conditions) followed by toggling 'I agree with the Terms and Conditions'. Then hit 'Continue'. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Profile and Interests Tell us a little about yourself. Just the basics, it helps us give you smarter support and better results. Add your 'First name', 'Last Name', 'Company' and 'Occupation' and then hit 'Continue'. Next, help us support by letting us know which topic is most important to you, from 'Energy', 'Daylight', 'Moisture' and 'Carbon' and then hit 'Continue'.

{% endstep %} {% step %} ### Free 30-day Trial (Optional) Your [30-day trial ](/sign-up-and-plans/demo-grab-a-trail)is ready and waiting! Want a quick tour? Book a speedy [demo](https://calendly.com/betterbuildingsupport/14-day-trial-demo) with our team. Or if you’re keen to get going solo, hit 'Continue', create a[ Team](/create-your-first-project/create-a-team) and dive right in. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} {% hint style="danger" %} To make sure you receive important updates, support and newsletters, we recommend using **professional work emails with a registered business domain only.** Role-based emails, such as those starting with "admin@", "support@", "billing@" or non-professional email addresses (@gmail, @outlook, @qq, etc) may be **removed without warning.** {% endhint %} # Demo / Grab a Trail You have two options to get going. A free 14-day trial ([Plus Plan](/sign-up-and-plans/plans)) or Book a Demo to grab a 30-day trial. If you would like to get into the weeds quickly, and learn by doing, the [free 30-day trial](https://betterbuilding.io/book-a-demo) is the way to go. A credit card required to filter out the bots! For those who want a faster introduction, we suggest you [Book a Demo](https://betterbuilding.io/book-a-demo) with our team. This ensures you get the most value from the advanced capabilities these plans offer and helps you make the most of your trial experience. {% hint style="warning" %} To make sure you receive important updates, support and newsletters, we recommend **using professional work emails** with a registered business domain only. **Role-based emails**, such as those starting with "admin@", "support@", "billing@" or non-professional email addresses (@gmail, @outlook, @qq, etc) **may be removed without warning.** Read our [**Terms & Conditions**](/sign-up-and-plans/terms-and-conditions) for more info. {% endhint %}

{% hint style="danger" %} For those looking for [technical support,](/support-and-training/support-tickets) please issue a ticket on the platform. {% endhint %} # Plans We use tiered pricing because different teams have different needs, and charging everyone the same amount for features they won't use is pointless. You can go month-to-month (cancel whenever) or commit annually for 20% off plus some training perks. **Classic** bumps the limit to 1000 m² (10764 ft²) and adds the modelling features most people actually need—plus basic team collaboration and some report credits. This is where most small teams land. **Plus** is built for mid-sized teams running larger simulations, up to 15,000 m² (161459 ft²). You also get project management tools here, which matters once you're juggling multiple concurrent projects. **Premium** gives you the full suite. Modelling up to 100,000 m² (1076391 ft²), unlimited admin access, multi-region support. If you're running operations across different locations or need that scale, this is the tier. **Enterprise** is Premium on an isolated server. Pricing depends on your region and infrastructure requirements. Maximum flexibility, maximum security, and the kind of setup you negotiate rather than click through. {% hint style="danger" %} [Supplier](/sign-up-and-plans/plans/suppliers-plan) and [Academic Plans ](/sign-up-and-plans/plans/academic-plans)are also provided. Students enjoy a 6-month free trial by signing up with your academic provider's email. To access this offer, use your **academic email only**, personal emails aren’t eligible, and account details can’t be transferred. {% endhint %} ### USD Pricing Post the 7th of November 2025, all future pricing on new plans are based on USD.

	Classic	Plus	Premium	Enterprise
No. of Seats	3	5	8	20
Per Month	$79	$199	$329	Contact Us
Additional Team Member Per Month	+ $26.50	+ $39.50	+ $41.50	Contact Us
Per Annum (2 months free)	$790	$1990	$3290	Contact Us
Additional Team Member Per Annum	+ $265	+ $395	+ $415	Contact Us

On the 1st of July 2026, all future pricing on new plans increase by 5%.

	Classic	Plus	Premium	Enterprise
No. of Seats	3	5	8	20
Per Month	$83	$209	$346	Contact Us
Additional Team Member Per Month	+ $28	+ $42	+ $44	Contact Us
Per Annum (2 months free)	$830	$2090	$3460	Contact Us
Additional Team Member Per Annum	+ $277	+ $418	+ $433	Contact Us

Prices in $USD, exclusive of local sales tax, GST or VAT. ## Modelling Features Each plan has specific modelling features available.

Features	Classic	Plus	Premium
Building Area - Conditioned Floor	< 1000 m² or 10,764 ft²	< 15,000 m² or 161,459 ft²	< 100,000 m² or 10,76391 ft²
Building Zones - No. of thermal zones per model	50	300	1000
Groups - No. of groups per model	2	5	Unlimited
Distributions	-	-	✅
Curves	-	-	✅
Thermal bridging - ISO 6946, AS/NZ 4859.1 and NZ 4214 repeat thermal bridging	✅	✅	✅
Dew Point - ISO 13788 Glaser method	✅	✅	✅
Moisture - ASHRAE 160/ DA07 hydrothermal calculations	✅	✅	✅
Upfront Carbon - EN 15804:2012+A2:2019 carbon based assessments	✅	✅	✅
Energy Modelling - EnergyPlus compliance and custom models	✅	✅	✅
Thermal Comfort Modelling - ASHRAE 55, PMV & Adaptive Comfort	✅	✅	✅
Overheating - CIBSE TM59	-	✅	✅
Daylight Modelling -Daylight factor, spatial daylight autonomy and more	✅	✅	✅
Basic HVAC - EnergyPlus HVAC Templates	✅	✅	✅
Advanced HVAC - Detailed HVAC templates	-	Limited	✅
HVAC Sizing	-	✅	✅
Airflow Networks - Multi-zone airflow modelling	-	✅	✅
Designer Mode - Custom workflows	✅	✅	✅

## Building Workflows Building workflows are scripts that automate building code compliance. Each plan has specific building workflows available. | | Classic | Plus | Premium | | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | :-----: | :--: | :-----: | | ASHRAE 90.1 (Launching Jan 26) | - | ✅ | ✅ | | H1/AS1 | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | H1/AS2 | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | H1/VM1 | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Part J4 Building fabric | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | J1V3 Verification using a reference building | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | J1V5 Verification using a reference building for a Class 2 sole-occupancy unit | - | ✅ | ✅ | | V2.6.2.2 Verification using a reference building | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Design Day | - | ✅ | ✅ | | G7/VM1 | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Carbon | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | ## HVAC Templates

Features	Classic	Plus	Premium
Ideal Loads	✅	✅	✅
Fan Coil Unit - Air Cooled (EnergyPlus HVAC Templates)	✅	✅	✅
Packaged Variable Air Volume (EnergyPlus HVAC Templates)	✅	✅	✅
Packaged Constant Air Volume (EnergyPlus HVAC Templates)	✅	✅	✅
Central Plant and Air Handling System	-	-	✅
Packaged Air Handling Unit (PAHU)	-	✅	✅
Fan Coil Unit System (Electric Heating)	-	-	✅
Fan Coil Unit System (Water Heating)	-	-	✅
Four Pipe Heat Pump System	-	-	✅
Heat Recovery Ventilation	-	-	✅
Variable Refrigerant Flow	-	✅	✅
Variable Refrigerant Flow (incl. Outside Air)	-	-	✅
Water-cooled Package Unit	-	-	✅

## ASHREA 90.1 Appendix G Templates

Features	Classic	Plus	Premium
System No. 1 PTAC (Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner)	-	✅	✅
System No. 2 PTHP (Packaged Terminal Heat Pump)	-	✅	✅
System No. 3 PSZ-AC (Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioner)	-	✅	✅
System No. 4 PSZ-HP (Packaged Rooftop Heat Pump)	-	✅	✅
System No. 5 Packaged VAV with Reheat	-	✅	✅
System No. 6 Packaged VAV with PFP Boxes	-	✅	✅
System No. 7 VAV with Reheat	-	✅	✅
System No. 8 VAV with PFP Boxes	-	✅	✅
System No. 9 Heating (Furnace) and Ventilation	-	✅	✅
System No. 10 Heating (Electric) and Ventilation	-	✅	✅
System No. 11 SZ-VAV (Single Zone VAV)	-	✅	✅
System No. 12 SZ-CV-HW (Single Zone CAV Hot Water)	-	✅	✅
System No. 13 SZ-CV-ER (Single Zone CAV Electric)	-	✅	✅

## ASHREA 90.1 Budget System Templates

Features	Classic	Plus	Premium
System No. 1 VAV with Parallel Fan-powered Boxes	-	✅	✅
System No. 2 VAV with Reheat	-	✅	✅
System No. 3 Packaged VAV with Parallel fan-powered Boxes	-	✅	✅
System No. 4 Packaged VAV with Reheat	-	✅	✅
System No. 5 Two-pipe Fan Coil	-	✅	✅
System No. 6 Water-Source Heat Pump	-	✅	✅
System No. 7 Four-pipe fan-coil	-	✅	✅
System No. 8 Packaged Terminal Heat Pump	-	✅	✅
System No. 9 Packaged Rooftop Heat Pump	-	✅	✅
System No. 10 Packaged terminal Air Conditioner	-	✅	✅
System No. 11 Packaged rooftop Air Conditioner	-	✅	✅

## Admin Features Each plan has specific admin features available.

Features	Classic	Plus	Premium
Dedicated admin account	-	-	✅
Designs - No. of designs per project	Unlimited	Unlimited	Unlimited
Guests - No. of guests per design	-	3	3
Reports - No. of reports per project	Unlimited	Unlimited	Unlimited
Credits - No. of Credits per annual plan	50 credits	250 credits	500 credits
Themes - Report themes per plan	✅	✅	✅
Ticket Support - Support commitment per plan	3 business days	1 business day	1 business day
Flows - Project management per plan	Limited	Limited	Unlimited
Imports / Exports - Gbxml / IDF imports/exports per plan	✅	✅	✅
Storage Limits	20GB	100GB	500GB

## On-Demand Courses Access to our On-demand courses are as follows: * **Included in Bundles**\ Access is now part of our annual plan bundles, check below for what’s included in each tier. * **Team Courses – $99 each/30 day access**\ Available to Lite and Classic users who want targeted training normally included in higher-tier plans. * **Advanced Courses – $395 each/per person/30 day access**\ A new range of in-depth training, including content on non-Better Building software. More details coming soon. {% hint style="success" %} Our On-Demand courses qualify as Continuing Professional Development (CPD), typically categorised as informal CPD points, with each hour of activity equating to one point. All On-Demand courses involve a self-directed learning component, followed by a formal Q\&A session requiring a minimum 80% pass mark. A Certificate of Completion will be issued upon successful completion. We advise you to consult with the receiving entity to confirm the certificate's applicability to their scheme's specific requirements. {% endhint %} | Course Title | Classic | Plus | Premium | | ------------------------ | :-----: | :--: | :-----: | | Geometry - Commercial | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Geometry - Residential | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | H1 AS1 & VM1 | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | H1 AS2 & VM2 | - | ✅ | ✅ | | NCC 2022: J1V3 | - | ✅ | ✅ | | Dew Point | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Moisture | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Themes | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Daylight | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Total R-values | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | NCC 2022: J1V5 | - | ✅ | ✅ | | DTS Façade Calcs | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Part J4 Building Fabric | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | 3D Geometry in SketchUp | - | ✅ | ✅ | | BESS: Daylight Access | - | ✅ | ✅ | | DQLS: Daylight Modelling | - | ✅ | ✅ | | HVAC Sizing | - | - | ✅ | | Green Star: Daylight | - | ✅ | ✅ | | CIBSE TM59 | - | ✅ | ✅ | | G7 Natural Light | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Detailed Shading | - | ✅ | ✅ | | IDF Exports and Imports | - | ✅ | ✅ | | 2D to 3D Specification | - | ✅ | ✅ | # Credits Credits help you run more advanced simulations, faster. While simple models run for free in your browser, larger or more detailed projects need extra computing power. That’s where credits come in. They let you tap into our high-performance servers, generate in-depth simulation reports (with the Lite Plan), and process complex models faster and more efficiently. ## Detailed Reports On the Lite Plan, detailed reports are available on-demand as a low-cost solution for building code compliance. These reports are included at no extra cost in Classic, Plus and Premium Plans. To generate a detailed report on the Lite Plan, Credits must be pre-purchased. Credit bundles are available in 50, 250 (20% discount), 500 (30% discount) and 1000 (40% discount) quantities, offering greater value with higher volumes.


Get Started 50 Credits USD$20 or 0.40 cents a Credit
20% discount 250 Credits USD$80 or 0.32 cents a Credit
30% discount 500 Credits USD$140 or 0.28 cents a Credit
40% discount	1000 Credits	USD$240 or 0.24 cents a Credit

## Processing Large or Complex Models Credits are a game-changer for processing large models on our secure server, delivering speeds up to 10 x faster than local desktop simulations. A 60-minute energy simulation can now finish in just 6 minutes! To leverage enhanced performance, Credits are required for large models (>10,000 m² or 100+ thermal zones) or complex simulations. They’re optional for small to medium models. Credit use per simulation is based on project size: * Small (0 – 4999 m²): 1 Credit * Medium (5000 – 9999 m²): 2 Credits * Large (10,000 m²+): 5 Credits * Moisture simulations: 1 Credit | Model Size | Energy + Daylight | Moisture | | ----------------------- | :---------------: | :------: | | Small (0 - 4999 m²) | 1 | 1 | | Medium (5000 - 9999 m²) | 2 | - | | Large (10,000 m² +) | 5 | - | ## Buy Credits Credits can be purchased directly on the platform in your Team settings. They’re also included in all annual subscription packages for added value and flexibility. # Academic Plans Our Academic Plan is tailored for students at academic institutions, offering complimentary and paid access to the full Plus Plan. ## Sign-up with your Academic Email Australia - [Link](https://auth.speckel.io/u/signup/identifier?state=hKFo2SAzV0k5NlZFaEZwTHFDdmxCYWR6Sk80cE1wTXFyQ25EeKFur3VuaXZlcnNhbC1sb2dpbqN0aWTZIFFBaEZSLW9MdDJkazd3VXBheTIweU5BVVplYktHS3Bqo2NpZNkgeTF5SmdKb1EyVGtNQVdqaTZ0RE5rU2ZRa3RqMFhiWHY) New Zealand - [Link](https://auth.speckel.io/u/signup/identifier?state=hKFo2SBYUG1JSkJ6R2t3R29tVUFIcG54SkhoOGpwTkt4ajdDeaFur3VuaXZlcnNhbC1sb2dpbqN0aWTZIDd1RGZ1M2ZOY28yZW1XZWhWMHNaa3k5NHdmSzlYQ1gxo2NpZNkgRzl6c2Y5WnE0WjA5YnV0SVBSbEFRQlRmUXFZMFdGbnA) International - [Link](https://auth.speckel.io/u/signup/identifier?state=hKFo2SBjcDNEdE5iRzZFbDYwNHh6QkVpRDVFbER0WWF0NGxRTqFur3VuaXZlcnNhbC1sb2dpbqN0aWTZIG94NUQzYTlzbUhnRUdBcTFvcWtCdzIyNFYzd1R0RUp3o2NpZNkgbXRHQ09KRHpxYm4zd2trSTZzNHBDb3EwbTdCZUJ1ZG8) {% hint style="danger" %} Enjoy a 6-month free trial by signing up with your academic provider's email. To access this offer, use your academic email only, personal emails aren’t eligible, and account details can’t be transferred. Role-based emails, such as those starting with "admin@", "support@", "billing@" or non-professional email addresses (Gmail, Outlook, qq, etc) may not receive mailout's with key feature upgrades, webinars or offers {% endhint %} ## **Academic Students (Individual Accounts)** If you're a student accessing Better Building through a recognised academic provider, just sign up using your academic email and you'll be automatically connected to our Classic Plan. While we don't provide direct support for individual accounts, you'll have full access to all On-demand Courses, so you can start modelling right away! Need help as a group or class? We're happy to arrange remote support sessions, just arrange for the Academic. [Contact us](/support-and-training/contact-us) and we can schedule a support session. ## **Academic Providers (Managed Accounts)** Interested in integrating Better Building into your architecture or engineering curriculum? Our managed accounts are designed for academic providers to efficiently support students at scale, with enhanced tools for management, usage insights, and tailored technical support. With the Academic Providers plan, you can set up a course for Semester 1, invite students as guests to relevant projects, and give them access to everything they need to meet your teaching objectives. At the end of the semester, student access is automatically retracted and can be reassigned for Semester 2—keeping your course structure clean and efficient. Since every course is unique, we offer a customised approach to fit your needs. To learn more or arrange remote support, [contact us.](/support-and-training/contact-us)

# Suppliers Plan We’re committed to supporting building product suppliers who contribute to high-performance building envelope design, addressing key goals like carbon reduction, thermal efficiency, and moisture control. Interested in showcasing your products on Better Building? {% hint style="danger" %} Better Building does not share project-specific information with any third party, including suppliers. For more details, please review our [Terms & Conditions](/sign-up-and-plans/terms-and-conditions), or [contact us](/support-and-training/contact-us) directly. {% endhint %} ## Our Process {% stepper %} {% step %} ### **Get in Touch** All supplier needs are different. [Contact our team](/support-and-training/contact-us) to discuss your products and needs. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### **Provide Product Data** Share material testing and specification details of your products. These are collated in a spreadsheet and then uploaded to the platform. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### **Provide Product Info (Optional)** If you are interested in creating a company page or templates, you will need to provide images, company text, etc. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### **Internal Review** We assess your data submission against our criteria. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### **Publishing** Once approved, we take care of the rest, typically within two weeks. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} ## Supplier Plan Options Our pricing is shown as a monthly rate, with all plans requiring a minimum 12-month commitment.


Lite Free	Thermal Data Only 5 Products Max 0 Templates No Seats Generic Reporting Basic product placement with no branding.
Classic AU$299 /month/annum	Fire, Moisture and Carbon Data Company Page 40 Products Max 8 Templates 3 Seats Branded Reporting Brand exposure and company specific reports.
Premium AU$499 /month/annum	Fire, Moisture and Carbon Data Unlimited Products Multiple Regions Product KPI Tracking 8 Seats Full access and and KPI tracking.

Lite

Free

Thermal Data Only
5 Products Max
0 Templates
No Seats
Generic Reporting

Basic product placement with no branding.

Classic

AU$299 /month/annum

Fire, Moisture and Carbon Data
Company Page
40 Products Max
8 Templates
3 Seats
Branded Reporting

Brand exposure and company specific reports.

Premium

AU$499 /month/annum

Fire, Moisture and Carbon Data
Unlimited Products
Multiple Regions
Product KPI Tracking
8 Seats

Full access and and KPI tracking.

{% hint style="danger" %} Starting September 2025, suppliers will gain access to a new Supplier Plan Dashboard, enabling direct product updates, submissions, and clearer performance tracking. No project-specific data will be shared. All Supplier Plans will be payable from July 1st for the following 12 months or prorated for the relevant period. {% endhint %} ## What is a Product? A product on Better Building represents a unique set of data points defining material layers. For example, Sisalation® Multipurpose EHD 456 is a single product, defined by its distinct thermal, moisture, and carbon data.

Products are typically grouped into Product Ranges. For example, Permatuff™ Building Blanket is a Product Range containing seven distinct products, such as Permatuff™ Building Blanket – Sisalation® Multipurpose MD (432), each defined by unique performance data.

## What is a Template? A template is a predefined assembly of supplier and generic products forming a wall, roof, floor, or glazing system. Templates often reflect fully tested systems or configurations featured in supplier marketing. For example, the Lightweight Timber Wall (S-FI001) template shown above was created in collaboration with a supplier and made available for use by all Better Building users.

The key benefits of templates are brand recognition and user convenience. Instead of searching for individual products, Better Building users can simply select a branded template to quickly perform thermal, carbon, and moisture calculations.

# Terms & Conditions ## **1. TERMS OF USE** ### 1.1 **Introduction** By continuing to browse and use our platform and this website (the "Site"), you, the user ("You"), agree to comply with and be bound by these terms and conditions, including our Privacy Policy and Website Disclaimer. This Agreement governs the relationship between Speckel Pty Ltd ("Better Building,", "Better Building Software", "We," "Our," or "Us") and You. ### 1.2 **Account Creation** To access certain features of the Site, you may be required to create an account. To make sure you receive important updates, support and newsletters, we recommend using **professional work emails with a registered business domain only**. Role-based emails, such as those starting with "admin@", "support@", "billing@" or non-professional email addresses (@gmail, @outlook, @qq, etc) may be **removed without warning**. ### **1.3 Account Sharing** Team accounts are intended for use by individual members of a single organisation sharing a professional email domain. All users within a Team must use email addresses from the same professional domain (e.g., ). Where multiple email domains are detected within a Team, particularly when third-party contractors or external collaborators are using non-professional email addresses including but not limited to Gmail, Xtra, Hotmail, Outlook, QQ, or similar, we reserve the right to pause or remove access to the entire Team account without prior notice. This policy extends to outsourcing. For the purposes of this agreement, outsourcing means passing building simulation modelling work to any individual or team outside the licensed organisation, including freelancers, subcontractors, and offshore modelling teams, regardless of how that arrangement is structured commercially or whether the client's own login credentials are being used to facilitate it. Where outsourcing activity is identified, including through monitoring of access patterns such as activity outside normal business hours or access from locations inconsistent with the registered organisation, we reserve the right to freeze or terminate the account without prior notice. This policy ensures fair use of the platform, with one company per Team account. Organisations with legitimate multi-domain requirements, or those wishing to discuss a compliant arrangement involving external collaborators, should contact our support team to discuss alternative arrangements. ### 1.4 Support All support on and from the platform, including emails, support tickets and external communications are limited to professional domains (e.g.,) only. Where individual emails are used by multiple users, we reserve the right to pause or remove access to the entire Team account without prior notice. This policy ensures fair use of the platform and helps us service you better. ### 1.5 **Amendment of Terms** Better Building reserves the right to modify, update, or amend these terms at any time. You agree to review these terms periodically. Continued use of the Site constitutes acceptance of any changes to these terms. ### 1.6 **Limitation of Liability** Better Building is not responsible for any loss or damage incurred from the use of the Site, including errors or omissions in information, reliance on third-party content, or issues arising from digital products and services provided on the Site. Use of the Site is at your own risk. ### 1.7 **Consumer Protection** In accordance with the Australian Consumer Law (Competition and Consumer Act 2010, Schedule 2), Better Building’s liability is limited to re-supplying the goods or services, replacing the goods, or refunding the cost of those goods or services. ### 1.8 **Age Requirement** You must be at least 18 years of age to use this website and make any purchases. Use of the Site by minors is not permitted. ### 1.9 **Returns and Refunds** Returns are handled according to Australian Consumer Protection legislation. Requests for returns must be made within 10 days of purchase of annual plans, and refunds will be processed via the original payment method, at Better Building’s discretion. Monthly plans are non-refundable. ### 1.10 **Third-Party Links** The Site may contain links to third-party websites. Better Building does not endorse, sponsor, or take responsibility for the content of those sites. You access third-party sites at your own risk. *** ## **2. DISCLAIMER** ### 2.1 **General Information Disclaimer** The content provided on the Site is for informational purposes only. While Better Building strives to ensure the accuracy of the information, it makes no representations or warranties regarding the completeness, reliability, or suitability of the information, services, or products offered. ### 2.2 **Limitation of Liability** Better Building shall not be liable for any loss, damages, or claims arising from the use of the Site, including but not limited to direct, indirect, incidental, or consequential damages. This includes any damages resulting from the use of third-party products, services, or advertisements accessed through the Site. ### 2.3 **Third-Party Websites** The Site may contain links to third-party websites. Better Building does not control the content, availability, or accuracy of these websites, and the inclusion of links does not imply endorsement or approval. You access these sites at your own risk. ### 2.4 **Website Availability** Better Building makes reasonable efforts to ensure the Site is available. However, it does not guarantee continuous availability and will not be held responsible for temporary downtime or technical issues beyond its control. ### 2.5 **Personalised Advice** The information on the Site is general and should not be construed as personal advice. Better Building does not take responsibility for any personal decisions made based on the information provided. ### 2.6 **Advertiser Disclaimer** Better Building makes no warranties regarding the advertisers on the Site or the products or services they offer. Any interaction with advertisers is solely between you and the advertiser, and Better Building shall not be held responsible for any damages incurred. *** ## **3. PRIVACY POLICY** ### 3.1 **Introduction** Better Building respects the privacy and confidentiality of your personal information and adheres to the [Australian Privacy Principles](https://www.oaic.gov.au/privacy/australian-privacy-principles). This Privacy Policy outlines how we collect, use, and protect your personal data. ### 3.2 **Information Collection** Better Building collects personal information, including but not limited to name, email address, billing details, geographic location, and payment information, in order to provide services. We may also collect non-personally identifiable information for analytical purposes. ### 3.3 **Data Usage** We use your personal data to provide services, communicate with you, process payments, and send marketing communications if you have subscribed. You may opt out of marketing communications at any time. ### 3.4 **Data Security** Better Building employs industry-standard security measures to protect your data: * Authentication is managed via Auth0 with optional Two-Factor Authentication (2FA) for enhanced security. * User data is protected under our Privacy Policy and applicable privacy laws. * Daily platform-wide backups are performed to minimise data loss. * Better Building Support may access project/design data only upon written request submitted through our ticket system. Despite our best efforts, no security system is completely impenetrable, and Better Building cannot guarantee the absolute security of your personal information. ### 3.5 **Cookies and Tracking** The Site uses cookies to enhance user experience, analyze website traffic, and deliver relevant ads through third-party services. You may disable cookies through your browser settings, although this may affect the Site's functionality. ### 3.6 **Third-Party Sharing** Better Building does not sell or rent your personal data. We may share it with third-party service providers who help deliver services to you, in accordance with applicable laws and privacy standards. ### 3.7 **Data Retention** We retain your personal data only as long as necessary to provide services and fulfill legal obligations, will notify you promptly in accordance with applicable law if your data is compromised, and in the event of business cessation, will transfer or dispose of your data in compliance with applicable data protection regulations. ### 3.8 **International Transfers** Your personal data may be transferred across borders for storage and processing in countries outside Australia. These transfers will occur only to countries with adequate privacy protections. ### 3.9 **Changes to Privacy Policy** Better Building may update this Privacy Policy from time to time. All changes will be effective immediately upon posting. We encourage you to review this policy periodically to stay informed. ### **3.10 Machine Learning and AI Training** Better Building does not use your personal data, project data, design files, or any other user-generated content for machine learning, artificial intelligence training, or algorithm development purposes. Your data remains exclusively for the provision of our services to you and will not be utilised to train, improve, or develop any machine learning models, AI systems, or automated decision-making technologies. This commitment extends to all forms of data you provide or generate through our platform, including but not limited to project files, communications, usage patterns, and metadata. *** ### **4. CONTACT INFORMATION** If you have any questions regarding these Terms & Conditions, please [contact us](/support-and-training/contact-us). *** ### **5. ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS** By using the Site, you acknowledge that you have read, understood, and agreed to the Terms of Use, Disclaimer, and Privacy Policy outlined herein. If you do not agree with these terms, you must immediately cease using the Site. # News and Updates Within this section, you will find news, updates and announcements. # 2026 # ASHRAE 160 DA07 Moisture FAQ’s

We get asked a lot of questions about **DA07 Criteria for Moisture Control Design Analysis in Buildings**. That's **ASHRAE 160 Criteria for Moisture Control Design Analysis in Buildings** for the rest of the world outside of Australia! And yes, it's the same thing! Some questions are about what the standard actually overs, some about what it actually requires you to do to meet code compliance, and plenty about where the default numbers come from and why they are what they are. So... we've collected the twenty we hear most often into a single list. Consider it a starting point rather than a finished document. As new questions come in, and they will, we'll keep adding to it. These are the twenty questions we get asked most often about applying DA07. We've put them in one place rather than answering them one email at a time, and we'll keep expanding the list as new ones come in.

What is ASHRAE 160/DA07?

It's the AIRAH DA07 standards sets the assessment method for moisture control design analysis in buildings. It is called up in the National Construction Code and is a modified adoption of ASHRAE Standard 160. In practice it tells you what inputs to use, what analysis method is acceptable for residential and commercial buildings, and what result counts as a pass.

What counts as an acceptable analysis tool in ASHRAE 160/DA07?

It has to be transient, with a maximum time step of one hour. It must handle energy transport including phase change, material properties that vary with moisture content, and liquid and vapour transport covering capillary transport, surface deposition, storage, vapour diffusion, and water leakage. Ventilated cavities have to be modelled as cavities. Outputs must include temperature and surface relative humidity at every surface and material interface, plus average temperature and average moisture content for each layer. Steady-state hand calculations do not qualify.

What does ASHRAE 160/DA07 actually cover?

New buildings, retrofits, renovations, all building types, all materials, and all interior and exterior zones and envelope cavities. It's deliberately broad. If you're modelling an assembly, DA07 has an opinion about it.

What does ASHRAE 160/DA07 not cover?

It doesn't address thermal comfort or indoor air quality, and it doesn't address designing components to resist liquid water leakage from rain, groundwater, flooding, or ice dams. Keeping bulk water out is still your job. DA07 tells you what happens to the water that inevitably gets in anyway.

What are the weather data requirements in ASHRAE 160/DA07?

A minimum of ten consecutive years, or the moisture design reference years (the 10th-percentile warmest and 10th-percentile coldest years from a 30-year analysis). Hourly data, including dry-bulb temperature, a humidity measure, solar insolation, wind speed and direction, rainfall, and cloud index. Yes, all of it.\ \ It should be noted that such data is often impractical to source of create, so this particular requirement can be difficult to meet.

How do I set indoor humidity in ASHRAE 160/DA07?

If HVAC equipment and controls are part of the design, use the intended design humidity. If not, pick one of three methods: simplified (a function of daily average outdoor temperature), intermediate (a mass balance using moisture generation and ventilation rates), or full parametric calculation. Whichever you choose, indoor design humidity cannot exceed 70% rh.

What's the simplified method in ASHRAE 160/DA07?

Design RH is 40% below -10°C, then 40% plus (daily average outdoor temperature plus 10) between -10°C and 20°C, capping at 70% above 20°C. Crude, but it exists for a reason: it stops people inventing indoor conditions that flatter the assembly.

What moisture generation rate should I use for a house in ASHRAE 160/DA07?

Occupancy-based. Two occupants minimum, plus one for every bedroom beyond the master. That lands at roughly 7 L/day for one bedroom up to 11 L/day for four, adding 1 L/day per extra bedroom. And if there's a jetted tub in a room without a humidistat-controlled exhaust fan, add another 1.3 L/day.

What ventilation rate applies in ASHRAE 160/DA07 if the building has no designed ventilation system?

Default air exchange rates of 0.2 ach for standard Australian Building Code compliant construction, and 0.1 ach for airtight construction. DA07 also recommends a sensitivity analysis on infiltration, which is good advice. Better sealed buildings push internal humidity up, and the interstitial risk climbs with it, particularly in cool and cold climates.

What's the pass criterion?

Mould index must not exceed 3.00 on any surface, calculated hourly and accumulated over the simulation. The material surface gets assigned to one of four sensitivity classes (Very Sensitive, Sensitive, Medium Resistant, Resistant), and that class drives both the critical relative humidity threshold and the growth coefficients. Choosing the class is a judgement call, so ASHRAE 160/DA07 requires you to state your rationale in the report.

How much rain does ASHRAE 160/DA07 assume gets through the cladding?

One percent of the water reaching the exterior surface, deposited on the outer face of the water-resistive barrier. That's the default in the absence of full-scale test data for the as-built wall system. It sounds pessimistic until you've opened up a few walls. If there's no water-resistive barrier, you have to nominate the deposit site yourself and justify it.

Do I have to model air pressure differentials and airflow in ASHRAE 160/DA07?

No. The analysis is optional under ASHRAE 160/DA07.

If I do include air pressure in ASHRAE 160/DA07, what values do I use?

If the pressure differential is actively controlled, use the controlled value. Otherwise pick one of two alternatives: calculate it from design ventilation rates, airtightness, wind pressures, and stack effect, or use the default of +5 Pa when the 24-hour running average outdoor temperature is below indoor design temperature and -5 Pa when it's above. For buildings taller than three storeys you also calculate stack pressure at the top of the top floor wall and use that instead if it exceeds 5 Pa, unless each floor is effectively pressure isolated.

What airtightness do I assume in ASHRAE 160/DA07 if it hasn't been tested?

0.1 for airtight construction and 0.2 for standard construction. At a 5 Pa design pressure that works out to roughly 0.016 L/s per m2 and 0.084 L/s per m2 respectively. If you do know the measured airtightness, use it, and describe the airflow pathways and why you chose them.

What initial moisture content do materials start at in ASHRAE 160/DA07?

For new construction, twice EMC90 for concrete and twice EMC80 for everything else. If the project specifies procedures to dry materials or protect them from wetting during construction, you can drop to EMC90 and EMC80. For retrofits, EMC90 and EMC80 apply unless you have measured values. The doubling is a nod to reality: materials arrive on site wetter than anyone would like.

What indoor temperature should I use in ASHRAE 160/DA07?

If the design, operating specification, or applicable code sets one, use that. Otherwise DA07 ties it to the 24-hour running average outdoor temperature. Below 18.3°C outdoors, indoor design temperature is 21.1°C. Between 18.3°C and 21.1°C, it floats at outdoor plus 2.8°C. Above 21.1°C it stays at outdoor plus 2.8°C for heating-only buildings, or caps at 23.9°C where air conditioning is present.

What happens to indoor humidity in ASHRAE 160/DA07 when the building is air conditioned?

If the equipment runs on thermostat control alone, indoor design humidity ratio is 0.004 plus 0.4 times the mean coincident design outdoor humidity ratio for cooling at the 1% annual basis. If the equipment has humidity control, use the specified setting or that calculated value, whichever is lower. No setting specified? Assume 50% rh.

How is wind-driven rain calculated in ASHRAE 160/DA07?

Rain deposition on a vertical wall is the product of the exposure factor, the deposition factor, an empirical constant of 0.2, hourly average wind speed at 10 m, the cosine of the wind angle to the wall normal, and horizontal rainfall intensity. Exposure factor runs from 0.7 for sheltered low buildings to 1.5 for anything over 20 m, with severe exposure covering hilltops, coastal sites, and funnelled wind. Deposition factor is 0.35 for walls under a steep-slope roof, 0.5 under a low-slope roof, and 1.0 for walls taking runoff from above. That last one is a fourfold jump, which is why parapets and unflashed transitions keep showing up in failure investigations.

Is mould the only performance criterion in ASHRAE 160/DA07?

No. Corrosion gets its own treatment. Requirements are meant to come from the properties and function of the specific metals used, and where that information isn't available, DA07 falls back on the 30-day running average of hourly surface relative humidity at the metal. Worth noting the extract you've supplied cuts off mid-sentence at that threshold, so check the source document for the actual limit before quoting a number.

What do I have to include in the ASHRAE 160/DA07 report?

More than most people expect. A description of the assembly (type, orientation, surface coefficients, air space locations and ventilation rates, material list with data sources), full material data for every layer (thickness, density, conductivity, specific heat, vapour permeance, sorption isotherm, liquid diffusivity, suction isotherm, initial moisture content), general building information, and a record of every methodological choice you made: which humidity method, whether airflow was considered, weather data source, exposure and deposition factors, mould sensitivity class and decline coefficient with rationale, and the name and description of the analysis software. The reporting section is effectively an audit trail, and it's the part that separates a defensible assessment from a screenshot of a graph.

# Weekend Maintenance Updates Coming Fri 31st July – Sun 2nd August

You've probably noticed we've been shipping a lot of new features lately. New [climate features](/sign-up-and-plans/news-and-updates/2026/new-climate-feature) and a [new solver for moisture](/sign-up-and-plans/news-and-updates/2026/we-built-our-own-hygrothermal-solver)! Some that are visible, new features, tweaks, the usual. But there's also a chunk of work happening under the hood for security, stability, data management that you won't see directly. Starting Friday evening AEST, we're deploying a set of backend upgrades. These won't add anything new on their own, but they lay the groundwork for future features we're not ready to talk about yet. {% hint style="warning" %} **While this overdue migration occurs, we suggest you avoid using Better Building as we would like to remove any risk of data loss that may occur.** {% endhint %} Our upgrade work runs from **Friday evening through Sunday evening AEST**. If everything goes to plan, you won't notice anything at all. If something looks off early next week, please get in touch and we'll sort it out. Migrations like this occasionally leave a bug or two behind! Thanks for your patience with us while we get this done. # BB HAMT Demo - Now Available {% embed url="" %} Better Building used to lean on EnergyPlus, specifically the finite element heat transfer solver that showed up in version 9.5. It was fine for walls, using the same Kunzel equations that underpin WUFI, but it started falling over for roofs and anything beyond the basics. The team ended up engineering workarounds just to match capabilities WUFI already had natively, which is the kind of thing you do reluctantly as no one likes a workaround. . So towards the end of last year they decided to just build their own solver instead of patching around someone else's. ## BB HAMT The result is BB HAMT, a cloud-based heat and moisture solver that's now the only moisture modeling option on the platform (EnergyPlus has been cut over entirely). It's been validated against the HAMSTAD benchmarks and EN 15026, with results tracking closely against reference temperature and moisture profiles. ## **Demo Summary** The demo covered: * **Materials**: drag-and-drop with hydrothermal data attached, with a private material directory coming for users to manage their own datasets (thermal, moisture, carbon, etc). * **Climate files**: upload your own EPW, get automatic data quality warnings (mostly precipitation-related, which is the perennial headache with weather files), plus a "drying potential" view by facade to help you pick your critical orientation before you've even started modeling. * **The input form**: analogous to WUFI or Delphin, covering objectives, orientation, run periods, mould growth targets (NCC default of 3), initial conditions, and equilibrium moisture content. Worth noting: the 90% x 2 EMC requirement for concrete is often physically impossible since it exceeds the material's actual moisture storage capacity, so expect to tweak that one. * **Cavity ventilation**: dynamic air change modeling based on high/low openings, discharge coefficients, and inlet area. * **Driving rain**: 1% source method off the climate file, standard exposure and deposition factors. * **Results**: high-level summary reports (mould growth, RH, water content, flux) plus a detailed point-selection tool for pulling hourly data at specific depths within the assembly. # New Climate Feature Available today As of today, you'll find a brand new Climate feature in the dropdown menu.

Climate lets you load an EPW weather file and quickly explore your local climate using a range of visualisation and analysis tools. Simply drag and drop an EPW file, or choose one from your local drive, and you'll have access to thermal comfort analysis, wind and moisture insights, and much more. ## Load your climate file

Once you load an EPW file, we'll automatically perform a quality review of the climate data. You can find the results under the **Review** tab, where you'll get a quick assessment of the file before diving into the analysis. If you'd like to inspect the raw data, head over to the **Table** tab to view all of the information contained in your climate file. ## Explore the climate From there, it's up to you. ### Heat Maps

The Heat Maps view gives you an easy way to explore annual climate patterns, including: * Dry-bulb temperature * Global, direct and diffuse solar radiation * Humidity * Wind * Precipitation * Thermal comfort It's a great way to quickly understand how conditions vary throughout the year. ### Degree Days

Jump into Degree Days to explore heating and cooling degree day profiles using different base temperatures. This makes it easy to understand the heating and cooling demands of your climate. ### Psychrometric

The Psychrometric view plots your climate data against several well-known comfort models, including: * ASHRAE 55 * Givoni * PMV This helps you understand how local climate conditions relate to recognised thermal comfort envelopes. ### Comfort

The Comfort section brings together several comfort models, including ASHRAE 55, EN 16798, and PMV, so you can explore: * Annual comfort hours * Natural ventilation potential * Comfort by hour * Adaptive comfort bands * Daily calendar views These views make it easy to understand when and how often conditions fall within comfortable ranges. ### Sky Conditions

Use Sky Conditions to explore annual sky distributions and sky illuminance. These visualisations provide a better understanding of the daylight conditions that may influence your design. ### Drying Potential

The Drying Potential tool helps answer an important hydrothermal modelling question: *Which wall orientation is the most critical from a drying perspective?* This can help you make more informed decisions when assessing moisture performance. ### Interior Climate

Finally, Interior Climate lets you explore a range of indoor climate conditions that you may want to use as boundary conditions for hydrothermal modelling. ## We're just getting started There's already plenty to explore, and this feature will continue to grow over time. If you have ideas, suggestions, or features you'd like to see, we'd love to hear from you. Simply use the Support button in the top-right corner of the application to raise a ticket. Your feedback will help us shape future updates and make the Climate tools even more useful. # We built our own hygrothermal solver For roughly the last six months we've been building something that scratches an itch I've had for years and provided a few headaches and sleepless nights along the way... the [Better Building](https://www.betterbuilding.io/) heat and moisture transfer solver. An obvious question might be why? There are already strong tested software solutions for this, and there have been for a while. Interest in hygrothermal (hygro = moisture, thermal = heat) modelling solvers appear to have built to a peak in the early 2000s, and since then the field has settled around a handful of established names. TU Dresden gave us Delphin. The Fraunhofer Institute gave us WUFI. Anyone working in this space is likely to know both of them, and knows they earn their reputation that has built on empirical evidence and careful verification. Since then, hygrothermal modelling has increased in both popularity as a way to validate design decisions and also to tick the boxes of compliance. The later is not always a good thing! As such, we thought it was time to put hygrothermal modelling in front of a much wider audience, sitting inside the Better Building platform ready to use for our clients, and ***we didn't bolt a surcharge onto it either.*** > [Register For Early Access to the Better Building HAMT Solver](https://forms.cloud.microsoft/r/AVZkByxN7z) #### What's new? For a long time your weather file was inherited from your project information on Better Building. Our hygrothermal modelling now lets you override it and upload your own weather file, which sounds like a small thing but its not. If you can find a [Moisture Design Reference Year](https://www.linkedin.com/pulse/moisture-design-refernce-years-mdrys-tim-law-7x9zc/) file, you can pop it in here!

Article content — Our weather file processing has had a big lift!

Setup is quick. In theory you can have a project defined in under 5 mins, from a blank screen to a built wall or roof. And that 5 mins covers the simulation runtime for a multi-year study, which still feels slightly unreasonable to type out. But its fact... this is a very quick process if you are confident about your inputs and overall assumptions (the much harder bit). Ogh, and that 5 mins also covers your reporting! ### The adventures of driving rain The genuinely fiddly part was better accountability of precipitation, or driving rain. Getting driving rain (and air infiltration) modelled properly, as sources rather than workarounds in EnergyPlus, took a lot of care, and the results correlate very closely to what you'd expect. Water is where hygrothermal models tend to quietly fall apart, so this is the bit we sweated over most.

#### The testing A hygrothermal solver you can't check against something is just a confident guess. We held ours to two industry benchmarks. The first was HAMSTAD, and there's a test report in our documentation if you want to see the numbers. The second was EN 15026, another hygrothermal performance benchmark.

Read on - Between them they allow us to review solver drying, air pressure, rapid transient responses, and capillary active behaviour, amongst other bits. The point of all of it was to confirm the solver responds the way other established software responds using the same tests, rather than the way we'd like to believe it does. The good news... all tests passed that laid the ground work for tests outside of there scope, such as driving rain, suction and redistribution, explicit radiation and a hose of other important consideration for hygrothermal design. #### Cavity ventilation with a little less hand-waving Many tools in this domain let you assume a fixed air change rate for an externally ventilated cavity and move on. We kept that option, but we also added a validated dynamic method for when it isn't.

If you opt in, the solver reuses the local wind direction, speed and solar loading already acting on your outer wall finish to estimate the air velocity through a drained and ventilated cavity, and from there the air exchange happening inside it. That gives you a far more honest read on the cavity's drying capacity than a single assumed figure ever could, and the reasoning is laid out in detail in the post-processing so you can see how it got there. #### Summarised reporting Results come with extensive reporting and two ways to explore the data, low resolution for the overview and high resolution when you need to drill into a single minute of the study. That matters more than it sounds. It lets you confirm for yourself whether the hygrothermal behaviour matches what you believe it should be, and whether the system you're looking at is genuinely safe and durable, instead of trusting a summary chart and hoping

It's been a big build, and it's ready to go. We're [opening early access first](https://forms.cloud.microsoft/r/AVZkByxN7z). We've already collected plenty of names from people wanting in, and there's a form above if you'd like to be one of the last few to get on the list and learn a bit more before it goes live. Early access will close on Wednesday 29th of July. # ASHRAE 2016 Appendix G is Coming Next Week At the start of the year we released ASHRAE 2019 Appendix G, covering both the Performance Rating Method (PRM) and the Energy Cost Budget Method. At the time, our plan was straightforward. Ship 2019, then move on to ASHRAE 2022 as the next pathway. That's not what happened. ### Why We Paused on 2022? A lot of you got in touch to say: not yet. Hold off on 2022 until it's clearer what's happening with LEED. It was good advice. LEED has historically lagged behind the latest ASHRAE releases by design, giving the industry time to adjust before a new standard becomes the reference point for compliance. Jumping straight to 2022 risked building a pathway that wasn't actually usable for LEED registration for some time yet. ### What We Learned? LEED registration is now confirmed to run on its current pathway for the foreseeable future. Rather than ASHRAE 2022 sitting under used while everyone waits for LEED to catch up, the more useful next step turned out to be a standard behind us, not ahead: ASHRAE 2016**.** A lot of projects, particularly those targeting LEED or working with local Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJs) that haven't yet adopted 2019 or 2022, still need 2016 as their reference standard. Skipping it to get to 2022 sooner would have left that group without a supported pathway at all. ### What's Changing Next Week? **ASHRAE 2016 Appendix G becomes available for registration.** You'll be able to register and run ASHRAE 2016 the exact same way you already register and run ASHRAE 2019 today, same workflow, same interface, no new steps to learn. ASHRAE **2016 runs alongside** ASHRAE **2019, not instead of it.** This isn't a replacement. Both pathways will be available side by side, so nothing you've already set up for 2019 changes or breaks. **You can run both pathways on the same project at once.** This is the part we think will matter most in practice. If your project needs to satisfy LEED using ASHRAE 2016 and your local AHJ using ASHRAE 2019 (or vice versa), you no longer have to choose one standard and hope it satisfies both requirements. You can run both compliance pathways in parallel on a single project and get results for each. ### Who This Is For? * Teams targeting LEED certification where 2016 remains the applicable standard for registration * Projects in jurisdictions where the local AHJ has adopted ASHRAE 2016 but not yet ASHRAE 2019 or ASHRAE 2022 * Anyone currently maintaining two separate models or workflows to cover both a LEED pathway and a local code pathway — this collapses that into one project ### What Doesn't Change * Your existing ASHRAE 2019 models, projects, and results are unaffected * The registration and setup process is the same one you already use for 2019 * No migration or rework is required for current projects ### Getting Access ASHRAE 2016 support goes live next week. We're offering early access and a short walkthrough session for anyone who wants to see the new pathway in action and ask questions directly before it's generally available. To register your interest and get on the schedule, use the button below. Register for Early Access # Pricing update, and what's coming with it! Starting 1st of September this year, [our plans](/sign-up-and-plans/plans) are going up by 5%. Here are the new prices per plan.

	Classic	Plus	Premium	Enterprise
No. of Seats	3	5	8	20
Per Month	$83	$209	$346	Contact Us
Additional Team Member Per Month	+ $28	+ $42	+ $44	Contact Us
Per Annum (2 months free)	$830	$2090	$3460	Contact Us
Additional Team Member Per Annum	+ $277	+ $418	+ $433	Contact Us

Simply put, the increase applies at your next billing cycle. If you're on a monthly plan, that means it'll hit sooner, likely your very next payment after the 31st. If you're on an annual plan, it won't apply until your subscription renews, whenever that falls in the year ahead. Nobody enjoys a price increase. So we've tried to make sure it comes with something to show for it. In September, Classic, Plus, and Premium plans are getting lots of new capability, aimed at expanding what you can do on the architectural and engineering side of environmental design. This includes: * New approaches to hygrothermal modelling for both walls and roof systems * 2D thermal bridging analysis * A batch of daylight studies, including solar reflectivity, internal glare and UTCI assessments * Climate-based features, including an integrated future climate file projection built directly into the platform, so you no longer need an external process to generate those files We'll be in touch with more detail on rollout as September approaches. If you've got questions about how the increase affects your specific plan, reach out any time. # The Lite Plan is Sunsetting 99% of our clients won't be affected by this. If you are not on the Lite plan, feel free to click away. For those that are, read on. We tried. About a year ago we added the Lite Plan to the platform, a very low-cost plan built around H1, AS1, and VM1. It was a nice idea but never really caught on. A few of folks are still using it, but keeping a plan alive for a handful of accounts isn't sustainable, so we've made the call to retire it. **As of the 1st of September this year, the Lite Plan is going away.** If you're currently on the Lite Plan, you'll need to consider what's next, whether that's moving to [another plan](https://betterbuilding.io/plans) or migrating back to the world of the spreadsheet! You don't need to worry about your project information. We'll retain all of it, and you'll keep full access, with or without a paid plan. One thing you don't need to worry about: your project information isn't going anywhere. We'll retain all of it, and you'll keep full access, regardless of what plan you move to. We'll follow up with more details on next steps before the August deadline. If you've got questions in the meantime, just reach out. # A new hygrothermal solver (and goodbye, EnergyPlus HAMT) A few years ago we went all in on EnergyPlus HAMT simulations, built on the back of Künzel's seminal 1994 work on heat and moisture transport. The goal was to use the value already sitting inside EnergyPlus to make hygrothermal modeling, and in our case the assessment of condensation risk in walls, more available to more people and a little less painful to actually get an answer out of. That worked, for a while. But as we added features year after year, we kept running into the same wall (pun intended). Our requirements, and yours, were constantly bumping up against the limitations of EnergyPlus HAMT. None of them were dramatic on their own. They were just small, important things that quietly added up. Over time it became clear that EnergyPlus didn't have a clear development priority for hygrothermal simulation. That's fair enough, it's an enormous simulation engine with a lot of competing demands, but it left us asking what was actually best for Better Building going forward. The answer turned out to be the obvious one: build our own. We started six months ago, and it's being released next month. For those looking to gain access early, we are collecting your interest via the link below. Register for Early Access ### The Better Building HAMT Solver The short version is that we now have our own hygrothermal solver, and it is fully validated. It passes the [HAMSTAD ](/support-and-training/other-support/testing-and-verification/hamstad-benchmark-test-report)and [EN 15026 ](/support-and-training/other-support/testing-and-verification/bs-en-15026-2023-hygrothermal-performance-benchmark-test)benchmarks along with the other benchmark exercises that any comparable downloadable package would be expected to meet. In practical terms, we're no longer limited by the small but important gaps in EnergyPlus HAMT. We can now state alignment with the ASHRAE 160 and DA07 standards directly, which means compliance work and building improvement can both be resolved inside the new solver, with full confidence, for wall and roof systems alike. We've been testing for a month now, and we're happy with where things are landing. Our results line up with the other hygrothermal software on the market, which is exactly what you want to see from something this new. ### What changes in July? Toward the end of July, you'll see two things. First, a formal sunsetting of our EnergyPlus HAMT simulations. Second, a real speedup. You'll be able to run multiple orientations parametrically and get hygrothermal results back in around 60 seconds, with the report written for you. This is a big step. But it isn't the only one we're taking toward more detail-oriented building environments, so think of it as the first of a few. Register for Early Access # A note on outsourcing and platform access

If you're outsourcing your building simulation modelling work to teams overseas on Better Building, this is a must reading. If you're not, carry on. If that was a yes to that above, you're in a small yet growing minority of our clients who do this, and we want to be upfront: we're not opposed to outsourcing in principle. For clarity, here's what we mean by outsourcing in this context. Outsourcing is where a licensed client passes building simulation modelling work to a third party, typically an individual or team located outside the client's organisation, who then accesses our platform and training materials to complete that work. This includes freelancers, subcontractors, and offshore modelling teams, regardless of how the arrangement is structured commercially or whether the client's own login credentials are being used to facilitate it. > *The Better Building platform was built to make building simulation modelling fast, and fast means you can turn models around in hours rather than days. Outsourcing was never really part of the value equation we designed for.* The problem is a practical one. When work is handed off to teams in Vietnam, the Philippines, India, Pakistan, or elsewhere, those teams are often accessing our platform and training materials without any corresponding licence or subscription. That's not something we can keep absorbing. So, two things are changing. 1. First, our[ terms and conditions](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/sign-up-and-plans/terms-and-conditions) are being updated to make outsourcing restrictions explicit. If we detect that a client account is being accessed or used by third parties outside the licensed organisation, the account will be **frozen for a minimum of 7 days**. We know that sounds blunt, but clarity now is better than an awkward conversation later. 2. Second, we're implementing background monitoring for unusual access patterns, including activity outside normal business hours in your region. This will be reported to us daily. It's partly our protection, and honestly partly yours too, since off-hours account activity isn't always something you'd want either. We'd genuinely prefer a world where none of this is necessary. But if outsourcing is part of your building simulation modelling workflow, the path forward is transparency: talk to us @ [support@betterbuilding.io](/support-and-training), and we'll work out an arrangement where everyone is appropriately licensed and nobody is operating in a grey area. That's the outcome we're actually after. # ASHRAE 90.1 Modeling Demo Simbuild 26 I Lake Harriet (4th Floor) on Thursday (21/May) at 3 pm - 3.30 pm. After 6 months of development, Better Building released our ASHRAE 90.1 (2019) Performance Rating Method and Energy Cost Budget Method workflows early this year.

It has been a massive endeavour and the benefits are clear with very quick ASHRAE 90.1 (2019) compliance models, typically in an hour or two, from start to finish. {% hint style="success" %} To give you the opportunity to get a better understanding of the platform , we will run through a quick Performance Rating Method and Energy Cost Budget Method demo in the **Lake Harriet (4th Floor) on Thursday (21/May) at 3:00pm - 3:30pm. We will also provide free access for 45 days after a one-to-one demo.** [**Book a time here.** ](https://betterbuilding.io/book-a-demo) {% endhint %}

At the end of this session, we hope to illustrate how a fast native CAD experience, baseline automation and reporting renders ASHRAE 90.1 (2019) as a very quick and simply process. # NCC 2025: Section J I Release Date

NCC 2025 is out. Well in Victoria it is! Other States and Territories are on the waiting list. And as with most things in this industry, it has arrived with more complexity than any of us were banking on. Understanding the new provisions takes time. Building reliable automation on top of them takes considerably more. Our full release is tracking for sometime after **September**, but there's already something worth knowing about. Part J4 Building Fabric (well Specification 37 at least) is [available right now](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/user-guide/tools-and-plugins/ncc-2025-the-facade-calculator), at no cost. If the '[facade calculator](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/user-guide/tools-and-plugins/ncc-2025-the-facade-calculator)' is your immediate concern, you don't have to wait. J1V3 is the bigger lift. What's needed isn't a patch on the existing methodology but a more robust and flexible approach. Add some genuinely convoluted PV applications in the reference building and you start to see why September is the honest answer. We'll be testing properly and checking in with the ABCB before anything ships. More to come. Thanks for your patience. # Call to all Architects. Three months free.

If you're an architect who can't get approved for energy or daylight modelling software, this is for you. We're giving **three months of free platform access** to Better Building to practicing architects in **Australia, New Zealand and the United States**. No trial-size features, no bait-and-switch to a paid tier mid-way through. The only functional limitation is a maximum building size of 1000m2 (or 10764 square foot). ### **Why?** We haven't had a bump on the head or believe giving away anything for free converts you to a paid user. After seven years of running this platform, we've arrived at an honest and slightly uncomfortable conclusion: > architects, generally speaking, don't or can't engage deeply with energy or daylight modelling side of their designs. Let's be very clear, this isn't a complaint and varies highly depending on the market, location you are in and individuals in your business. Architects manage consultants, clients, council submissions, contractor queries, and about hundred other things simultaneously. Energy or daylight modelling tends to get handed to a specialist somewhere between schematic design and documentation, which means it also gets handed away as a design input. The project pays for that decision in consultant fees. But the less obvious cost is to the architect's own understanding of the building they've designed. Energy or daylight modelling becomes someone else's problem and something that happens to your project rather than something that informs it. That's the thing we're trying to shift. ### **What** Better Building **does?** Let's give you the quick overview. Better Building runs energy, daylight, moisture, and carbon analysis in one place, and it scales with how far you actually want to take it.

Most analysis tools assume you either want a quick compliance check or a full detailed model. Better Building works across that entire range, from early concept through to full energy modelling, and you can stop wherever the project warrants. Not every building needs a detailed model. But every building benefits from knowing it's heading in the right direction before that direction becomes expensive to change. The early-stage use case is probably the most underused. Running analysis during concept design, even rough analysis, tells you whether your orientation, massing, and glazing ratios are working with the climate or against it. That's information worth having in week two, not week twenty-two. And because Better Building covers energy, daylight, moisture, and carbon together rather than treating them as separate problems requiring separate tools, you're not making a decision about one variable while accidentally breaking another. It's not going to replace specialist simulation on technically complex projects. But it closes a gap that most practices currently manage by either skipping the analysis or outsourcing it at the point where the results can't change anything useful. Knowing you're heading the right direction, early enough to actually steer, is what it's built for. ### **What we need from you?** To be eligible, you'll need to be a current member of a **recognised professional association** in Australia, New Zealand, or the United States. That means NZIA, the AIA, the AAA, the AIASA, or equivalent state and national bodies. This isn't bureaucracy for its own sake. It's the only reasonable way we have of confirming you're a practicing architect. If you're not currently a member of a professional body, we'd have no reliable way to verify that, so we've drawn the line there. It's a blunt instrument, but it's the one we have. If you are a member, the signup process is straightforward. No portfolio submission, no justification of interest, no form asking you to describe your design philosophy in 200 words or less. You sign up, you get access, you use it. ### **Not convinced? Here is the final pitch** We believe that architects who engage with energy or daylight modelling early make better design decisions. We also believe that many of todays modelling tools are either too simple to be useful or too complex to be practical without dedicated training. We sit in the sweet spot. Three months is enough time to form an actual opinion about that rather than a first-impression one. [Book a Demo and let's see if we can peak your interest.](https://betterbuilding.io/book-a-demo) # NCC 2025 Facade Calculator: A Practical Guide to Compliance Victoria's adoption of the National Construction Code 2025 marks a meaningful shift in how energy efficiency is assessed for commercial facades. Among the more consequential changes is the introduction of Specification 37, which governs facade compliance for Class 3 through 9 buildings and underpins the tool commonly referred to as the Facade Calculator.

This article provides a working overview of Specification 37, explains how the Facade Calculator operates in practice, identifies the compliance levers available to designers and specifiers, and offers a worked example for a typical office building in Melbourne. The intent is not to replicate the code itself, but to give practitioners a clear sense of what the tool expects, where it tends to fail, and how to respond constructively when it does. **Access the tool here:** [NCC 2025: The Facade Calculator](https://files.betterbuilding.io/docs/ncc_2025_facade_calculator_v_1_0.html) (and save it in your browser) **Access the Docs here:** [NCC 2025: The Facade Calculator Documentation ](/user-guide/tools-and-plugins/ncc-2025-vol-1-the-facade-calculator) {% hint style="info" %} This calculator is not legal or professional advice and at the risk of the user, as per the ABCB NCC 2022 notice and disclaimer. Better Building have thoroughly tested and reviewed all inputs, calculations and outputs in this tool. Any bugs or errors can be reported to [support@betterbuilding.io](/support-and-training). {% endhint %} *** ### What is Specification 37? Specification 37 is the energy efficiency provision within NCC 2025 that establishes compliance pathways for the external facades of commercial buildings. In other words, it's the facade calculator. It replaces and substantially updates the previous glazing and facade requirements, with a notable shift in emphasis: external shading is now treated as a primary design mechanism, rather than an optional enhancement. In practical terms, Specification 37 sets performance targets for two key metrics: * **Wall glazing U-value:** A measure of the rate of heat transfer through the combined wall and glazing assembly. Lower values indicate better thermal resistance. * **Solar admittance:** A measure of how much solar energy is transmitted through the facade into the conditioned space. This is influenced by both the glazing specification (specifically the Solar Heat Gain Coefficient, or SHGC) and the presence of external shading. Compliance is assessed against both targets. Failing either constitutes a non-compliant outcome, and, as will become apparent, solar admittance is by far the more demanding of the two for typical commercial facades. *** ### The Facade Calculator The Facade Calculator is a free software tool designed to evaluate compliance against Specification 37. Users define a set of project inputs and the tool returns a compliance result for each facade orientation, highlighting failures and providing the underlying equations for review. The key inputs are as follows: * **Climate zone:** Determines the applicable performance targets. Results vary considerably between Melbourne (zone 6), Brisbane (zone 2), and Hobart (zone 7), so it is important to select the correct zone before drawing any conclusions. * **Building class:** Selects the applicable compliance pathway. Class 5-9 (commercial offices, retail, public assembly) and Class 3-9c (residential components of mixed-use buildings) have different targets, and this distinction has a material impact on results. * **Wall area and orientation:** The physical dimensions of each facade being assessed. * **Window-to-wall ratio (WWR):** The proportion of the facade that is glazed. * **Glazing system specification:** Including the U-value and SHGC of the selected glazing product. * **Shading geometry:** The projection depth of any horizontal or vertical external shading elements. The tool supports loading and saving projects, allows inspection of the design equations used in each calculation, and produces an exportable compliance report. *** ### Building Class and Its Effect on Compliance Thresholds Before working through a facade design, it is worth understanding how sensitive the results are to building class selection. The difference between Class 5-9 and Class 3-9c is not subtle. As a baseline example: a Class 5 office building in Melbourne climate zone 6, with a 30% window-to-wall ratio and a reasonable mid-range glazing specification, will generally achieve compliance under Specification 37.

The same geometry and glazing specification applied to a Class 3-9c building will fail immediately.

This matters in practice because mixed-use developments are common, and the residential floors within a commercial project are subject to different and more demanding requirements. A compliance strategy that works for the office floors may not translate to the apartments above. *** ### Why 30% Window-to-Wall Ratio Is Not a Realistic Starting Point It is worth acknowledging directly that a 30% window-to-wall ratio, while code-compliant in some configurations, is not representative of how most commercial office buildings are currently designed. The contemporary Australian commercial market has normalised glazed facades in the 50-70% range, and in some cases higher. Curtain wall systems are standard. The aesthetic and leasing expectations that drive façade design have not moderated to align with what older energy codes might have preferred. Specification 37 does not require designers to abandon contemporary facade systems. But it does require that those facades be accompanied by a substantive shading strategy. This is the central message of NCC 2025 in this area: glazing area is permissible, but it must be appropriately managed. The Facade Calculator reflects this intent. At 50% window-to-wall ratio for a Class 5 office in Melbourne, without external shading and with a mid-range glazing specification, the tool will return a failure across all orientations. Both the wall glazing U-value target and the solar admittance target will typically be missed, and this is represented visually in the tool as a pink result indicator. *** ### A Worked Compliance Example: Class 5 Office, Melbourne, 50% WWR The following example walks through a compliance strategy for a reasonably typical scenario: a Class 5 commercial office building in Melbourne (climate zone 6) with a 50% window-to-wall ratio. #### Step 1: Establish the Baseline Begin with the building geometry and a representative glazing specification. A standard low-e double-glazed clear unit will typically return an SHGC in the range of 0.35 and a centre-of-glass U-value around 2.8. At 50% WWR with no shading, this will fail both targets under Specification 37.

#### Step 2: Optimise the Solar Heat Gain Coefficient The solar admittance target is addressed first, because it is the more restrictive constraint and because the SHGC has a hard floor defined by what the glazing market can actually supply. There is no value in designing to an SHGC that cannot be procured.

For a triple low-e glazing system, an SHGC of approximately 0.26 is achievable and commercially available. This represents a significant reduction in solar transmission compared to low-e double-glazed clear, and it forms the foundation of a viable compliance strategy. Reduce the SHGC to this level before adding shading, so that the required shading depth is minimised. #### Step 3: Apply External Horizontal Shading With the SHGC reduced, the next step is to add external horizontal shading. Specification 37 places considerable weight on external shading as a compliance mechanism, and the calculator will reflect this in the results. For the scenario described above, a horizontal shading projection of approximately 300mm above each glazed panel will typically be sufficient to achieve the solar admittance target on the affected orientations. This applies to all facades in the model. The south facade is not a significant contributor to solar heat gain in Melbourne, but the simplified compliance model does not distinguish between orientations in the way that a detailed simulation would. For the purposes of the calculator, applying a consistent shading depth across all facades is an acceptable approach.

Vertical shading elements can also be specified within the tool, and they are worth investigating in specific circumstances. However, as a general rule, horizontal shading is considerably more effective at reducing solar admittance than vertical shading for Melbourne's climate and sun angles. Unless the design intent specifically calls for vertical fins, horizontal projection should be the primary lever. #### Step 4: Address the Wall U-Value Once the solar admittance target is resolved, attention turns to the wall glazing U-value. For facades that incorporate spandrel panels, this is where the performance can unravel quickly. Spandrel panels are, by their nature, thermally poor: they are typically single-skin aluminium or glass with minimal insulation, and a system R-value of around 1.0 is a realistic assessment of their performance.

To achieve compliance on the wall U-value target, the total system U-value generally needs to be reduced to approximately 2.6. This may require improvements to the spandrel assembly, the frame specification, or both. The ca^lculator allows the proposed wall R-value to be adjusted independently of the glazing specification, making it straightforward to identify the minimum performance level required for compliance. #### Outcome Following the steps above, a compliant outcome is achievable for a Class 5 office in Melbourne at 50% window-to-wall ratio, with: * A triple low-e glazing system at approximately SHGC 0.26 * External horizontal shading of approximately 300mm projection * A total system U-value of approximately 2.6 This is not a particularly unusual specification. The glazing is procurable, the shading depth is architecturally manageable, and the wall performance target is achievable with standard construction details. The compliance pathway exists, it just requires deliberate design decisions rather than a default specification. *** ### Let's Wrap this Up Specification 37 represents a considered and reasonably pragmatic update to the facade energy efficiency provisions of the National Construction Code. It does not prohibit highly glazed facades, but it does require that those facades be designed with external shading and appropriate glazing specifications. This is not unreasonable: the principle that large areas of glass without shading generate cooling loads is not controversial, and the code is simply requiring that it be addressed explicitly. The [Facade Calculator](/user-guide/tools-and-plugins/ncc-2025-vol-1-the-facade-calculator) provides a transparent and accessible means of evaluating compliance. It is free to use, it exposes the underlying equations, and it produces exportable results. For practitioners working to NCC 2025 in Victoria, it is the appropriate starting point for facade compliance assessment. The hierarchy of compliance decisions is clear: 1. Select the correct building class and climate zone. 2. Establish the window-to-wall ratio that the design intent requires. 3. Reduce the SHGC to the lowest value that is commercially procurable. 4. Apply external horizontal shading to meet the solar admittance target. 5. Verify and optimise the wall assembly to meet the U-value target. Following this sequence will, in most cases, produce a compliant outcome without requiring fundamental changes to the architectural intent of the facade. The code wants shading. Design for shading, and the rest tends to follow. # ASHRAE 90.1 Workflow Updates

Since launching our ASHRAE 90.1 duel-workflow for the Performance Cost Index and Energy Cost Budget Method compliance, we've spent a good chunk of time talking to users about where things stand and, more usefully, where they should go next. Those conversations pointed pretty clearly to three areas worth addressing: reporting, HVAC transparency, and Imperial units. So that's what we built. ## **Our ASHRAE 90.1 Reporting** Automated reporting is one of those things that sounds like a nice-to-have until you've filled out your fifth PDF by hand. Anyone who has run a compliance model knows the drill: the simulation is done, the numbers check out, and then you spend another afternoon manually transcribing outputs into a submission template that someone designed in 2009 and has not been touched since. We've aligned our outputs to standard reporting requirements so that step is handled automatically. The reports come out formatted and ready to submit, not as a data dump you have to interpret and reformat yourself. Right now this covers the core ASHRAE 90.1 compliance documentation, and we expect the scope to expand as more jurisdictions and state-level modeling mandates come into the picture. The structure is there to support that without it becoming a bespoke exercise every time. ## **HVAC Specification Transparency** This one matters more than it might sound, and it gets at something that frustrates a lot of energy modelers: the gap between what you specified and what the software actually modeled. We've reworked how HVAC specifications are presented so that both the baseline (or budget) and proposed systems are visible in a clear, parallel view. System type, capacity, efficiency ratings, ventilation rates, controls logic, the things that actually drive your energy results are now surfaced in a readable format rather than buried in input screens or inferred from outputs after the fact. The goal is to give you a legible audit trail: here is what was specified, here is what was modeled, here is why the numbers look the way they do. Less archaeology when a reviewer asks a question three weeks after submission. It also makes the baseline generation process more reviewable and also editable. Automated baseline assignment is convenient right up until someone queries your system type selection, and having a transparent view of both sides makes that conversation significantly less painful. ## **Imperial Units** Yes, we were biased toward metric. We knew it, and we've done something about it. All inputs and outputs are now being identified and made available in Imperial units as well, so if you're working in the US market and have spent any time converting W/m² back to BTU/h·ft² in your head, that tax is going away. It sounds like a straightforward find-and-replace exercise. It is not. When you have a large number of inputs and outputs accumulated across different calculation modules over time, the audit process surfaces inconsistencies you didn't know were there, and fixing them properly takes longer than anyone's initial estimate suggested. But it's nearly done, with the final pushes landing in the next week. *** {% hint style="info" %} If you have questions, feedback, or 20 minutes to walk through the platform and point us toward what's next, we'd genuinely like to hear from you. In return: a 50% time saving on your next project (we're confident enough to say it) and extended free access to the platform. {% endhint %} # Support: T & C Update

We're updating our Support terms, specifically around account eligibility. If you're registered with a professional company email and domain, this doesn't affect you at all. Keep doing what you're doing, and you'll continue to have full access to training and the support ticket system as usual. For everyone else, here's what's been happening. Accounts registered under personal domains (Gmail, Hotmail, QQ, and similar) or using admin accounts (*e.g.,* ) have been used to access training resources and support in ways that stretch well beyond what the platform was set up for. Shared accounts and non-professional registrations are typical. We've been pretty open about it, probably too open, and that's on us. But going forward, accounts without a verified personal professional domain or using admin accounts won't receive support and will be flagged for automated review. We're not looking to be heavy-handed about it, but we do reserve the right to withhold support from accounts that don't meet these conditions. If that's you or your company, now's a reasonable time to figure out how you'd like to proceed. The specific updates to the terms are copied below so you don't have to go digging through the full document yourself. > *All support on and from the platform, including emails, support tickets and external communications are limited to professional domains (e.g.,) only. Where individual emails are used by multiple users, we reserve the right to pause or remove access to the entire Team account without prior notice. This policy ensures fair use of the platform and helps us service you better.* The above is an immediate change, as of 11/04/2026. Reach out if we can be of further assistance. [support@betterbuilding.io](/support-and-training) # Performance Cost Index: Multi-Metric BPF Support Better Building's Performance Cost Index workflow now supports three additional compliance metrics alongside energy cost: site energy, source energy, and greenhouse gas emissions. The structure of the PCI workflow hasn't changed. What's new is that the Building Performance Factor your result gets compared against can now be expressed in whichever of those four metrics your jurisdiction requires.

This matters because the cost-only PCI has a structural problem that's become harder to ignore as decarbonization goals show up in actual energy codes. Natural gas is cheaper per BTU than electricity in most of the country, so cost-based compliance quietly favors fossil fuel systems. A building can score perfectly fine on cost while running a noticeably dirtier energy profile than an all-electric alternative. Supporting carbon and source energy metrics is the practical fix for that. Better Building currently supports ASHRAE 90.1-2019 only. ### A Quick Refresher on BPFs The PCI compares your proposed building's energy use against a code-compliant Appendix G baseline, and the Building Performance Factor is the threshold that comparison has to meet or beat. It's not one number for every building. BPFs vary by building area type and climate zone because an office building and a warehouse have wildly different energy profiles even when both hit the same level of code compliance. The BPF values in ASHRAE 90.1 Table 4.2.1.1 use national average utility rates and emissions factors. Reasonable defaults, but averages nonetheless. If your jurisdiction has a significantly cleaner grid, higher electricity prices, or a local carbon accounting requirement, those averages can produce thresholds that don't reflect where your projects actually sit. This update lets jurisdictions supply local conversion factors and generate BPFs calibrated to local conditions. {% hint style="info" %} Custom BPF values require approval from the Authority Having Jurisdiction or Rating Authority before use. The national defaults are pre-populated and don't require any additional approval. {% endhint %} ### The Four Metrics **Energy cost** is what the PCI has always done. It remains the default and the most widely accepted metric for Appendix G compliance. **Site energy** is raw BTUs at the building, no conversion factors, no upstream accounting. It treats a kWh of electricity the same as a BTU of gas regardless of how that electricity was generated. Simple, auditable, and admittedly a bit blunt. **Source energy** works upstream, applying multipliers that account for power plant inefficiency and transmission losses. The default electricity factor is 9.008 kBtu/kWh, derived from EIA data, which is why source EUIs always look alarmingly high next to site EUIs. It's not wrong. It's just accounting for the full chain. **Greenhouse gas emissions** converts consumption to CO2-equivalent using fuel-specific factors. Defaults are 1.2 lb CO2e/kWh for electricity and 19.96 lb CO2e/therm for natural gas (both from EPA). This is the metric most sensitive to local inputs. Regional electricity emissions vary by a factor of five or more across the U.S., so a jurisdiction with access to eGRID subregional data will get meaningfully different carbon BPFs than one using the national average. That's the point. ### BPF Approach: "As Published" vs. "New Approach" When calculating custom BPFs, you choose between two sets of underlying prototype simulation results. **"As Published"** reproduces the prototype results used when 90.1-2019 was developed. Here's the part that always gets a reaction: the published 90.1-2019 BPFs are based on prototype models originally built for 90.1-2004. True Appendix G baseline prototypes weren't available when the 2019 edition was finalized, so they used what existed. It's a historical artifact, not a modeling error. Choose this if you need to reproduce Table 4.2.1.1 exactly or maintain backward compatibility with prior submissions. **"New Approach"** uses updated Appendix G baseline prototypes that follow the Appendix G baseline rules as currently written, including corrections made after the 2019 edition was published. These come from the PNNL Technical Support Document on 90.1-2019 Appendix G PRM prototypes. If you're building a new jurisdiction compliance program, this is the more defensible choice. The PNNL authors say directly that they consider it more technically sound, and based on the underlying work, that's a fair assessment. ### Inputs All conversion factor inputs represent annual blended averages. Where a jurisdiction requires time-of-use or hourly pricing data, calculate the annual average externally and enter that single value. Annual energy models don't optimize dispatch against time-varying rates, so a blended figure is the right input regardless of how your utility structures its bills. #### Conversion Factor Units by Metric | Metric | Electricity | Natural Gas | | ------------- | ----------- | ------------- | | Energy cost | $/kWh | $/therm | | Source energy | kBtu/kWh | kBtu/therm | | GHG emissions | lb CO2e/kWh | lb CO2e/therm | If the project uses fuels other than natural gas, enter equivalent values in the same units. #### Default Conversion Factors (90.1-2019) Pre-populated in the workflow. To reproduce Table 4.2.1.1 exactly, use these cost values with the "As Published" approach. | Fuel | Units | GHG (lb CO2e/unit) | Source Energy (kBtu/unit) | Energy Cost ($/unit) | | ----------- | ----- | ------------------ | ------------------------- | -------------------- | | Electricity | kWh | 1.2 | 9.008 | $0.1063 | | Natural gas | Therm | 19.96 | 109.0 | $0.98 | ### How the Calculation Works? The BPF for a building type and climate zone is the average proposed-to-baseline regulated energy ratio across all prototypes of that building type: ``` BPF = (1 / Np) × Σ (Proposed Regulated Energy Use / Baseline Regulated Energy Use) ``` `Np` is the number of prototypes for that area type. This applies to all four metrics. You're just swapping in site energy, source energy, cost, or carbon as the unit of measure. When you supply local conversion factors, BPFs are recalculated using pre-computed site energy coefficients (A, B, C) from the prototype models. No simulation reruns needed: ``` BPFij = (EC + Aij × GC) / (Bij × EC + Cij × GC) ``` `EC` is your electricity conversion factor, `GC` is your gas conversion factor, and the coefficients are looked up by building area type `i` and climate zone `j`. The three coefficients encode the fuel mix ratios from the prototype simulations, all normalized to the proposed electric site EUI:

Coefficient	What It Represents
A	Proposed regulated gas site EUI / Proposed regulated electric site EUI
B	Baseline regulated electric site EUI / Proposed regulated electric site EUI
C	Baseline regulated gas site EUI / Proposed regulated electric site EUI

Because everything is expressed relative to proposed electric EUI, any combination of electricity and gas conversion factors produces a valid BPF from the same underlying data. It's a small piece of elegant math in a standard that doesn't always have a lot of it. ### Published BPF Reference Values (90.1-2019) Selected climate zones shown below. Full 19-zone tables are in PNNL TSD Tables 50, 51, and 52. #### Site Energy BPFs | Building Area Type | 1A | 2A | 3A | 3C | 4A | 5A | 6A | 7 | | ------------------- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | | Multifamily | 0.76 | 0.76 | 0.76 | 0.69 | 0.71 | 0.68 | 0.67 | 0.67 | | Healthcare/Hospital | 0.71 | 0.74 | 0.72 | 0.71 | 0.72 | 0.74 | 0.73 | 0.80 | | Hotel/Motel | 0.75 | 0.74 | 0.75 | 0.76 | 0.75 | 0.74 | 0.72 | 0.72 | | Office | 0.61 | 0.58 | 0.57 | 0.55 | 0.55 | 0.59 | 0.59 | 0.54 | | Restaurant | 0.65 | 0.64 | 0.66 | 0.68 | 0.72 | 0.76 | 0.78 | 0.79 | | Retail | 0.53 | 0.48 | 0.47 | 0.48 | 0.59 | 0.66 | 0.67 | 0.60 | | School | 0.58 | 0.55 | 0.57 | 0.50 | 0.47 | 0.53 | 0.54 | 0.52 | | Warehouse | 0.24 | 0.23 | 0.27 | 0.19 | 0.40 | 0.49 | 0.52 | 0.46 | | All Others | 0.66 | 0.59 | 0.58 | 0.61 | 0.61 | 0.64 | 0.66 | 0.64 | #### Source Energy BPFs | Building Area Type | 1A | 2A | 3A | 3C | 4A | 5A | 6A | 7 | | ------------------- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | | Multifamily | 0.72 | 0.72 | 0.70 | 0.61 | 0.70 | 0.68 | 0.69 | 0.68 | | Healthcare/Hospital | 0.73 | 0.74 | 0.72 | 0.71 | 0.72 | 0.74 | 0.73 | 0.77 | | Hotel/Motel | 0.72 | 0.70 | 0.70 | 0.70 | 0.70 | 0.70 | 0.69 | 0.68 | | Office | 0.61 | 0.58 | 0.57 | 0.55 | 0.56 | 0.58 | 0.57 | 0.55 | | Restaurant | 0.62 | 0.61 | 0.61 | 0.61 | 0.65 | 0.68 | 0.70 | 0.72 | | Retail | 0.53 | 0.48 | 0.47 | 0.47 | 0.50 | 0.54 | 0.55 | 0.51 | | School | 0.57 | 0.55 | 0.57 | 0.48 | 0.48 | 0.51 | 0.52 | 0.51 | | Warehouse | 0.24 | 0.23 | 0.27 | 0.20 | 0.30 | 0.36 | 0.40 | 0.37 | | All Others | 0.64 | 0.57 | 0.56 | 0.57 | 0.58 | 0.59 | 0.60 | 0.60 | #### Carbon BPFs | Building Area Type | 1A | 2A | 3A | 3C | 4A | 5A | 6A | 7 | | ------------------- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | | Multifamily | 0.73 | 0.73 | 0.72 | 0.63 | 0.70 | 0.68 | 0.68 | 0.68 | | Healthcare/Hospital | 0.73 | 0.74 | 0.72 | 0.71 | 0.72 | 0.74 | 0.73 | 0.78 | | Hotel/Motel | 0.73 | 0.72 | 0.72 | 0.72 | 0.72 | 0.72 | 0.70 | 0.70 | | Office | 0.61 | 0.58 | 0.57 | 0.55 | 0.55 | 0.58 | 0.58 | 0.54 | | Restaurant | 0.63 | 0.62 | 0.63 | 0.63 | 0.67 | 0.71 | 0.73 | 0.74 | | Retail | 0.53 | 0.48 | 0.47 | 0.47 | 0.53 | 0.58 | 0.59 | 0.54 | | School | 0.58 | 0.55 | 0.57 | 0.49 | 0.47 | 0.51 | 0.53 | 0.51 | | Warehouse | 0.24 | 0.23 | 0.27 | 0.20 | 0.33 | 0.41 | 0.44 | 0.40 | | All Others | 0.64 | 0.58 | 0.57 | 0.58 | 0.59 | 0.61 | 0.62 | 0.61 | # NCC 2022 Thermal Comfort: What the Standard Actually Requires NCC 2022 Vol 1 J1P1 applies to Class 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 buildings and common areas of Class 2 buildings. It requires you to demonstrate that occupants are thermally comfortable, not just that an HVAC system exists and is running.

### The Metric: Predicted Mean Vote Thermal comfort is measured using Predicted Mean Vote, a standardised scale from ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 55 built on Fanger's heat balance model. Zero is neutral, -3 is cold, +3 is hot. Compliance requires staying between -1 and +1. The equation is: ***PMV = \[0.303 · e^(−0.036M) + 0.028] · L*** *Where L is the net thermal load on the body, driven by six inputs: metabolic rate, external work (almost always zero), clothing insulation, air temperature, mean radiant temperature, air speed, and humidity.* Each input matters. Metabolic rate and clothing insulation are fixed by assumption (1.2 met, 0.5 to 1.0 clo for a typical office) and act as a uniform baseline offset. Air temperature is what the HVAC controls. Mean radiant temperature is the area-weighted average of surrounding surface temperatures and is the one most likely to ruin your compliance run. A west-facing curtain wall on a 38°C afternoon pushes mean radiant temperature well above air temperature at the perimeter, and the thermostat cannot see it. Air speed is underused: higher velocity at the occupant level reduces PMV through convective cooling, and ASHRAE 55 allows it to offset elevated operative temperatures up to around 0.8 m/s before draught complaints take over. Humidity nudges PMV positive at high levels but is rarely the primary failure mode unless the building is naturally ventilated. ### The Compliance Thresholds and What They Actually Mean PMV of -1 to +1 must be achieved across 95% of occupied floor area for 98% of annual hours of operation, where hours of operation are periods when occupancy exceeds 20% of peak. That last part is a reasonable concession. The rest is not trivial. The 98% threshold allows roughly 44 hours of non-compliance per year for a standard office (approximately 2,600 occupied hours annually). Those hours will cluster at summer peak, so you are designing for the worst case, not the average. The 95% spatial threshold is not 5% per floor or per zone. It is 5% of total occupied floor area across the whole building. One badly oriented facade can exhaust that tolerance on its own. The direct consequence is that envelope performance has to precede mechanical strategy. Mean radiant temperature failures cannot be corrected by lowering air temperature: operative temperature (approximately the mean of air temperature and mean radiant temperature) only responds at half the rate. If mean radiant temperature at a west facade is 38°C and air temperature is 22°C, operative temperature is still around 30°C. No setpoint fixes that. External shading, higher-performance glazing, and perimeter air distribution are compliance decisions, not aesthetic ones. ### A Simple Office Example Sydney, Class 5, open plan. 7am to 7pm weekdays, 1.2 met, 0.6 clo summer, HVAC at 22°C, 50% relative humidity, 0.15 m/s air speed. PMV sits around 0 to +0.3 at the core. Fine. West-facing glazing on a peak afternoon drives mean radiant temperature to 40°C or above at the perimeter, pushing PMV to +1.5 to +2.0 within two to three metres of the facade. If that zone is 8% of the floor plate, you are already over the spatial tolerance and the simulation fails. The fix (shading, better glazing, zoned perimeter supply) costs money nobody budgeted because the compliance pathway looked simple on paper. ### The Setpoint Problem HVAC systems control to air temperature. That is what the building management system logs, what the commissioning report certifies, and what the facilities manager points to when someone complains. But PMV responds to operative temperature, not air temperature alone, and in any building with significant glazing or poorly insulated roof construction, those two diverge considerably. Setpoint control captures one of six PMV inputs. It cannot sense radiant temperature, clothing, or air speed distribution. The gap between modelled PMV and experienced PMV is real, and it surfaces consistently in post-occupancy surveys as thermal dissatisfaction in buildings that passed every simulation. Setpoint compliance is necessary but not sufficient. Buildings that want to achieve the intent of J1P1 need to address the radiant environment through envelope and air distribution design before adjusting the thermostat. ### Occupant Schedules and the Ramp Problem Thermal models assume the HVAC is at setpoint when occupancy begins. Buildings do not work that way. Early arrivals, flexible hours, and the general human indifference to occupancy assumptions mean some portion of the floor is occupied during ramp-up, when air temperature and mean radiant temperature are still moving toward setpoint rather than holding it. The risk runs in both directions. A cold morning warm-up in a high-mass building leaves mean radiant temperature depressed and PMV below -1 for early occupants. A summer cool-down after a long weekend does the opposite. Both scenarios push PMV outside the compliance band during hours the simulation may well count as occupied. A model that assumes a clean step-change to fully conditioned conditions at 8am is doing you a favour the building will not return. Model pre-conditioning realistically, populate early occupancy into the schedule, and check PMV at the edges of the occupied window. Those hours accumulate faster than the 44-hour annual tolerance suggests. ### How Onerous Is This? Honestly, fairly onerous. Full thermal simulation using software such as EnergyPlus or IES-VE, with properly modelled occupancy, internal gains, HVAC controls, and hourly weather data, is not optional. The result is sensitive to modelling assumptions, a poorly oriented building can fail regardless of mechanical quality, and a passing simulation still does not guarantee a comfortable building in operation. The standard is reasonable in intent. It is just not easy in practice, and it does not pretend to be. # A Deep Dive into the New H1 VM1: What's Changed and Why It Matters Looking for guidance on the 2025 updates to New Zealand's H1 VM1 verification method? Darren O'Dea, CEO and Founder of Better Building, delivered a comprehensive training session breaking down the critical changes. The 90-minute presentation divides into two parts: the first 45 minutes covers essential updates and potential pitfalls to watch for, while the second half works through practical modeling examples demonstrating how these changes impact real-world compliance. {% hint style="success" %} Looking for a demo? [Book one in here](https://calendly.com/betterbuildingsupport/14-day-trial-demo). {% endhint %} {% embed url="" %} # Accepting Better Building Simulation Outputs This document is written for the people who review building permit applications: plan reviewers, building inspectors, and energy code specialists working in city or county building departments. You're the ones who have to decide whether a compliance submittal is legitimate or creative fiction. In most jurisdictions, you're called the Authority Having Jurisdiction, or AHJ for short. That's code-speak for "the person who can say no to a building permit." Sometimes you work for a municipal building department, sometimes for a county, occasionally for a state agency. Regardless of the org chart, your job is the same: verify that proposed buildings meet adopted energy codes before construction starts. You didn't necessarily sign up to become an expert in building energy simulation, but performance-based compliance keeps showing up in your inbox anyway. Here's why Better Building simulation outputs meet the technical requirements you need to approve them. {% hint style="info" %} Contact [support@betterbuilding.io](/support-and-training) for further support {% endhint %} ### Validation Against ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 140-2020 Better Building's simulation engine has been validated against [ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 140-2020](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/support-and-training/other-support/testing-and-verification/ansi-ashrae-standard-140-building-thermal-envelope-and-fabric-load-tests), the industry standard method for testing building energy analysis software. This isn't a checkbox exercise. Standard 140 puts simulation engines through a rigorous set of comparative tests that expose whether the underlying physics are implemented correctly.

The standard tests envelope loads, HVAC performance, shading algorithms, and thermal mass calculations against both analytical solutions and empirical data. Software that passes these tests produces results within acceptable tolerance ranges, meaning the simulation outputs reflect real building physics rather than wishful thinking or programming errors. This validation matters for code compliance work because it demonstrates that the tool calculates energy performance correctly across the range of building types and systems you'll actually see in practice. Standard 140 compliance is recognized by [DOE's Building Energy Codes Program](https://www.energy.gov/) and is frequently cited in state energy code adoption processes. When a modeling tool has passed Standard 140, it means someone has already done the technical vetting work you'd otherwise have to take on faith. ### EnergyPlus v25.1 as the Calculation Engine Better Building uses [EnergyPlus v25.1](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/support-and-training/other-support/testing-and-verification/energyplus-tm-v-9.5.0-+-22.2) for all energy simulations. EnergyPlus is developed and maintained by the U.S. Department of Energy and has been the reference simulation engine for building energy modeling for over two decades. It's the same engine used by REScheck, COMcheck, and many commercial energy modeling tools you'd encounter in a typical submittal.

EnergyPlus v25.1 implements the calculation methods specified in ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G and supports both the Energy Cost Budget Method (Section 11) and the Performance Rating Method. The algorithms are peer-reviewed, extensively documented, and updated regularly to align with current code requirements. Using a current version (v25.1 was released in 2025) means the software includes the latest updates for equipment performance, climate data, and modeling procedures. Older versions sometimes miss edge cases or contain bugs that have since been corrected. Current software reduces the likelihood of compliance issues caused by outdated calculation methods. ### Practical Implications for Plan Review From a review standpoint, accepting Better Building outputs doesn't require learning a new compliance framework. The platform generates the same documentation you'd see from any other [ASHRAE 90.1](/user-guide/workflows/energy-efficiency/ashrae-90.1-2019) performance-based compliance package: baseline and proposed building models, energy cost comparisons, and compliance forms. The underlying calculations follow the same procedures whether they're run through Better Building, a consultant's modeling software, or any other validated tool. The combination of Standard 140 validation and EnergyPlus ensures that simulation results are reproducible and defensible. If questions arise during review, the methodology is transparent and the calculation engine is publicly documented. This makes verification straightforward compared to proprietary tools with black-box algorithms. You can't personally re-run every energy model that crosses your desk. Nobody has time for that. What you can reasonably expect is that the tool used to generate the model has been validated against recognized standards and uses calculation methods that align with the code you're enforcing. Better Building meets both criteria. ### Conclusion Better Building simulation outputs are built on validated calculation methods (ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 140-2020) using a DOE-maintained simulation engine (EnergyPlus v25.1) that implements ASHRAE 90.1 compliance procedures. These outputs meet the same technical standards applied to submissions from traditional energy modeling consultants and should be accepted for code compliance review on that basis. # Free Model Conversion Offer: February and March 2026

Throughout February and March, we're building models on the Better Building platform at no cost. The catch? There isn't one, really. We're capping it at models under 100 thermal zones, and we need about three days per project, but otherwise this is straightforward: you send us your model, we convert it. ### Why we're doing this? We're testing converters and geometry automation tools before general release. Parsers are famously brittle, getting them working in controlled conditions is one thing, but real-world projects have a way of exposing edge cases you didn't account for. Running these conversions ourselves means we can catch issues now rather than after you've spent an afternoon fighting with a buggy import process. For you, it means getting models into Better Building without doing the work yourself. For us, it's quality assurance that actually matters. ### What we've built so far? We currently have working converters for three platforms: * **IESVE to Better Building** * **DesignBuilder to Better Building** * **eQuest to Better Building** These are particularly useful if you're evaluating the platform and want to bring in existing projects, or if you're already using Better Building and prefer to have your historical work in one place instead of scattered across different tools. ### Geometry automation Beyond converters, we have two geometry automation tools in testing: **DXF import**: Upload a DXF file replicating your architectural drawings, and the geometry generates automatically. No manual drawing on the platform required. **Drawing detection**: Upload architectural drawings and a detection model identifies walls, then extrudes them for you. Same outcome, different input format. Both are currently internal-only. We're using this free conversion period to refine them on actual projects before releasing them more widely. The time savings are substantial once they work reliably, which is exactly why we're being careful about this. ### What we need from you? Three things: 1. **The model file** from your current software 2. **The architectural drawings** the model is based on 3. **Three days** per model (though many will be much faster, some take seconds) The three-day buffer accounts for complexity variation and gives us room to handle any conversion quirks properly. Some models will genuinely take that long. Others won't. But we'd rather give ourselves enough time than rush the process and produce something sloppy. ### How to proceed Reach out when you're ready. Once we have your geometry and drawings, we'll schedule a meeting to confirm deadlines and any project-specific requirements. The offer runs through to the **31st of March**. After that, these converters eventually move to self-service, and you'll be doing the conversions yourself, hopefully with tools that work smoothly because we spent this month making sure they actually do. {% hint style="success" %} Send your requirements via the Ticket System or to [support@betterbuilding.io](mail:support@betterbuilding.io). This offer is limited to one model per company. {% endhint %} # Introducing: Dashboards

Over the past year, we've been building out a new feature called Dashboards. It's now live, and it changes how you'll interact with the platform day to day. The core idea: instead of clicking through different sections to piece together what's happening across your projects, the Dashboard pulls the key information into one screen. Think of it as your starting point, a single view that surfaces what you actually need without making you hunt for it. ### What's on the Dashboard? **News items** sit at the top. The BetterBuilding team publishes updates here directly, which means platform news and feature announcements appear front and centre when you log in. This is particularly useful if our newsletters aren't reliably reaching your inbox. Spam filters, the Promotions tab, general inbox overwhelm: these are real problems, and the Dashboard gives you a backup channel that doesn't depend on email delivery.

**Latest Projects** appears below the news section. Previously, checking on your current work meant navigating to the Projects area. Not a huge inconvenience, but it adds friction when you just want a quick glance at what's active. The Dashboard now surfaces your most recent projects immediately. Small time savings compound over weeks. **Recent Activity** sits to the right of Latest Projects, and this is where the Dashboard becomes genuinely useful for coordination. The activity feed aggregates what's happening across your projects, designs, fellows, and teams. Instead of manually checking each project to see if anything has changed (or relying on notifications that may or may not catch your attention), you get a chronological view of recent updates. For teams with multiple people working across multiple projects, this kind of visibility prevents the classic problem of duplicated effort. You can see that your colleague already updated that design yesterday, rather than discovering it after you've spent an hour on the same task. **Latest Designs** appears at the bottom of the Dashboard. This is straightforward: quick access to your most recently created designs. If you're iterating on something and need to jump back in, it's right there. ### Search Alongside the Dashboard itself, we've overhauled search. The search bar now lives on the Dashboard and offers filtering by both time and document type. You can narrow results to specific categories: projects, designs, documentation, studies, and flows. Combined with date filtering, this means you can run queries like "show me designs from the last month" or "find studies from this quarter" without wading through everything in your account. The search also accepts multiple input types. You can search by project number, project name, or even project address. For larger teams managing dozens of projects, this is the difference between finding what you need in seconds versus clicking through pages of results. Type the project number, hit enter, go directly there. ### What's Next? The Dashboard as it stands is a foundation. Over the next couple of months, expect additional features to appear here. The goal is to make this the most useful screen in the application. Feedback is welcome (and genuinely wanted). If there's information you wish the Dashboard surfaced, or if the current layout doesn't match how you work, let us know. # The H1/VM1 Checklist

Verification Method H1/VM1 is a part of the New Zealand Building Code. It provides a performance-based alternative to meeting the requirements of Clause H1, which specifies the minimum energy efficiency standards that buildings in New Zealand must meet. Our Verification Method H1/VM1 modelling approach is unique, where the reference building model and reporting are automated. This approach saves significant time and effort, enabling design optimisation to be the focal point. A typical office building is simulated in less than an hour, including simulations and results.

## Do i Need a Producer Statement 1 (PS1)? A Producer Statement 1 (PS1) isn't required when you're using H1/VM1 to demonstrate compliance. The short version: VM1 is already the compliance pathway, so having someone certify that you followed a certification process creates a bit of a circular situation. H1/VM1 is a verification method issued under section 22(1) of the Building Act 2004. It's not guidance or best practice suggestions. It's an official compliance pathway published by MBIE that demonstrates your building meets the H1 Energy Efficiency performance requirements when you follow it properly. The document itself says: "*Complying with an acceptable solution or verification method is a way of complying with that part of the Building Code*." Getting a PS1 in this situation means paying someone to certify that you correctly followed the compliance document, which you're already demonstrating by following the document and providing the required evidence. {% hint style="info" %} **A quick note on providing clarity for Councils or third party reviewers.** Councils or third party reviewers are processing dozens of consents and need to understand your compliance approach quickly. To support your application, we recommend following the checklist below to ensure your submission is accurate and in line with H1 VM1 requirements. {% endhint %} ## The H1/VM1 Checklist The following comprehensive review checklists provide a method to verify a model against all H1/VM1 modeling principles, as per Appendix D - Modelling method – Building energy use comparison. ### Modelling Principles, Software and Default Values

Clause	Requirement	Yes/No/N/A
D.1.2.1	Are the proposed building and reference building analysed using the same techniques and assumptions?
D.1.2.2	Are the specifications of the proposed building in the analysis as similar as reasonably practicable to the submitted plans?
D.1.2.3	Does the reference building have the same number of storeys, floor area for each storey, orientation, and geometric form as the proposed building?
D.1.2.3	Are the floors that form part of the thermal envelope of the same type in both the reference building and the proposed building?
D.1.2.4.a	Are the wall construction R-value and thermal mass accounted for accurately in both buildings?
D.1.2.4.b	Are the floor construction R-values accounted for accurately in both buildings?
D.1.2.4.c	Are the roof construction R-value and thermal mass accounted for accurately in both buildings?
D.1.2.4.d	Are the window, door, and skylight sizes, orientations, construction R-values, SHGC, and shading devices accounted for accurately?
D.1.2.4.e	Are the heating, cooling, and ventilation plant sizes accounted for accurately in the models?
D.1.2.5	Is it acknowledged that the results of the thermal modeling are not a guarantee of the actual energy use of the building?
D.1.3.1	Does the software pass the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 140 test or BESTEST as appropriate?
D.1.4.1	Are the default values and schedules from this appendix used unless demonstrated otherwise?
D.1.4.1	Are any modifications to default assumptions used in both the proposed building and the reference building simulations?
D.1.4.2	Are other aspects of the building’s performance, for which no default values are provided, stated and simulated identically for both buildings?
D.1.4.3.a	Are heating, set-points, and schedules modeled identically for both buildings?
D.1.4.3.b	Are cooling, set-points, and schedules modeled identically for both buildings?
D.1.4.3.c	Are ventilation, set-points, and schedules modeled identically for both buildings?
D.1.4.3.d	Are fresh air ventilation, air change rates, and schedules modeled identically for both buildings?
D.1.4.3.e	Are internal gains loads and schedules modeled identically for both buildings?
D.1.4.3.f	Are occupancy loads and schedules modeled identically for both buildings?
D.1.4.3.g	Are the location and R-values of carpets and floor coverings modeled identically for both buildings?
D.1.4.3.h	Is incidental shading modeled identically for both buildings?

### Climate and Thermal Zones

Clause	Requirement	Yes/No/N/A
D.1.5.1	Are both the proposed building and the reference building modeled using the same climate data?
D.1.5.1	Is the climate data from a weather station that best represents the climate at the building site?
D.1.5.1	Does the climate data represent an average year for the site, over at least a 10-year period?
D.1.6.1	For multi-unit dwellings, are both buildings divided into separate thermal zones, with each household unit represented by at least one thermal zone?
D.1.6.2	For other buildings, are both buildings divided into separate thermal zones if the software allows?
D.1.6.3	Are spaces with significantly different space conditioning requirements modeled as separate zones?
D.1.6.4	Is the conditioned space divided into a minimum of three thermal zones?
D.1.6.5	Are roof spaces and enclosed subfloor spaces modeled as thermal zones?
D.1.6.6	Does the model represent internal conductive heat flows between thermal zones?
D.1.6.6	Are internal partitions between thermal zones modeled with their location, surface area, pitch, and construction R-value described?
D.1.6.7	Are the same internal partitions modeled in both the proposed building and the reference building?
D.1.6.8	Are internal partitions within a thermal zone, which may affect the thermal performance of the building, modeled?
D.1.6.9	Is airflow between thermal zones modeled, if desired?

### Adjoining Spaces, Thermal Mass, Shading and Infiltration

Clause	Requirement	Yes/No/N/A
D.1.7.1	Are building elements that separate adjoining conditioned spaces assumed to have no heat transfer?
D.1.7.2	Are building elements separating conditioned space from adjacent unconditioned space modeled with a construction R-value 0.5 higher than actual and zero solar absorptance?
D.1.8.1	Is the thermal mass modeled either the same for both buildings or as lightweight for the reference building?
D.1.9.1	Is the thermal mass of the contents the same for both models and regarded as zero?
D.1.10.1	Are floor coverings modeled as proposed for both buildings, with ceramic tiles in wet areas and carpet in others if unspecified?
D.1.11.1	Is exterior shading modeled as proposed in the proposed building, but not in the reference building?
D.1.11.2	Is no account taken of internal shading devices like blinds or drapes?
D.1.12.1	Is shading by structures and terrain that affect the building modeled the same way for both buildings?
D.1.12.2	Is no account taken of trees or vegetation for shading?
D.1.13.1	Are infiltration assumptions the same for both buildings and reasonable for the construction, location, and use?

### Thermal Envelope

Clause	Requirement	Yes/No/N/A
D.2.1.1	Are all building elements described in terms of surface area, orientation, pitch, and construction R-value, with glazing areas having their SHGC specified?
D.2.1.2	Is the solar absorption of external building elements modeled as proposed in both buildings, or as 0.5 if not specified?
D.2.1.3	When the modeling program calculates and adds its own surface resistances, are the input resistances adjusted by subtracting the standardised surface resistances?
D.2.1.4.a	In the reference building, is any slab-on-ground floor modeled with a construction type from Tables F.1.2.2A to F.1.2.2X, meeting or exceeding the minimum R-value?
D.2.1.4.b	In the proposed building, does any slab-on-ground floor with embedded heating systems meet the construction R-value in Table 2.1.2.2A?
D.2.2.1	If the glazing area in the proposed building is more than 30% of the total wall area, is the glazing area of the reference building 30% of the total wall area?
D.2.2.2	If the glazing areas in the proposed and reference buildings are different, is the glazing area in the reference building either distributed evenly or resized proportionally?
D.2.3.1	In the reference building, is the skylight area set to zero?
D.2.4.1.a	In the reference building, does the opaque door area that is no more than either 6 m² or 6% of the total wall area have the same or higher construction R-value as the reference building windows?
D.2.4.1.b	In the reference building, does any remaining opaque door area have the same construction R-value as the reference building wall?

### Space Conditioning and Internal Loads

Clause	Requirement	Yes/No/N/A
D.3.1.1	For housing, is a minimum temperature of 18°C and a maximum temperature of 25°C modeled, with natural ventilation at 24°C if outdoor air temperature is lower?
D.3.1.1	For housing, is the ventilation rate reasonable for the available venting area and the same for both the proposed and reference buildings?
D.3.1.2	For buildings other than housing, is a minimum temperature of 18°C and a maximum temperature of 25°C from 8am to 6pm, five days a week, modeled unless otherwise justified?
D.3.2.1	Is the fresh air ventilation rate and schedule the same for both the proposed and reference buildings?
D.3.2.1.a	For housing, is the minimum fresh air ventilation rate 0.5 air changes per hour?
D.3.2.1.b	For other buildings, is the minimum fresh air ventilation rate as specified in NZS 4303?
D.3.3.1	Is the calculation of annual loads for space heating and cooling done without simulating equipment, or is it the same for both buildings if simulated?
D.4.1.1	If lighting is modeled, is it the same for both the proposed building and the reference building?
D.4.2.1	For domestic hot water, is the power density for an internal cylinder either ignored or the default value from Table D.5.1.1 used?
D.4.3.1.a	Are default values for heat release from occupants and plug loads used for housing as specified in Table D.5.1.2A?
D.4.3.1.b	Are default values for heat release from occupants and plug loads used for communal residential as specified in Table D.5.1.2B?
D.4.3.1.c	Are default values for heat release from occupants and plug loads used for communal non-residential assembly care as specified in Table D.5.1.2C?
D.4.3.1.d	Are default values for heat release from occupants and plug loads used for commercial buildings as specified in Table D.5.1.2D?
D.4.3.2	Are these default values used unless other suitable parameters specific to the building’s use are shown to be more appropriate?
D.4.3.3	Are unconditioned spaces assigned zero internal gains?
D.4.4.1	Are process loads defined as those heat loads that result from the production of goods within a building?
D.4.4.2	Are process loads modeled only if they are significant and will continue for the expected life of the building, and are they the same in both buildings?

### Reference Building and Documentation

Clause	Requirement	Yes/No/N/A
D.5.1.1	Are the default power densities for internal gains from occupants and plug loads used as specified in Table D.5.1.1?
D.5.1.2.a	Are the default schedules for occupancy and plug loads for housing used as specified in Table D.5.1.2A?
D.5.1.2.b	Are the default schedules for occupancy and plug loads for communal residential used as specified in Table D.5.1.2B?
D.5.1.2.c	Are the default schedules for occupancy and plug loads for communal non-residential assembly care used as specified in Table D.5.1.2C?
D.5.1.2.d	Are the default schedules for occupancy and plug loads for commercial buildings used as specified in Table D.5.1.2D?
D.6.1.1.a	Does the documentation of computer modeling analysis include the name of the modeler?
D.6.1.1.b	Does the documentation include the thermal modeling program name, version number, and supplier?
D.6.1.1.c	Does the documentation include technical detail on the proposed building and reference building designs and their differences?
D.6.1.1.d	Does the documentation include the sum of the heating load and cooling load for the proposed building and reference building?
D.6.1.1.e	Where possible, does the documentation include the separate heating load and cooling load for the proposed building and the reference building?

# New Feature: Import Design Reusing geometry across projects is now significantly easier with the new Import Design feature. ### How to Import a Design In the Building app, click the plus symbol in the top left corner and select Import Design. This opens a list of all Designs available within your Team. Select the Design you want to import, and it will be brought into your current project complete with Drawings, Levels, and Site Shading.

Once imported, you may notice the drawing appears with a different level assignment. Simply delete the original drawing (for example, Ground) and assign the imported drawing to the appropriate levels. ### Key Benefits This feature eliminates the need to contact the support team when switching between building code versions. To migrate a design, simply create a new project with the updated building code and import your existing design. This saves time for both users and the support team by removing the manual process of transferring designs between code versions. # NCC Assessment Methods: How to Prove Your Building Complies The National Construction Code sets minimum technical requirements for new buildings and new work in existing buildings. And like any code worth its salt, it doesn't just tell you what to achieve. It tells you how to prove you've achieved it. That's where Assessment Methods come in. ### The Compliance Framework You've got two paths to NCC compliance: Deemed-to-Satisfy (DTS) Solutions, which follow the code's prescriptive provisions to the letter, or Performance Solutions, which achieve the same outcomes through alternative means. Most projects use a combination of both. Either way, you need to demonstrate compliance. Assessment Methods are the tools you use to do that. The NCC lists four, and you can use any combination depending on what you're proving. ### Performance Solutions and the Performance-Based Design Brief Performance Solutions don't work on trust. There's a process, and at its centre is the performance-based design brief (PBDB). A PBDB is a document developed collaboratively with stakeholders before you start designing. Think of it as a contract: everyone agrees upfront on what you're trying to achieve, how you'll prove it, and what "success" looks like. The purpose is to eliminate surprises. Get alignment early, and approval becomes far more predictable. The stakeholder list typically includes the building owner (or representative), builder or project manager, relevant design practitioners (architects, engineers, specialists), the appropriate approval authority, and any other relevant agencies. The process usually starts with round-table discussions initiated by the designer. A typical PBDB covers the proposal summary (building type, function, height, location), a description of the proposed solution, applicable Performance Requirements, agreed analytical assessment processes, acceptance criteria, required supporting evidence, and report format. Stakeholder sign-off creates a clear record of commitments.

#### The Four-Step Process **Step 1: Prepare the PBDB.** Scope the solution, consult stakeholders, document everything, get sign-off. **Step 2: Carry out analysis.** Complete the analytical assessment as agreed. This might involve comparative or absolute analysis, calculations, testing, or modelling. **Step 3: Evaluate results.** Compare results against agreed acceptance criteria. If outcomes don't meet criteria, revisit your methods or conduct further analysis. **Step 4: Prepare the final report.** Demonstrate compliance with the Performance Requirements agreed in the PBDB. This includes an overview of the PBDB, outline of analysis undertaken, evaluation of results against acceptance criteria, and conclusions (including any limitations or conditions of use). The key takeaway: Performance Solutions can be straightforward if you start with a properly developed PBDB. Getting alignment upfront saves considerable grief later. ### The Four Assessment Methods #### Evidence of Suitability This is your documentary evidence, demonstrating that a material, product, or form of construction does what you're claiming. Acceptable forms include reports from Accredited Testing Laboratories, Certificates of Conformity or Accreditation, certificates from professional engineers or appropriately qualified persons, certificates from JAS-ANZ accredited product certification bodies, and any other documentary evidence that adequately demonstrates suitability (such as Product Technical Statements). Volume Three has an additional requirement: WaterMark certification. For certain plumbing and drainage products, a WaterMark Licence is mandatory evidence of suitability. #### Comparison with the DTS Provisions This one's for Performance Solutions. The logic is straightforward: demonstrate your alternative approach is at least as good as following the DTS Provisions, and you've met the Performance Requirements. The catch is that "at least as good" needs like-for-like analysis. Apply the same methodology to both approaches (computer modelling is common here). If your solution delivers equivalent or better health, safety, amenity, or sustainability outcomes, you're compliant. #### Verification Methods Verification Methods are tests or calculations prescribing specific ways to demonstrate compliance. They come with quantifiable benchmarks or predetermined acceptance criteria. The NCC includes several built-in Verification Methods (D1V1 for wire barriers, H2V1 for weatherproofing, B2V1 for heated water storage temperature, among others). But you're not limited to what's in the NCC. Other methods can be used if the appropriate authority accepts them, including overseas codes and standards like ISO. Verification Methods generally take one of these forms: **A test.** Something like an on-site field test measuring actual thermal performance of an installed window. **An inspection.** Typically a visual examination by an appropriately qualified person, such as an engineer confirming timber framing installation. **A calculation.** Engineering calculations (hand or computer modelling) verifying a design meets Performance Requirements. The fire separation methodology in C1V1 is a good example. **Other methods.** Almost any suitable methodology, provided the appropriate authority agrees it's acceptable. #### Expert Judgement When physical criteria fall outside what's practical to test or model, you turn to Expert Judgement: the opinion of someone with qualifications and experience to determine whether a solution complies. Who counts as an expert depends on jurisdiction. Different states and territories have different registration requirements. Ultimately, the appropriate authority decides whether a particular person is qualified to provide judgement on a particular issue. One limitation: the appropriate authority can't provide Expert Judgement for a matter they're also assessing for approval. Independence matters. ### A Note on Appropriate Authorities An appropriate authority is whoever has statutory responsibility for enforcing building and plumbing regulations in your jurisdiction. State and territory regulations define who qualifies, but generally you're looking at building surveyors or plumbing inspectors. ### Documentation Assessment Methods are only as useful as the documentation backing them up. Your documentation needs to clearly show the appropriate authority which Performance Requirements and/or DTS Provisions apply, which Assessment Methods you've used, the PBDB and analysis (for Performance Solutions), confirmation requirements have been met, and any conditions or limitations. The level of detail required is the appropriate authority's call. Expert Judgement documentation might be a simple email or a full technical report. Verification Method documentation might include software specifications or detailed test records. Match your documentation to the complexity of what you're proving, and confirm expectations with your appropriate authority early. It saves everyone time. # Introducing: HVAC Distributions and Multiplication Setting up HVAC systems for multi-storey buildings has traditionally meant a lot of repetition. Draw an air loop, connect the terminals, maybe tag by level, repeat for each floor. Our new Distributions and Multiplication features exist to handle some of that tedium for you. These two features work together. Distributions define the structural pattern of how your HVAC system repeats and reconnects across the building. Multiplication defines how many instances of each component actually get created. Together, they let you draw a system once and have it scale to whatever the building requires.

### Distributions A distribution tells Better Building: "This branch of my HVAC tree repeats for each zone group I've defined." Groups might represent floors, building wings, or orientations (north/south perimeter). The grouping is yours to decide. {% embed url="" %} The workflow is straightforward: 1. Create Groups (Level 1, Level 2, Level 3) 2. Assign Zones to those Groups 3. Mark HVAC components as belonging to a distribution 4. The system replicates those components per group when the model processes What you see in the interface is a clean schematic showing the pattern. Components are colour-coded by distribution group, making it easy to see which elements belong together. This also helps with validation: if a blue component connects to a green component with a gap between them, something's misconfigured. What gets written to the EnergyPlus IDF is the fully expanded system with every instance connected appropriately. ### Multiplication Distributions define structure. Multiplication logic controls instance counts per component. For example, you might want to replicate a component for every thermal zone in its scope, which is standard for air terminals (58 zones might mean means 58 terminals). Or you may need to replicate each connection such as a air handling unit or chilled water loop to serve the air terminals below it. {% embed url="" %} #### Combining Modes The flexibility comes from mixing modes. A typical configuration: | Component | Mode | Result (5 floors, 58 zones) | | ------------------ | --------- | --------------------------- | | Air terminals | Per zone | 58 | | Air handling units | Per group | 3 | | Hot water loop | Per group | 3 | | Chilled water loop | Common | 1 | | Chillers | Common | As defined | Each component follows its own rule. The system maintains connections between them. Every terminal connects to its floor's AHU. Every AHU connects to the common chilled water loop. ### Why This Matters? The air side of HVAC modelling is where complexity tends to accumulate. More zones, more terminals, more connections than the plant side. Distributions and multiplication logic let you manage that complexity at the pattern level rather than the instance level. You describe the intent once. Better Building handles the replication. When the design changes (and it will), you're updating a pattern rather than chasing individual components across dozens of zones. It's a more sustainable way to work, and one that scales with project complexity instead of fighting against it. # 3D Building Geometry Creator V1.3 Is Out We spent some of the Christmas period squashing bugs and adding features to the 3D Building Geometry Creator. Version 1.3 shipped this week. For those with an interest in ultra-fast, ultra-efficient design workflows, we can honestly say that this new workflow is not just great, but a testament to how building should be designed. #### What is this tool? The Building Geometry Creator is a comprehensive web-based 3D building modeling tool designed for energy simulation workflows. It enables architects, engineers, and energy modelers to quickly create multi-level building geometry with thermal zones, windows, shading devices, and proper formatting for energy analysis software. The tool bridges the gap between conceptual design and detailed energy modeling by providing an intuitive 2D drawing interface that automatically generates 3D geometry. #### What's New in V1.3 The big addition to V 1.3 is complex geometry support. Angled walls, sloped ceilings, and shading devices that actually follow tilted surfaces. The kind of geometry that typically requires manual vertex editing or multiple software packages now generates automatically from a 2D floor plan. **Angled Walls.** Walls can lean inward or outward at configurable angles. Useful for tapered towers, pyramidal forms, or any building with non-vertical facades. The system calculates roof vertex offsets automatically where tilted walls meet at corners.

**Sloped Ceilings.** Set different heights at each vertex of a zone. Wall heights interpolate correctly, and roofs triangulate automatically for EnergyPlus export—no more coplanar surface errors.

**Shading That Follows the Geometry.** Overhangs and fins now position correctly on angled walls. Previous versions exported shading at the base wall position regardless of tilt, which caused them to appear inside the building when viewed in EnergyPlus. Fixed. **Rotation.** You can now duplicate and rotate. The results make very light work of complex geometry.

**Windows on Tilted Surfaces.** Windows tilt to match angled walls and export with correct vertex coordinates. #### What We Added in V1.2 For those who missed it, V1.2 brought a substantial set of workflow improvements: **Underlays.** Import PNG, DXF, or SVG files as background traces. Calibrate scale by clicking two points and entering the known distance. Trace over architectural drawings directly in the 2D view.

**Shading Masses.** Draw adjacent buildings and external objects for context. They export as shading surfaces so your energy model accounts for overshadowing from neighbouring structures.

**Transform Tools.** Move, copy, rotate, mirror, offset, array, split, and fillet. Select zones and transform them without redrawing. **Measure Tools.** Point-to-point distance, area calculation, angle measurement, perimeter length. The basics you need when working from drawings. **Zone Cutting Mode.** New zones automatically cut through existing zones when enabled. Prevents overlapping geometry without manual cleanup. **Reference Levels.** Ghost layers showing zones from the level above or below. Helps with vertical alignment across floors. **Ortho Mode.** Constrain drawing to horizontal and vertical lines. Press F8 to toggle. #### Why It Matters? The 2D-to-3D workflow is where this gets interesting. Draw a floor plan, apply wall angles, duplicate the level 39 times, and you have a 40-story tapered tower with windows and shading geometry that would normally take hours or days of manual work. A few minutes for a 40-story building isn't an exaggeration. It's what happens when the tool handles the repetitive geometry calculations instead of you and is designed for purpose, not a plugin to more complex processes. #### The Tool Browser-based, runs offline, no installation, exports to EpJSON for EnergyPlus. Handles multi-level buildings, automatic WWR glazing, perimeter/core splitting, DXF/SVG/PNG import, transform tools, measure tools, and now complex angled geometry. It's powerful. It's free. It's super fun to use. **Download V1.3:** [3D Building Geometry Creator](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/user-guide/tools-and-plugins/3d-building-geometry-creator) # Construction Templates: What They Are and Why You'll Use Them Constantly

If you've recently joined the platform, construction templates are one of the first features worth getting familiar with. They'll save you time, and (more importantly) they'll save you from manually rebuilding the same wall assemblies over and over again. #### The Basics A construction template is exactly what it sounds like: a pre-built layered assembly representing a wall, roof, or floor. Each template contains the full material stack, so you're not starting from scratch every time you need to model a cavity wall or a warm roof build-up. The platform includes a substantial library of these templates for [walls](/support-and-training/other-support/platform-generic-material-data/wall-construction-templates), [roof](/support-and-training/other-support/platform-generic-material-data/roof-construction-templates) and [floors](/support-and-training/other-support/platform-generic-material-data/floor-construction-templates), covering common construction types you'll encounter across most projects. They're set up to work with thermal assessments, moisture assessments, dew point analysis, and upfront carbon calculations. So whether you're checking U-values or trying to figure out if your client's ambitious insulation spec is going to cause interstitial condensation problems, templates give you a solid starting point.

#### Build Your Own The pre-loaded templates cover a lot of ground, but real projects have a habit of not quite matching the textbook examples. You can create custom templates, tweak the layer thicknesses and materials to match your actual specification, and save them for reuse. Once you've built a template for that particular cladding system your architect keeps specifying, you won't have to reconstruct it from memory six months later. This is particularly useful for assessing thermal performance including repeating thermal bridging (the kind that comes from regularly spaced fixings, studs, or rails). Getting those calculations right matters, and having a reusable template means you're not re-entering the same data every time. {% hint style="info" %} Learn how to [update templates](/user-guide/elements) or [take a course](/support-and-training/on-demand-courses/total-r-values). {% endhint %} # ASHRAE 90.1-2022: Six Things You Actually Need to Know ASHRAE Standard 90.1 has been the foundation of US commercial building energy codes since 1975. The 2022 edition arrived in January 2023 with over 60 addenda, section renumbering that will trip you up at least once, and a fundamental shift from tracking energy costs to tracking carbon emissions. Here are the six changes that will actually affect your work. ### 1. You Can Trade Off HVAC Requirements Now (Sort Of) The new Mechanical System Performance Rating method in Appendix L lets you trade HVAC requirements against each other without running a whole building energy model. Missing an economizer because your space configuration makes it impractical? Make it up with higher efficiency cooling equipment or reduced fan energy. The constraint is you can only trade within the HVAC system. No swapping a better chiller for a worse envelope. Those have different lifespans (15 years versus 40+ years), and the committee finally acknowledged that matters. Currently the method works for office, retail, education, and multifamily buildings. Healthcare systems are too complex. If you need complicated tradeoffs there, you're doing Appendix G regardless. The metric is called Total System Performance Rating (TSPR). It's set up so higher numbers mean better performance, matching how you already think about COP and EER. You get credit for part-load performance, which is where equipment actually operates most of the time. PNNL developed a compliance tool that uses simplified block modeling. Early users say the interface is reasonable, which is higher praise than it sounds. The method compares your proposed design to a reference system with performance equivalent to the 2004 version of the standard, adjusted by a Mechanical Performance Factor for your climate zone and building type. All the complex bits happen in software. You just input your design and see if it beats the target. ### 2. Energy Credits Give You Actual Flexibility Section 11 (formerly known as "the section that didn't exist") introduces energy credits as a compliance path. Pick from 33 measures covering efficiency improvements, renewable energy, and load management. Most building types in most climate zones need 42 to 50 credits total. Each credit represents one-tenth of one percent of whole building energy cost, targeting 5% overall savings beyond base prescriptive requirements. This matters because prescriptive requirements have to work for every building, which means they're often not optimized for your specific project. Energy credits let you pick measures that make sense for your building type, climate, and budget. Some credits have fixed values. Others scale based on how much you exceed minimums, so you can earn extra points for going beyond the base threshold. Credits cover envelope performance improvements, HVAC efficiency upgrades, service water heating, additional on-site renewables beyond the new prescriptive minimums, peak load management, and automatic shading systems. The new version of COMcheck integrates credit calculation directly. When you input lighting fixtures, it determines whether you earn reduced lighting power credits. When you document HVAC equipment, it calculates performance improvement credits automatically. PNNL analyzed cost effectiveness for each building type to ensure credit packages make economic sense. The standard is on continuous maintenance, meaning anyone can submit proposals for new credits. If you represent a manufacturer with an innovative technology that's cost-effective for some buildings but not all, energy credits provides a home for it. Contact the committee for help developing the credit calculations. They do the prototype modeling. ### 3. On-Site Renewables Are Now Mandatory Section 10.5.1 establishes a prescriptive requirement for on-site renewable energy. Buildings meeting size and occupancy criteria must provide either 0.5 watts per square foot or 1.7 BTUs per square foot of renewable capacity based on gross floor area of the first three floors. The calculation is straightforward. Take your building's gross floor area for floors one through three (high-rises don't get penalized), multiply by 0.5 W/sf, and that's your renewable capacity requirement. A 50,000 sf single-story warehouse needs 25 kW. A ten-story building with 5,200 sf floor plates needs 7.8 kW (15,600 sf total for three floors). A two-story school with 26,000 sf per floor needs 26 kW. Exceptions exist for green roofs (don't want to conflict with stormwater management goals), buildings shadowed by taller structures nearby (demonstrated through solar access analysis), and alterations. The logic is reasonable. If your building sits in the shadow of a 40-story tower, rooftop PV isn't accomplishing much. For performance modeling, ECB handles this by modeling the same renewable type in the baseline if your proposed design includes renewables. If you don't include renewables in your proposed design, a default PV system goes in the baseline configured per NREL's PV Watts assumptions. Appendix G doesn't model any renewable in the baseline regardless of your proposed design. This is the first time 90.1 has required on-site renewables prescriptively rather than as an optional credit or tradeoff. It reflects the shift from energy efficiency to decarbonization as the primary policy goal. ### 4. Equipment Efficiency Changed (And Refrigerants Are Phasing Out) Multiple equipment tables updated, but the big changes are metric conversions and refrigerant phase-outs that affect every piece of HVAC equipment you specify. Residential and light commercial equipment switched from SEER to SEER2 and HSPF to HSPF2 as of January 1, 2023. The new metrics include higher external static requirements (0.5 inches versus 0.1 to 0.2 inches previously), which dropped ratings about 5%. But actual efficiency requirements went up, so a 15 SEER2 requirement equals roughly 14.3 old SEER after the derate. Commercial three-phase equipment follows January 1, 2025. VRF equipment got hit with sensible heat factor requirements at 100% and 75% capacity per AHRI 1230-2021. This dropped EER ratings 4.2% to 6.7%, but manufacturers absorbed the change while simultaneously improving actual efficiency about 12%. Your equipment appears less efficient on paper while performing better in reality, which is confusing but ultimately good. Coming in 2029 are completely new metrics for commercial rooftops: integrated ventilating energy efficiency (iVEEC) for cooling and integrated ventilating heating efficiency (iVHE) for heating. These include economizer performance, ventilation loads, and crankcase heater power in the ratings. Expect 16% to 36% efficiency improvements. Start planning specifications now because your go-to rooftop unit might not meet the new numbers. The elephant in the room is refrigerants. EPA's final rule phases out R-410A, R-134A, R-404A, and similar refrigerants effective January 1, 2025 for most equipment, 2026 for VRF. The US signed the Kigali Amendment requiring global warming potential below 750. About 12 states adopted earlier. Every piece of refrigeration equipment gets reformulated. AHRI has recorded webinars explaining what's changing and which replacement refrigerants work in which applications. Watch them before you specify anything with a compressor. This isn't an ASHRAE change, but it affects every project touching 90.1, so you need to know it's happening. ### 5. Air Leakage Testing Is Required for Small Buildings Addendum t makes blower door testing mandatory for buildings under 25,000 sf. Previously you could install a continuous air barrier, conduct visual inspections, call it compliant, and move on with your life. Now you need to actually test and hit 0.35 cfm per square foot at 75 Pascals. That target isn't Department of Defense stringent (0.15 cfm/sf) but it's real. Exceptions exist for certain building types and configurations, but the basic principle is small buildings need measured air leakage verification. The committee's logic is straightforward: building envelopes last 40+ years while mechanical systems last 15. Making bad envelope decisions for short-term compliance convenience creates buildings that waste energy for decades. Air leakage testing isn't tradable. You just have to meet it. This represents a significant shift in how envelope performance gets verified. If you design small commercial buildings, expect your envelope detailing to matter more than it used to, and someone's actually going to measure whether it works. ### 6. Thermal Bridging Requirements Close the Loophole Addendum av finally addresses thermal bridging, which had effectively been a code loophole. ASHRAE developed detailed methodology for calculating thermal bridges across five categories: roof-to-wall connections, floor balconies and intermediate floors, cladding support systems, window frames, and major penetrations (canopies, signage, structural elements). The requirements include default psi factors for linear thermal bridges and chi factors for point thermal bridges. If you don't want to calculate everything from first principles, the standard provides suggested constructions and default values you can reference. The catch is you actually have to address it now rather than pretending thermal bridges don't exist because they're hard to calculate. Thermal bridging is in the tradable section of the code, meaning you can skip it if you compensate elsewhere. But you need to demonstrate that compensation using the Appendix C envelope tradeoff method in COMcheck. You can't just ignore it and hope nobody notices. The typical tradeoff is better windows or additional wall insulation to make up for thermal bridge losses you're not addressing. The standard added an entire appendix of figures and details because explaining steel-to-steel connections and concrete attachments with words alone doesn't work. These are the kinds of connections where insulation gets interrupted and heat finds a path through your envelope. Balconies cantilevered through wall assemblies. Structural steel penetrating insulation layers. Cladding clips creating repeating thermal shorts. The building industry has known about thermal bridging for decades. We just collectively agreed not to deal with it because the math was annoying and it made detailing more complicated. The 2022 standard ended that arrangement. You can still choose not to address thermal bridging in your design, but you have to compensate for it somewhere else in the envelope performance. The heat loss doesn't magically disappear just because you didn't model it. This pairs with the air leakage testing requirements to significantly tighten envelope performance verification. The combination means your envelope detailing matters more than it used to, and you can't trade your way out of both requirements simultaneously. ### What Else Changed Chiller performance curves got standardized in Appendix J, fixing the problem where every engineer used different part-load curves and nobody's results matched. Building Performance Factors updated to reflect more accurate baseline modeling, making many of them less stringent even though the standard improved overall. Retrofit provisions differentiate between substantial alterations (following new building rules with 5% relaxed targets) and minor alterations (baseline to existing conditions for unaltered areas). Section numbering changed. Energy Cost Budget moved from Section 11 to Section 12. Energy credits took Section 11. References moved to Section 13. This will cause at least one embarrassing moment in a meeting when you reference the wrong section from muscle memory. ### Adoption Status Oregon adopted 90.1-2022 directly as of January 1, 2025. Illinois, Nevada, North Dakota, and Rhode Island adopted IECC 2024, which allows 90.1-2022 as an alternative. Austin, Phoenix, and Nashville follow mid-2025. New York adopted it with state modifications effective December 31, 2025, including fossil fuel prohibitions currently suspended by court order. About 14 states require the 2019 version. Colorado, Wyoming, the Dakotas, Kansas, Missouri, and Mississippi have no statewide commercial codes. The federal government adopted 2019 for HUD and USDA programs with 2022 as an acceptable alternative. The standard is available at ashrae.org with complete addenda documentation. DOE estimates 14% energy savings over the 2019 edition, 19% cost savings, and 48% improvement compared to 2004. States and jurisdictions are adopting it faster than previous editions, which suggests the flexibility mechanisms (energy credits, MSPR) are actually useful rather than just additional compliance burden. Whether the industry hits the 2030 to 2050 net zero targets depends on factors well beyond building codes. But the framework is operational and the requirements are moving in the right direction. # ASHRAE Standard 90.1 Appendix G Comparison ### Executive Summary This document provides a comprehensive comparison of **Normative Appendix G (Performance Rating Method)** between ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2019 and ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2022. The analysis identifies all changes including new sections, removed sections, renumbered sections, and content modifications. *** ## SECTION 4.2.1.1 - NEW BUILDINGS (Referenced by Appendix G) This section defines the compliance requirements when using the Performance Rating Method (Appendix G) as an alternative compliance path. ### Section 4.2.1.1 Comparison #### Compliance Path Options | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------- | --------------- | ----------- | | Section 4.2.1.1 | Section 4.2.1.1 | 🟡 MODIFIED | **2019 Compliance Options:** > New buildings shall comply with Sections 4.2.2 through 4.2.5 and either the provisions of: > > * Section 5, "Building Envelope"; Section 6, "Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning"; Section 7, "Service Water Heating"; Section 8, "Power"; Section 9, "Lighting"; and Section 10, "Other Equipment," or > * Section 11, "Energy Cost Budget Method," or > * Normative Appendix G, "Performance Rating Method." **2022 Compliance Options:** > New buildings shall comply with Section 4.2.2 through 4.2.5 and either the provisions of: > > * Sections 5, "Building Envelope"; 6, "Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning"; 7, "Service Water Heating"; 8, "Power"; 9, "Lighting"; 10, "Other Equipment"; **and 11, "Additional Efficiency Requirements,"** or > * Section 12, "Energy Cost Budget Method," or > * Normative Appendix G, "Performance Rating Method." **Key Change:** | Change | 2019 | 2022 | | ------------------ | ------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | Section 11 role | Energy Cost Budget Method | **Additional Efficiency Requirements** (mandatory for prescriptive path) | | Energy Cost Budget | Section 11 | **Section 12** (renumbered) | *** ### PCIt Formula Comparison #### 2019 Formula: ``` PCIt = (BBUEC + BPF × BBREC) / BBP ``` Where: * **PCIt** = Performance Cost Index Target * **BBUEC** = Baseline Building Unregulated Energy Cost * **BPF** = Building Performance Factor from Table 4.2.1.1 * **BBREC** = Baseline Building Regulated Energy Cost * **BBP** = Baseline Building Performance #### 2022 Formula 🟡 MODIFIED: ``` PCIt = (BBUEC + BPF × BBREC − PRE) / BBP ``` Where (NEW definitions in **bold**): * **PCIt** = Performance Cost Index Target * **BBUEC** = Baseline Building Unregulated Energy Cost * **BPF** = Building Performance Factor from Table 4.2.1.1 * **BBREC** = Baseline Building Regulated Energy Cost * **PRE** = **PBPnre − PBPpre** *(NEW)* * **PBPnre** = **Proposed building performance without any credit for reduced annual energy costs from on-site renewable energy generation systems** *(NEW)* * **PBPpre** = **Proposed building performance, excluding any renewable energy system in the proposed design and including an on-site renewable energy system that meets but does not exceed the requirements of Section 10.5.1.1** *(NEW)* * **BBP** = Baseline Building Performance #### Formula Changes Summary: | Element | 2019 | 2022 | Impact | | ---------------- | ------------ | -------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------- | | PRE term | Not included | **Subtracted from numerator** | Limits renewable energy credit | | PBPnre | Not defined | **New definition** | Performance without renewables | | PBPpre | Not defined | **New definition** | Performance with prescriptive renewables only | | Renewable credit | Unlimited | **Capped at prescriptive requirement** | Prevents over-reliance on renewables | *** ### 2022 Additional Renewable Energy Compliance Requirement 🟢 NEW When on-site renewable energy exceeds the prescriptive requirement by more than 5%, the following additional compliance check applies: ``` PCI + [(PBPpre − PBP)/BBP] − 0.05 ≤ PCIt ``` This requirement ensures that buildings with large renewable energy systems still achieve meaningful efficiency improvements in building systems and envelope. *** ### BPF Definition Changes | Aspect | 2019 | 2022 | | ---------------------------- | --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | Source | Table 4.2.1.1 | Table 4.2.1.1 | | Default for unlisted types | "All others" | "All others" | | Multiple building types | Area-weighted average | Area-weighted average **based on gross floor area** | | Existing building + addition | Not addressed | **Area-weighted average of existing BPF (per 4.2.1.3) and addition BPF** | *** ### 2022 Alterations BPF Modifications 🟢 NEW | Alteration Type | BPF Requirement | | ----------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- | | Substantial alterations (per Section G3.1.4(a)) | Table 4.2.1.1 value × **1.05** (5% relaxation) | | Other alterations (per Section G3.3) | **BPF = 1.0** (no efficiency improvement required beyond code) | *** ## TABLE 4.2.1.1 - BUILDING PERFORMANCE FACTOR (BPF) ### Climate Zone Column Changes | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------------------- | ---------------- | ----------- | | Combined: 0A and 1A | Separate: 0A, 1A | 🟡 MODIFIED | | Combined: 0B and 1B | Separate: 0B, 1B | 🟡 MODIFIED | **2022 now provides separate BPF values for Climate Zones 0A, 0B, 1A, and 1B instead of combining them.** *** ### BPF Value Comparison by Building Type #### Multifamily | Climate Zone | 2019 | 2022 | Change | | ------------ | ---- | ---- | ------ | | 0A | 0.68 | 0.69 | +0.01 | | 0B | 0.70 | 0.68 | −0.02 | | 1A | 0.68 | 0.71 | +0.03 | | 1B | 0.70 | 0.70 | — | | 2A | 0.66 | 0.72 | +0.06 | | 2B | 0.66 | 0.72 | +0.06 | | 3A | 0.69 | 0.71 | +0.02 | | 3B | 0.68 | 0.76 | +0.08 | | 3C | 0.59 | 0.63 | +0.04 | | 4A | 0.74 | 0.69 | −0.05 | | 4B | 0.76 | 0.76 | — | | 4C | 0.74 | 0.71 | −0.03 | | 5A | 0.70 | 0.66 | −0.04 | | 5B | 0.73 | 0.72 | −0.01 | | 5C | 0.75 | 0.71 | −0.04 | | 6A | 0.68 | 0.65 | −0.03 | | 6B | 0.71 | 0.67 | −0.04 | | 7 | 0.68 | 0.65 | −0.03 | | 8 | 0.72 | 0.67 | −0.05 | #### Healthcare/Hospital | Climate Zone | 2019 | 2022 | Change | | ------------ | ---- | ---- | --------- | | 0A | 0.60 | 0.69 | **+0.09** | | 0B | 0.60 | 0.69 | **+0.09** | | 1A | 0.60 | 0.70 | **+0.10** | | 1B | 0.60 | 0.68 | **+0.08** | | 2A | 0.58 | 0.67 | **+0.09** | | 2B | 0.54 | 0.65 | **+0.11** | | 3A | 0.56 | 0.65 | **+0.09** | | 3B | 0.55 | 0.66 | **+0.11** | | 3C | 0.55 | 0.64 | **+0.09** | | 4A | 0.55 | 0.64 | **+0.09** | | 4B | 0.54 | 0.66 | **+0.12** | | 4C | 0.54 | 0.63 | **+0.09** | | 5A | 0.57 | 0.67 | **+0.10** | | 5B | 0.52 | 0.65 | **+0.13** | | 5C | 0.54 | 0.65 | **+0.11** | | 6A | 0.57 | 0.66 | **+0.09** | | 6B | 0.52 | 0.67 | **+0.15** | | 7 | 0.57 | 0.68 | **+0.11** | | 8 | 0.57 | 0.70 | **+0.13** | **Note:** Healthcare/Hospital BPF values have **increased significantly** (relaxed) across all climate zones, with changes ranging from +0.08 to +0.15. #### Hotel/Motel | Climate Zone | 2019 | 2022 | Change | | ------------ | ---- | ---- | --------- | | 0A | 0.55 | 0.66 | **+0.11** | | 0B | 0.53 | 0.66 | **+0.13** | | 1A | 0.55 | 0.69 | **+0.14** | | 1B | 0.53 | 0.65 | **+0.12** | | 2A | 0.53 | 0.65 | **+0.12** | | 2B | 0.52 | 0.64 | **+0.12** | | 3A | 0.53 | 0.64 | **+0.11** | | 3B | 0.54 | 0.65 | **+0.11** | | 3C | 0.54 | 0.65 | **+0.11** | | 4A | 0.53 | 0.63 | **+0.10** | | 4B | 0.53 | 0.65 | **+0.12** | | 4C | 0.52 | 0.63 | **+0.11** | | 5A | 0.50 | 0.62 | **+0.12** | | 5B | 0.51 | 0.63 | **+0.12** | | 5C | 0.51 | 0.62 | **+0.11** | | 6A | 0.50 | 0.61 | **+0.11** | | 6B | 0.51 | 0.62 | **+0.11** | | 7 | 0.50 | 0.59 | **+0.09** | | 8 | 0.50 | 0.58 | **+0.08** | **Note:** Hotel/Motel BPF values have **increased significantly** (relaxed) across all climate zones. #### Office | Climate Zone | 2019 | 2022 | Change | | ------------ | ---- | ---- | ------ | | 0A | 0.52 | 0.54 | +0.02 | | 0B | 0.57 | 0.54 | −0.03 | | 1A | 0.52 | 0.53 | +0.01 | | 1B | 0.57 | 0.52 | −0.05 | | 2A | 0.50 | 0.52 | +0.02 | | 2B | 0.56 | 0.52 | −0.04 | | 3A | 0.53 | 0.50 | −0.03 | | 3B | 0.56 | 0.54 | −0.02 | | 3C | 0.48 | 0.48 | — | | 4A | 0.51 | 0.48 | −0.03 | | 4B | 0.52 | 0.53 | +0.01 | | 4C | 0.49 | 0.48 | −0.01 | | 5A | 0.51 | 0.49 | −0.02 | | 5B | 0.51 | 0.52 | +0.01 | | 5C | 0.49 | 0.48 | −0.01 | | 6A | 0.52 | 0.48 | −0.04 | | 6B | 0.51 | 0.49 | −0.02 | | 7 | 0.49 | 0.46 | −0.03 | | 8 | 0.51 | 0.48 | −0.03 | #### School | Climate Zone | 2019 | 2022 | Change | | ------------ | ---- | ---- | --------- | | 0A | 0.39 | 0.52 | **+0.13** | | 0B | 0.47 | 0.57 | **+0.10** | | 1A | 0.39 | 0.57 | **+0.18** | | 1B | 0.47 | 0.56 | **+0.09** | | 2A | 0.38 | 0.52 | **+0.14** | | 2B | 0.43 | 0.53 | **+0.10** | | 3A | 0.38 | 0.52 | **+0.14** | | 3B | 0.42 | 0.49 | **+0.07** | | 3C | 0.40 | 0.50 | **+0.10** | | 4A | 0.37 | 0.46 | **+0.09** | | 4B | 0.40 | 0.47 | **+0.07** | | 4C | 0.38 | 0.47 | **+0.09** | | 5A | 0.36 | 0.47 | **+0.11** | | 5B | 0.40 | 0.46 | **+0.06** | | 5C | 0.36 | 0.46 | **+0.10** | | 6A | 0.36 | 0.46 | **+0.10** | | 6B | 0.37 | 0.44 | **+0.07** | | 7 | 0.36 | 0.45 | **+0.09** | | 8 | 0.37 | 0.45 | **+0.08** | **Note:** School BPF values have **increased dramatically** (relaxed) across all climate zones, with changes ranging from +0.06 to +0.18. #### Warehouse | Climate Zone | 2019 | 2022 | Change | | ------------ | ---- | ---- | --------- | | 0A | 0.38 | 0.26 | **−0.12** | | 0B | 0.42 | 0.26 | **−0.16** | | 1A | 0.38 | 0.22 | **−0.16** | | 1B | 0.42 | 0.25 | **−0.17** | | 2A | 0.40 | 0.21 | **−0.19** | | 2B | 0.42 | 0.22 | **−0.20** | | 3A | 0.43 | 0.25 | **−0.18** | | 3B | 0.44 | 0.21 | **−0.23** | | 3C | 0.43 | 0.19 | **−0.24** | | 4A | 0.44 | 0.25 | **−0.19** | | 4B | 0.43 | 0.22 | **−0.21** | | 4C | 0.46 | 0.22 | **−0.24** | | 5A | 0.49 | 0.28 | **−0.21** | | 5B | 0.47 | 0.24 | **−0.23** | | 5C | 0.48 | 0.22 | **−0.26** | | 6A | 0.54 | 0.31 | **−0.23** | | 6B | 0.51 | 0.28 | **−0.23** | | 7 | 0.57 | 0.29 | **−0.28** | | 8 | 0.57 | 0.32 | **−0.25** | **Note:** Warehouse BPF values have **decreased dramatically** (more stringent) across all climate zones, with changes ranging from −0.12 to −0.28. #### Retail | Climate Zone | 2019 | 2022 | Change | | ------------ | ---- | ---- | --------- | | 0A | 0.51 | 0.51 | — | | 0B | 0.54 | 0.49 | −0.05 | | 1A | 0.51 | 0.48 | −0.03 | | 1B | 0.54 | 0.48 | −0.06 | | 2A | 0.49 | 0.44 | −0.05 | | 2B | 0.55 | 0.43 | **−0.12** | | 3A | 0.51 | 0.43 | **−0.08** | | 3B | 0.55 | 0.43 | **−0.12** | | 3C | 0.53 | 0.44 | **−0.09** | | 4A | 0.51 | 0.42 | **−0.09** | | 4B | 0.55 | 0.43 | **−0.12** | | 4C | 0.54 | 0.46 | **−0.08** | | 5A | 0.50 | 0.43 | **−0.07** | | 5B | 0.54 | 0.42 | **−0.12** | | 5C | 0.55 | 0.47 | **−0.08** | | 6A | 0.50 | 0.43 | **−0.07** | | 6B | 0.51 | 0.43 | **−0.08** | | 7 | 0.48 | 0.41 | **−0.07** | | 8 | 0.50 | 0.44 | −0.06 | #### Restaurant | Climate Zone | 2019 | 2022 | Change | | ------------ | ---- | ---- | --------- | | 0A | 0.63 | 0.62 | −0.01 | | 0B | 0.64 | 0.59 | −0.05 | | 1A | 0.63 | 0.57 | −0.06 | | 1B | 0.64 | 0.57 | −0.07 | | 2A | 0.60 | 0.57 | −0.03 | | 2B | 0.60 | 0.53 | −0.07 | | 3A | 0.60 | 0.57 | −0.03 | | 3B | 0.61 | 0.53 | **−0.08** | | 3C | 0.58 | 0.51 | −0.07 | | 4A | 0.62 | 0.55 | −0.07 | | 4B | 0.57 | 0.54 | −0.03 | | 4C | 0.61 | 0.54 | −0.07 | | 5A | 0.63 | 0.57 | −0.06 | | 5B | 0.60 | 0.56 | −0.04 | | 5C | 0.64 | 0.55 | **−0.09** | | 6A | 0.65 | 0.59 | −0.06 | | 6B | 0.62 | 0.58 | −0.04 | | 7 | 0.67 | 0.61 | −0.06 | | 8 | 0.70 | 0.64 | −0.06 | #### All Others | Climate Zone | 2019 | 2022 | Change | | ------------ | ---- | ---- | --------- | | 0A | 0.56 | 0.62 | +0.06 | | 0B | 0.57 | 0.60 | +0.03 | | 1A | 0.56 | 0.62 | +0.06 | | 1B | 0.57 | 0.59 | +0.02 | | 2A | 0.50 | 0.55 | +0.05 | | 2B | 0.52 | 0.51 | −0.01 | | 3A | 0.50 | 0.53 | +0.03 | | 3B | 0.54 | 0.52 | −0.02 | | 3C | 0.53 | 0.55 | +0.02 | | 4A | 0.53 | 0.53 | — | | 4B | 0.52 | 0.52 | — | | 4C | 0.54 | 0.55 | +0.01 | | 5A | 0.51 | 0.53 | +0.02 | | 5B | 0.51 | 0.53 | +0.02 | | 5C | 0.50 | 0.56 | +0.06 | | 6A | 0.50 | 0.54 | +0.04 | | 6B | 0.50 | 0.54 | +0.04 | | 7 | 0.50 | 0.54 | +0.04 | | 8 | 0.46 | 0.54 | **+0.08** | *** ### BPF Changes Summary | Building Type | Overall Trend | Range of Change | | ----------------------- | ---------------------------- | --------------- | | **Multifamily** | Mixed | −0.05 to +0.08 | | **Healthcare/Hospital** | 🔴 **Relaxed significantly** | +0.08 to +0.15 | | **Hotel/Motel** | 🔴 **Relaxed significantly** | +0.08 to +0.14 | | **Office** | Slightly more stringent | −0.05 to +0.02 | | **Restaurant** | More stringent | −0.09 to −0.01 | | **Retail** | 🟢 **More stringent** | −0.12 to 0 | | **School** | 🔴 **Relaxed dramatically** | +0.06 to +0.18 | | **Warehouse** | 🟢 **Much more stringent** | −0.28 to −0.12 | | **All Others** | Slightly relaxed | −0.02 to +0.08 | #### Interpretation: * **Lower BPF** = More stringent (building must perform better relative to baseline) * **Higher BPF** = Less stringent (building can perform closer to baseline) #### Key Observations: 1. **Warehouses became much more stringent** - BPF values dropped by 0.12 to 0.28, requiring significantly better performance. 2. **Schools, Hotels, and Healthcare became less stringent** - BPF values increased by 0.06 to 0.18, reflecting recognition of the challenges in achieving deep efficiency in these building types. 3. **Retail became more stringent** - BPF values dropped by up to 0.12 in some climate zones. 4. **Renewable energy credit now capped** - The new PRE term and additional compliance check prevent over-reliance on renewable energy to meet compliance targets. 5. **Alterations get BPF relief** - Substantial alterations can use BPF × 1.05; other alterations use BPF = 1.0. *** ### Key Structural Changes #### 1. Major Reorganization * **G3.1.2.x** (General Baseline HVAC System Requirements) → **G3.2.2.x** * **G3.1.3.x** (Baseline Building Envelope) → **G3.2.3.x** * **G3.1.1.x** subsections → **G3.2.1.x** subsections #### 2. New Section G3.3 Added "Performance Calculations for Alterations (Other Than Substantial Alterations)" with subsections G3.3.1 through G3.3.2.9 #### 3. Table G3.7 Split The single Table G3.7 in 2019 has been split into Table G3.7-1 and Table G3.7-2 in 2022 #### 4. New Table G3.4-9 Added for Climate Zone 9 building envelope requirements #### 5. Expanded Simulation Requirements Section G2.2.4 expanded with detailed subsections G2.2.4.1, G2.2.4.2, G2.2.4.3 for simulation program testing #### 6. 🟢 NEW Thermal Bridging Requirements **Significant new content in Table G3.1 (Building Envelope):** Linear and point thermal bridges per Section 5.5.5 must now be modeled in proposed design; baseline building design explicitly excludes thermal bridges (creating credit opportunity) *** ### Color/Status Legend | Status | Description | | ------------- | ------------------------------------------ | | 🟢 NEW | New section in 2022 | | 🟡 MODIFIED | Content has been changed | | 🔵 RENUMBERED | Section number changed but content similar | | ⚪ IDENTICAL | No changes to content | *** ## PART 1: SECTION-BY-SECTION COMPARISON *** ### G1. GENERAL #### G1 - General Header | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------- | ----------- | ----------- | | G1 GENERAL | G1. GENERAL | ⚪ IDENTICAL | **Content:** Header section only - no substantive change. *** #### G1.1 - Performance Rating Method Scope | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ---- | ----------- | | G1.1 | G1.1 | 🟡 MODIFIED | **2019 Content:** > This appendix offers an alternative path for minimum standard compliance in accordance with Section 4.2.1.1 when administered by a building official. It is also provided for those who wish to use this appendix to quantify performance that exceeds the requirements of this standard when administered by a rating authority and not seeking minimum standard compliance in accordance with Section 4.2.1.1. It shall be used for evaluating the performance of all such proposed designs, including alterations and additions to existing buildings, except designs with no mechanical systems. In the case where this appendix is administered solely by a building official to determine compliance with this standard in accordance with Section 4.2.1.1, all references to "rating authority" shall be replaced with "building official." **2022 Content:** > This appendix offers an alternative path for minimum standard compliance in accordance with Section 4.2.1.1 when administered by a building official. It is also provided for those who wish to use this appendix to quantify performance that exceeds the requirements of this standard when administered by a rating authority and not seeking minimum standard compliance in accordance with Section 4.2.1.1. It shall be used for evaluating the performance of all such proposed designs, including alterations and additions to existing buildings, except designs with no mechanical systems. In the case where this appendix is administered solely by a building official to determine compliance with this standard in accordance with Section 4.2.1.1, all references to "rating authority" shall be replaced with "building official." > > **Informative Note: To fully utilize the investment made to create a building energy model during the design process, the methodology described in ASHRAE Standard 209 should be considered.** **Change Summary:** * **Added:** Informative Note referencing ASHRAE Standard 209 for building energy modeling methodology *** #### G1.2 - Performance Rating | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ---- | ----------- | | G1.2 | G1.2 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | **Content:** Section header only. *** #### G1.2.1 - Mandatory Provisions | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------ | ------ | ----------- | | G1.2.1 | G1.2.1 | 🟡 MODIFIED | **2019 Content:** > The proposed building design shall comply with all of the following: > > * a. Sections 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.2.1, 8.2.1, 9.2.1, and 10.2.1. > * Interior lighting power shall not exceed the interior lighting power allowance determined using either: > * **Table G3.7** and the methodology described in **Section 9.6.1**, or > * Table G3.8 and the methodology described in Section 9.5.1. > * Energy efficiency levels of installed components and systems that meet or exceed the efficiency levels used to calculate the proposed building performance. > * Verification, testing, and commissioning requirements of Section 4.2.5 shall be met. > * Proposed building systems, controls, or building envelope documented in Section G1.3(c) that do not have criteria in Sections 5 through 10 shall have verification or testing to document proper installation and operation in accordance with Section 4.2.5. **2022 Content:** > The proposed building design shall comply with all of the following: > > * a. Sections 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.2.1, 8.2.1, 9.2.1, and 10.2.1. > * Interior lighting power shall not exceed the interior lighting power allowance determined using either: > * **Tables G3.7-1 and G3.7-2** and the methodology described in **Section 9.5.2**, or > * Table G3.8 and the methodology described in Section 9.5.1. > * Energy efficiency levels of installed components and systems **shall** meet or exceed the efficiency levels used to calculate the proposed building performance. > * **For new buildings, one of the following shall be met:** > * **The building envelope complies with Section 5.5, "Prescriptive Building Envelope Compliance Path."** > * **Using Section 5.6, "Building Envelope Trade-Off Compliance Path," the proposed envelope performance factor shall not exceed the base envelope performance factor by more than 15% in multifamily residential, hotel/motel, and dormitory building area types. For all other building area types, the limit shall be 7%. For buildings with both residential and nonresidential occupancies, the limit shall be based on the area-weighted average of the gross conditioned floor area.** > * Verification, testing, and commissioning requirements of Section 4.2.5 shall be met. > * Proposed building systems, controls, or building envelope documented in Section G1.3(c) that do not have criteria in Sections 5 through 10 shall have verification or testing to document proper installation and operation in accordance with Section 4.2.5. **Change Summary:** | Change | 2019 | 2022 | | -------------------- | --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Lighting tables | Table G3.7 | Tables G3.7-1 and G3.7-2 | | Lighting methodology | Section 9.6.1 | Section 9.5.2 | | Efficiency wording | "that meet or exceed" | "shall meet or exceed" | | **NEW REQUIREMENT** | — | Building envelope compliance requirement for new buildings (Section 5.5 or 5.6 with limits) | *** #### G1.2.2 - Performance Rating Calculation | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------ | ------ | ----------- | | G1.2.2 | G1.2.2 | 🟡 MODIFIED | **2019 Content:** > Performance Cost Index = Proposed building performance/Baseline building performance > > Both the proposed building performance and the baseline building performance shall include all end-use load components within and associated with **the building** when calculating the Performance Cost Index. > > **Exception to G1.2.2:** Energy used to recharge or refuel vehicles that are used for **off-building site** transportation purposes shall not be modeled in the baseline building performance or the proposed building performance. > > **Informative Note:** Neither the proposed building performance nor the baseline building performance are predictions of actual energy consumption or costs for the proposed design after construction... **2022 Content:** > Performance Cost Index = Proposed building performance/Baseline building performance > > Both the proposed building performance and the baseline building performance shall include all end-use load components within and associated with **the property** when calculating the Performance Cost Index. > > **Exception to G1.2.2:** Energy used to recharge or refuel vehicles that are used for **off-site** transportation purposes shall not be modeled in the baseline building performance or the proposed building performance. > > **Informative Notes:** > > 1. Neither the proposed building performance nor the baseline building performance are predictions of actual energy consumption or costs for the proposed design after construction... > 2. **See Informative Appendix I for using other metrics, including site energy, source energy, and carbon emissions, in conjunction with the Normative Appendix G Performance Rating Method when approved by the rating authority.** **Change Summary:** | Change | 2019 | 2022 | | ----------------- | ----------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Scope terminology | "the building" | "the property" | | Exception wording | "off-building site" | "off-site" | | **NEW** | Single informative note | Added second informative note referencing Appendix I for alternative metrics (site energy, source energy, carbon emissions) | *** #### G1.3 - Submittals | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ---- | ----------- | | G1.3 | G1.3 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | **Content:** Section header only. *** #### G1.3.1 - General | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------ | ------ | ----------- | | G1.3.1 | G1.3.1 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > Compliance documentation and supplemental information shall be submitted in accordance with Section 4.2.2 of this standard. *** #### G1.3.2 - Application Documentation 🟢 NEW/EXPANDED | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ----------------------- | ------ | -------------- | | (embedded in narrative) | G1.3.2 | 🟢 NEW SECTION | **2022 Content (New Explicit Section):** The following documentation shall be submitted to the rating authority: 1. The simulation program used, the version of the simulation program, and the results of the energy analysis, including the calculated values for: * **baseline building unregulated energy cost (BBUEC)** * **baseline building regulated energy cost (BBREC)** * **building performance factor (BPF)** * baseline building performance * proposed building performance * Performance Cost Index (PCI) * Performance Cost Index Target (PCIt) 2. An overview of the project that includes the number of stories (above and below grade), the typical floor size, the uses in the building, the gross area of each use, and whether each use is conditioned space. 3. A list of the energy-related features that are included in the design and on which the performance rating is based. 4. A list showing compliance for the proposed design with all the requirements of Sections 5.4, 6.4, 7.4, 8.4, 9.4, and 10.4 (mandatory provisions). 5. A list identifying those aspects of the proposed design that are **less stringent** than the requirements of Sections 5.5, 6.5, 7.5, and 9.5 (prescriptive provisions). 6. **A list identifying those aspects of the proposed design that are more stringent than the requirements of Sections 5 through 10.** *(NEW)* 7. A table with a summary by end use of the proposed building performance and baseline building performance, **with each end use separated into regulated and unregulated components.** *(NEW detail)* 8. A site plan showing all adjacent buildings and topography that may shade the proposed building. 9. Building elevations and floor plans. 10. A diagram showing the thermal blocks used in the computer simulation. 11. An explanation of any significant modeling assumptions. 12. Backup calculations and material to support data inputs. 13. Reports from the simulation program showing: * a breakdown of energy use by components * the amount of unmet load hours * **a description of energy-related features of the budget building design and the proposed design** *(NEW)* 14. Purchased energy rates used in the simulations. 15. An explanation of any error messages noted in the simulation program output. 16. For any exceptional calculation methods employed, document the predicted energy savings. 17. The reduction in proposed building performance associated with on-site renewable energy. 18. **The version of the software and the link to the website that contains the ASHRAE Standard 140 results for the version used in accordance with Section G2.2.4.** *(NEW)* 19. **Simulation input files for the budget building design and the proposed design shall be made available if requested by the building official.** *(NEW)* **Change Summary:** * Formalized as explicit numbered section * Added BBUEC, BBREC, BPF to required calculated values * Added requirement for list of features MORE stringent than prescriptive * Required end-use separation into regulated/unregulated components * Added requirement for ASHRAE Standard 140 results website link * Added requirement for simulation input files upon request *** #### G1.3.3 - Completion Requirements | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------ | ------ | ----------- | | G1.3.3 | G1.3.3 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > Completion requirements shall be in compliance with Sections 5.7.3, 6.7.3, 7.7.3, 8.7.3, 9.7.3, and 10.7.3. *** ### G2. SIMULATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS #### G2 - Header | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ---- | ----------- | | G2 | G2 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | *** #### G2.1 - Performance Calculations | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ---- | ----------- | | G2.1 | G2.1 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > The proposed building performance and baseline building performance shall be calculated using the following: > > * The same simulation program > * The same weather data > * The same energy rates *** #### G2.2 - Simulation Program | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ---- | ----------- | | G2.2 | G2.2 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > The simulation program shall be a computer-based program for the analysis of energy consumption in buildings (a program such as, but not limited to, DOE-2, BLAST, or EnergyPlus). *** #### G2.2.1 - Simulation Program Requirements 🟢 NEW | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------ | ------ | ----------- | | G2.2.1 | G2.2.1 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > The simulation program shall be approved by the rating authority and shall, at a minimum, have the ability to explicitly model all of the following: > > * 8760 hours per year > * Hourly variations in occupancy, lighting power, miscellaneous equipment power, thermostat setpoints, and HVAC system operation, defined separately for each day of the week and holidays > * Thermal mass effects > * Ten or more thermal zones > * Part-load performance curves for mechanical equipment > * Capacity and efficiency correction curves for mechanical heating and cooling equipment > * Air-side economizers with integrated control acting in conjunction with mechanical cooling > * Baseline building design characteristics specified in Section G3 *** #### G2.2.2 - Simulation Program Capabilities | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------ | ------ | ----------- | | G2.2.2 | G2.2.2 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > The simulation program shall have the ability to either directly determine the proposed building performance and baseline building performance or produce hourly reports of energy use by energy source that can be postprocessed. *** #### G2.2.3 - Design Load Calculations | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------ | ------ | ----------- | | G2.2.3 | G2.2.3 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > The simulation program shall be capable of performing design load calculations to determine required HVAC equipment capacities in accordance with Section 6.4.2. *** #### G2.2.4 - Simulation Program Testing | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------ | ------ | -------------------------- | | G2.2.4 | G2.2.4 | 🟡 MODIFIED (restructured) | **2019 Content:** > The simulation program shall be tested according to ASHRAE Standard 140, except for Sections 7 and 8 of Standard 140. The test results and modeler reports shall be posted on a publicly available website and shall include the test results of the simulation program along with the results of the other simulation programs included in ASHRAE Standard 140, Annexes B8 and B16. The modeler report in Standard 140, Annex A2, Attachment A2.7 shall be completed for results exceeding the maximum or falling below the minimum of the reference values or for missing results. > > Informative Note: There are no pass/fail criteria established by this requirement. **2022 Content:** > Simulation Program Testing Requirements *(Now a parent section with subsections)* *** #### G2.2.4.1 - Testing Requirements 🟢 NEW | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | -------- | ------ | | — | G2.2.4.1 | 🟢 NEW | **2022 Content:** > The simulation program shall be tested according to ASHRAE Standard 140, except for Sections 7 and 8 of Standard 140. **The required tests shall include:** > > * **Building thermal envelope and fabric load tests (Sections 5.2.1, 5.2.2, and 5.2.3)** > * **Ground coupled slab-on-grade analytical verification tests (Section 5.2.4)** > * **Space-cooling equipment performance tests (Section 5.3)** > * **Space-heating equipment performance tests (Section 5.4)** > * **Air-side HVAC equipment analytical verification tests (Section 5.5)** > * **along with the associated reporting (Section 6)** *** #### G2.2.4.2 - Test Results Publication 🟢 NEW | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | -------- | ------ | | — | G2.2.4.2 | 🟢 NEW | **2022 Content:** > The test results and modeler reports shall be posted on a publicly available website and shall include the test results of the simulation program **and input files used for generating the results** along with the results of the other simulation programs included in ASHRAE Standard 140, Annexes B8 and B16. The modeler report in Standard 140, Annex A2, Attachment A2.7 shall be completed for results exceeding the maximum or falling below the minimum of the reference values **and for omitted results**. **Change from 2019:** * Added "and input files used for generating the results" * Changed "missing results" to "omitted results" *** #### G2.2.4.3 - Testing Version Requirements 🟢 NEW | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | -------- | ------ | | — | G2.2.4.3 | 🟢 NEW | **2022 Content:** > The testing shall be performed for the version of the simulation program used to calculate the proposed building performance and baseline building performance. *** #### G2.3 - Climatic Data | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ---- | ----------- | | G2.3 | G2.3 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > The simulation program shall perform the simulation using hourly values of climatic data, such as temperature, solar radiation, humidity, and wind speed from representative climatic data (e.g., typical meteorological year \[TMY] or equivalent)... *** #### G2.4 - Renewable, Recovered, and Purchased Energy 🟢 NEW PARENT | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ---- | ----------- | | G2.4 | G2.4 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | *** #### G2.4.1 - On-Site Renewable Energy and Site-Recovered Energy | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------ | ------ | ----------- | | G2.4.1 | G2.4.1 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > Site-recovered energy shall not be considered purchased energy and shall be subtracted from the proposed design energy consumption prior to calculating the proposed building performance. On-site renewable energy shall be subtracted from the proposed design energy consumption prior to calculating the proposed building performance, provided that the building owner: > > * owns the on-site renewable energy system or > * has signed a lease agreement for the on-site renewable energy system for at least 15 years or > * has signed a contractual agreement to purchase energy generated by the on-site renewable energy system for at least 15 years. *** #### G2.4.2 - Annual Energy Costs | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------ | ------ | ----------- | | G2.4.2 | G2.4.2 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > The design energy cost and baseline energy cost shall be determined using either actual rates for purchased energy or state average energy prices published by USDOE's Energy Information Administration (EIA) for commercial building customers... *** #### G2.5 - Exceptional Calculation Methods | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ---- | ----------- | | G2.5 | G2.5 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > When the simulation program does not model a design, material, or device of the proposed design, an exceptional calculation method shall be used as approved by the rating authority... *** ### G3. CALCULATION OF THE PROPOSED DESIGN AND BASELINE BUILDING PERFORMANCE #### G3 - Header | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ---- | ----------- | | G3 | G3 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | *** #### G3.1 - Building Performance Calculations | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ---- | ----------- | | G3.1 | G3.1 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > The simulation model for calculating the proposed and baseline building performance shall be developed in accordance with the requirements in Table G3.1. *** #### G3.1.1 - Scope/Baseline HVAC System Type | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------------------------------------------------ | ------------ | ----------- | | G3.1.1 Baseline HVAC System Type and Description | G3.1.1 Scope | 🟡 MODIFIED | **2019 Content:** Contained detailed HVAC system selection criteria including building area types, floor counts, and system assignment rules. **2022 Content:** > **Scope.** The simulation model for calculating the proposed building performance and baseline building performance shall be developed in accordance with the requirements in Table G3.1 and other provisions of Section G3. **Change Summary:** The detailed HVAC system selection content from 2019's G3.1.1 has been moved to **G3.2.1** and its subsections in 2022. *** #### G3.1.3 - Additions 🟢 NEW | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ------ | ------ | | — | G3.1.3 | 🟢 NEW | **2022 Content:** > **Additions.** The simulation model for calculating the proposed building performance and baseline building performance for additions shall be developed in accordance with the requirements in Section G3.2. *** ### G3.2 - Performance Calculations for New Buildings, Additions and Substantial Alterations 🟢 NEW MAJOR SECTION | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ---- | ------ | | — | G3.2 | 🟢 NEW | This is a new organizational structure in 2022 that reorganizes content previously in G3.1.x. *** #### G3.2.1 - Baseline HVAC System Type and Description | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------ | ------ | ------------------------ | | G3.1.1 | G3.2.1 | 🔵 RENUMBERED + MODIFIED | **2022 Content:** > **Baseline HVAC System Type and Description.** HVAC systems in the baseline building design shall conform with the system descriptions in Table G3.1.1-4 and comply with the requirements in Sections G3.2.1 through G3.2.3. *** #### G3.2.1.1 - Baseline HVAC System Types based on Building Area Types 🟢 NEW | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ----------- | -------- | ------------------------- | | (in G3.1.1) | G3.2.1.1 | 🟢 NEW (explicit section) | **2022 Content:** HVAC system types in the baseline building design shall be determined as follows: **(a)** Determine the combined area of the gross conditioned floor area and semiheated floor area of each of the following building area types in the proposed design: * **Residential.** HVAC zones that include dwelling units, guest rooms, living quarters, private living spaces, and sleeping quarters, and residential associated HVAC zones shall be classified as residential. Other space types, including patient rooms in hospitals, shall not be classified as residential. * **Public Assembly.** Houses of worship, auditoriums, movie theaters, performance theaters, concert halls, arenas, enclosed stadiums, ice rinks, gymnasiums, convention centers, exhibition centers, and natatorium buildings shall be classified as public assembly. * **Heated-Only Storage.** Nonrefrigerated warehouse buildings and heated parking garages that are not mechanically cooled, shall be classified as heated-only storage. * **Retail.** Grocery stores, retail stores, and supermarket buildings with two floors or fewer shall be classified as retail. * **Hospitals.** Hospital building area types, including patient rooms, shall be classified as hospitals. * **Other Nonresidential.** Buildings and areas within buildings that are not classified as residential, public assembly, heated-only storage, hospital, or retail shall be classified as other nonresidential. **(b)** Classify the nonresidential building area type with the largest combined area from Section G3.2.1.1(a) as the predominant nonresidential building area type. Add the combined area of any remaining nonresidential building area types with less than 1900 m² to the combined area of the predominant nonresidential building area type. **(c)** Select a baseline HVAC system type from Table G3.1.1-3 for each of the following building area types included in the proposed design: * Residential based on Section G3.2.1.1(a) * Predominant nonresidential based on Section G3.2.1.1(b) * Each additional nonresidential building area type with more than 1900 m² of combined area based on Section G3.2.1.1(a) *** #### G3.2.1.2 - Additional and Adjusted Baseline HVAC System Types 🟢 NEW | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ----------- | -------- | ------------------------- | | (in G3.1.1) | G3.2.1.2 | 🟢 NEW (explicit section) | **2022 Content:** Baseline HVAC systems shall be added or adjusted for individual HVAC zones based on the following criteria: **(a)** If the baseline HVAC system type is 5, 6, 7, or 8 use separate single-zone systems conforming with the requirements of system 3 or system 4 for any HVAC zones that have occupancy, or internal gains that differ significantly from the rest of the HVAC zones served by the system. **Total peak internal gains that also differ by 37.9 W/m² or more** from the average of other HVAC zones served by the system, or **occupied hours that are more than 40 hours per week higher** than the average of other HVAC zones served by the system, are considered to differ significantly. **(b)** In a building having a total laboratory exhaust rate greater than 7100 L/s, use a single system of type 5 or 7 serving only those HVAC zones that include the laboratory spaces. The lab exhaust fan shall be modeled as constant kilowatts reflecting constant-volume stack discharge with outdoor air bypass. **(c)** HVAC zones designed with heating-only systems in the proposed design serving storage rooms, stairwells, vestibules, electrical/mechanical rooms, and restrooms not exhausting or transferring air from mechanically cooled thermal zones in the proposed design shall use system type 9 or 10 in the baseline building design. **(d)** If the baseline HVAC system type is 9 or 10, use additional system types for all HVAC zones that are mechanically cooled in the proposed design. **KEY VALUE CHANGE:** | Parameter | 2019 | 2022 | | -------------------------- | -------------------------------------- | ------------------------------ | | Internal gains threshold | **31.2 W/m²** | **37.9 W/m²** | | Schedule difference metric | 40 equivalent full-load hours per week | **40 occupied hours per week** | | System types covered | 5, 6, 7, 8, **9, 10, 11, 12, or 13** | **5, 6, 7, or 8 only** | *** #### G3.2.1.3 - Baseline System Grouping 🟢 NEW | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ----------- | -------- | ------------------------- | | (in G3.1.1) | G3.2.1.3 | 🟢 NEW (explicit section) | **2022 Content:** > For baseline HVAC systems 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13, each HVAC zone or thermal block shall be modeled with its own HVAC system. For systems 5, 6, 7, and 8, each floor shall be modeled with a separate HVAC system. Floors with identical HVAC zones can be grouped for modeling purposes. > > **Exception to G3.2.1.3:** Baseline system 5 or 7 serving laboratory spaces in accordance with Section G3.2.1.2(b) shall be modeled as a single system serving all laboratory HVAC zones regardless of floor. *** #### G3.2.1.4 - Purchased Heat 🟢 NEW | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | -------- | ------------------ | | — | G3.2.1.4 | 🟢 NEW (separated) | **2022 Content:** > **Purchased Heat.** For systems using purchased hot water or steam, the heating source shall be modeled as purchased hot water or steam at the rates documented in accordance with Section G2.4.2. *** #### G3.2.1.5 - Purchased Chilled Water | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------- | -------- | ------------- | | G3.1.1.2 | G3.2.1.5 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | **Content (Similar):** > **Purchased Chilled Water.** For systems using purchased chilled water, the cooling source shall be modeled as purchased chilled water at the rates documented in accordance with Section G2.4.2. *** #### G3.2.1.6 - Baseline HVAC System Requirements for Purchased Systems | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------- | -------- | ------------- | | G3.1.1.3 | G3.2.1.6 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.1.6.1 - Purchased Heat Only | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------- | ---------- | ------------- | | G3.1.1.3.1 | G3.2.1.6.1 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.1.6.2 - Purchased Chilled Water Only | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------- | ---------- | ------------- | | G3.1.1.3.2 | G3.2.1.6.2 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.1.6.3 - Purchased Chilled Water and Purchased Heat | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------- | ---------- | ------------- | | G3.1.1.3.3 | G3.2.1.6.3 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.1.6.4 - On-Site Distribution Pumps | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------- | ---------- | ------------- | | G3.1.1.3.4 | G3.2.1.6.4 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.1.7 - Modeling Building Envelope Air Leakage | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ----------------------- | ---------------------- | --------------------------- | | G3.1.1.4 (Infiltration) | G3.2.1.7 (Air Leakage) | 🔵 RENUMBERED + 🟡 MODIFIED | **Key Changes:** | Change | 2019 | 2022 | | ----------------- | ------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------- | | Section title | "Building Envelope **Infiltration**" | "Building Envelope **Air Leakage**" | | Testing standards | ASTM E 779 only | **ASTM E 779, ASTM E1827, or ASTM E3158** | **2022 Additional Standards:** * Added ASTM E1827 and ASTM E3158 as acceptable testing methods for measuring air leakage rate *** ### G3.2.2 - General Baseline HVAC System Requirements | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------ | ------ | ------------- | | G3.1.2 | G3.2.2 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.2.1 - Equipment Efficiencies | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------- | -------- | ------------- | | G3.1.2.1 | G3.2.2.1 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.2.2 - Equipment Capacities | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------- | -------- | ------------- | | G3.1.2.2 | G3.2.2.2 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.2.2.1 - Sizing Runs | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------- | ---------- | ------------- | | G3.1.2.2.1 | G3.2.2.2.1 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.2.3 - Unmet Loads | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------- | -------- | ------------- | | G3.1.2.3 | G3.2.2.3 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.2.4 - Fan System Operation | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------- | -------- | ------------- | | G3.1.2.4 | G3.2.2.4 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.2.5 - Ventilation | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------- | -------- | ------------- | | G3.1.2.5 | G3.2.2.5 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.2.5.1 - HVAC Fans (Part-Load Performance) | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------- | ---------- | ------------- | | G3.1.2.6.1 | G3.2.2.5.1 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.2.6 - Minimum Outdoor Air | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------- | -------- | ------------- | | G3.1.2.6 | G3.2.2.6 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.2.7 - Chilled-Water Pumps | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------- | -------- | ------------- | | G3.1.2.7 | G3.2.2.7 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.2.7.1 - Chilled-Water Loop Design | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------- | ---------- | ------------- | | G3.1.2.8.1 | G3.2.2.7.1 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.2.7.2 - Condenser-Water Loop Design | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------- | ---------- | ------------- | | G3.1.2.8.2 | G3.2.2.7.2 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.2.8 - Service Hot-Water Pumps | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------- | -------- | ------------- | | G3.1.2.8 | G3.2.2.8 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.2.8.1 - Hot-Water Loop | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------- | ---------- | ------------- | | G3.1.2.9.1 | G3.2.2.8.1 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.2.9 - Dehumidification | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------- | -------- | ------------- | | G3.1.2.9 | G3.2.2.9 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** ### G3.2.3 - Baseline Building Envelope | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------ | ------ | ------------- | | G3.1.3 | G3.2.3 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | *** #### G3.2.3.1 through G3.2.3.19 - Envelope Subsections All subsections have been renumbered from G3.1.3.x to G3.2.3.x: | 2019 Section | 2022 Section | Topic | | ------------ | ------------ | ----------------------------- | | G3.1.3.1 | G3.2.3.1 | Opaque Assemblies | | G3.1.3.2 | G3.2.3.2 | Roofs | | G3.1.3.3 | G3.2.3.3 | Above-Grade Walls | | G3.1.3.4 | G3.2.3.4 | Below-Grade Walls | | G3.1.3.5 | G3.2.3.5 | Floors | | G3.1.3.6 | G3.2.3.6 | Slab-on-Grade Floors | | G3.1.3.7 | G3.2.3.7 | Opaque Doors | | G3.1.3.8 | G3.2.3.8 | Vertical Fenestration | | G3.1.3.9 | G3.2.3.9 | Skylights | | G3.1.3.10 | G3.2.3.10 | Fenestration U-Factor | | G3.1.3.11 | G3.2.3.11 | Fenestration SHGC | | G3.1.3.12 | G3.2.3.12 | External Shading | | G3.1.3.13 | G3.2.3.13 | Light Shelves | | G3.1.3.14 | G3.2.3.14 | Heat Transfer | | G3.1.3.15 | G3.2.3.15 | Air Leakage | | G3.1.3.16 | G3.2.3.16 | Manual Fenestration Shading | | G3.1.3.17 | G3.2.3.17 | Thermal Bridges | | G3.1.3.18 | G3.2.3.18 | Cool Roofs | | G3.1.3.19 | G3.2.3.19 | Demand Controlled Ventilation | *** ### G3.3 - Performance Calculations for Other Alterations 🟢 ENTIRELY NEW SECTION | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ---- | ------ | | — | G3.3 | 🟢 NEW | This is an **entirely new major section** in the 2022 edition addressing alterations that are not classified as "substantial alterations." #### G3.3.1 - Proposed Building Performance 🟢 NEW **2022 Content:** > The simulation model for calculating the proposed building performance shall be developed in accordance with the requirements in Table G3.1, Proposed Building Performance column and the following additional requirements: > > * New and retrofitted systems and equipment shall be consistent with design documents. > * Systems and equipment excluded from the scope of retrofit shall reflect the existing conditions. *** #### G3.3.2 - Baseline Building Performance 🟢 NEW **2022 Content:** > (Parent section for baseline requirements specific to alterations) *** #### G3.3.2.1 - General Approach 🟢 NEW **2022 Content:** > System and equipment included in the scope of retrofit shall be modeled at efficiency levels meeting the mandatory and prescriptive requirements in Sections 5 through 10 and as described in this section. All other baseline systems and equipment shall be modeled the same as in the proposed design. *** #### G3.3.2.2 - Schedules 🟢 NEW **2022 Content:** > Schedules modeled in the baseline design are allowed to differ from the proposed design following Table G3.1(4), Baseline Building Performance column, Exceptions 1 through 3. *** #### G3.3.2.3 - Building Envelope 🟢 NEW **2022 Content:** > Building envelope that is not included in the scope of the alteration shall be modeled identically in the baseline building design and proposed design. Building envelope that is included in the scope of the alteration shall meet the requirements of Sections G3.2.3.1 through G3.2.3.19. *** #### G3.3.2.4 - Lighting 🟢 NEW **2022 Content:** > Lighting systems that are not included in the scope of the alteration shall be modeled identically in the baseline building design and proposed design. Lighting systems that are included in the scope of the alteration shall be modeled in accordance with Table G3.1(6). *** #### G3.3.2.5 - HVAC Systems 🟢 NEW **2022 Content:** > HVAC systems that are not included in the scope of the alteration shall be modeled identically in the baseline building design and proposed design... *** #### G3.3.2.6 - HVAC System Fans 🟢 NEW *** #### G3.3.2.7 - Service Water Heating 🟢 NEW *** #### G3.3.2.8 - Receptacle and Process Loads 🟢 NEW *** #### G3.3.2.9 - On-Site Renewable Energy 🟢 NEW *** ## PART 2: TABLE COMPARISON *** ### Table G3.1 - Modeling Requirements | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------- | ---------- | ----------- | | Table G3.1 | Table G3.1 | 🟡 MODIFIED | **Note:** Title changed from "Modeling Requirements for Calculating Proposed and Baseline Building Performance" to "Modeling Requirements for Calculating Proposed Building Performance and Baseline Building Performance" *** ### Table G3.1.1-1 through G3.1.1-4 - HVAC System Tables | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------------- | -------------- | ----------- | | Table G3.1.1-1 | Table G3.1.1-1 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | | Table G3.1.1-2 | Table G3.1.1-2 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | | Table G3.1.1-3 | Table G3.1.1-3 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | | Table G3.1.1-4 | Table G3.1.1-4 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | *** ### Renumbered Tables (G3.1.2.x → G3.2.2.x) | 2019 Table | 2022 Table | Content | | -------------- | -------------- | ---------------------------- | | Table G3.1.2.6 | Table G3.2.2.5 | Part-Load Performance Curves | | Table G3.1.2.7 | Table G3.2.2.6 | Pump Power | | Table G3.1.2.9 | Table G3.2.2.8 | Service Hot-Water Pump Power | *** ### Renumbered Tables (G3.1.3.x → G3.2.3.x) | 2019 Table | 2022 Table | Content | | --------------- | --------------- | --------------------- | | Table G3.1.3.7 | Table G3.2.3.7 | Opaque Door U-Factors | | Table G3.1.3.11 | Table G3.2.3.11 | Fenestration SHGC | | Table G3.1.3.15 | Table G3.2.3.15 | Air Leakage Rates | *** ### Building Envelope Tables (G3.4 Series) | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | ----------------------- | -------------------------- | | Table G3.4-1 (CZ 0,1) | Table G3.4-1 | ⚪ Review for value changes | | Table G3.4-2 (CZ 2) | Table G3.4-2 | ⚪ Review for value changes | | Table G3.4-3 (CZ 3) | Table G3.4-3 | ⚪ Review for value changes | | Table G3.4-4 (CZ 4) | Table G3.4-4 | ⚪ Review for value changes | | Table G3.4-5 (CZ 5) | Table G3.4-5 | ⚪ Review for value changes | | Table G3.4-6 (CZ 6) | Table G3.4-6 | ⚪ Review for value changes | | Table G3.4-7 (CZ 7) | Table G3.4-7 | ⚪ Review for value changes | | Table G3.4-8 (CZ 8) | Table G3.4-8 | ⚪ Review for value changes | | — | **Table G3.4-9 (CZ 9)** | 🟢 **NEW** | *** ### Equipment Efficiency Tables (G3.5 Series) | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------------ | ------------ | ----------------------- | | Table G3.5.1 | Table G3.5.1 | ⚪ Air Conditioners | | Table G3.5.2 | Table G3.5.2 | ⚪ Heat Pumps | | Table G3.5.3 | Table G3.5.3 | ⚪ Chillers | | Table G3.5.4 | Table G3.5.4 | ⚪ PTAC/PTHP | | Table G3.5.5 | Table G3.5.5 | ⚪ Furnaces/Unit Heaters | | Table G3.5.6 | Table G3.5.6 | ⚪ Boilers | *** ### Lighting Tables (G3.6, G3.7, G3.8) | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------------- | ---------------- | ---------------------------- | | Table G3.6 | Table G3.6 | ⚪ Exterior Lighting | | **Table G3.7** | **Table G3.7-1** | 🟡 **SPLIT** | | — | **Table G3.7-2** | 🟢 **NEW (split from G3.7)** | | Table G3.8 | Table G3.8 | ⚪ Building Area Method | **Note:** The single Table G3.7 (Space-by-Space Method) in 2019 has been split into two tables in 2022. *** ### Motor and Elevator Tables (G3.9 Series) | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------------ | ------------ | -------------------- | | Table G3.9.1 | Table G3.9.1 | ⚪ Motor Efficiency | | Table G3.9.2 | Table G3.9.2 | ⚪ Elevator Motor | | Table G3.9.3 | Table G3.9.3 | ⚪ Hydraulic Elevator | *** ### Performance Cost Index Tables (G3.10 Series) | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------------- | ------------- | ----------------------------- | | Table G3.10.1 | Table G3.10.1 | ⚪ Performance Cost Index | | Table G3.10.2 | Table G3.10.2 | ⚪ Building Performance Factor | *** ## PART 3: SUMMARY OF KEY CHANGES ### Structural Changes Summary | Change Type | Count | Description | | ------------------- | ----- | --------------------------------------- | | New Sections | 26+ | Including G3.3.x series for alterations | | Renumbered Sections | 49 | G3.1.2.x→G3.2.2.x, G3.1.3.x→G3.2.3.x | | Split Tables | 1 | Table G3.7 → G3.7-1 and G3.7-2 | | New Tables | 2 | Table G3.4-9, Table G3.7-2 | ### Content Changes Summary | Parameter | 2019 Value | 2022 Value | | -------------------------- | ---------------------------------- | ------------------------------- | | Internal gains threshold | 31.2 W/m² | 37.9 W/m² | | Schedule difference metric | 40 equivalent full-load hours/week | 40 occupied hours/week | | Lighting table reference | Table G3.7 | Tables G3.7-1 and G3.7-2 | | Lighting methodology | Section 9.6.1 | Section 9.5.2 | | Air leakage testing | ASTM E779 | ASTM E779, E1827, or E3158 | | Section title | "Infiltration" | "Air Leakage" | | Scope terminology | "the building" | "the property" | | **Thermal bridging** | **Not addressed** | **NEW requirement (see below)** | *** ### 🟢 NEW: Thermal Bridging Requirements (Table G3.1 - Building Envelope) **This is a significant NEW addition in 2022 that did not exist in 2019.** #### Proposed Building Performance Requirements (NEW in 2022): > Each **linear thermal bridge** and **point thermal bridge** as identified in **Section 5.5.5** shall be modeled using either of the following techniques: > > 1. A separate model of the assembly within the energy simulation model. > 2. Adjustment of the clear-field U-factor in accordance with **Section A10.2**. > Each **uninsulated assembly** not identified in Section 5.5.5 shall be modeled using either of the following techniques: > > 1. A separate model of the assembly within the energy simulation model. > 2. The U-factors of uninsulated assemblies can be averaged with larger adjacent surfaces of the same class of construction using an area-weighted average method. #### Baseline Building Performance Requirements (NEW in 2022): > **Linear and Point Thermal Bridges.** Where linear thermal bridges and point thermal bridges, as identified in Section 5.5.5 are modeled in the proposed design, **they shall not be modeled in the budget building design**. #### Implications: | Aspect | 2019 | 2022 | | ------------------------------------------ | ------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- | | Thermal bridge modeling in proposed design | Not required | **Required per Section 5.5.5** | | Thermal bridge modeling methods | Not specified | Two options: direct modeling OR U-factor adjustment per A10.2 | | Thermal bridges in baseline | Not addressed | **Explicitly excluded** from baseline when modeled in proposed | | Reference to Section 5.5.5 | None | Multiple references for thermal bridge identification | | Reference to Section A10.2 | None | New reference for U-factor adjustment methodology | This change means that projects using the Performance Rating Method in 2022 must now: 1. Identify linear and point thermal bridges per Section 5.5.5 2. Model these thermal bridges in the proposed design using approved methods 3. NOT include thermal bridges in the baseline building design (creating a credit opportunity for addressing thermal bridges) ## PART 4: KEY ADDENDA AND TECHNICAL CHANGES This section summarizes the major addenda that drove changes between 2019 and 2022, based on the ASHRAE Journal article "ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1-2022 Performance Path Changes" (November 2023). {% file src="/files/eSqdNplhkKh1rHdXON2s" %} *** ### Addendum bv: Building Performance Factor Methodology Change The BPF values in Table 4.2.1.1 were recalculated using a fundamentally different approach. | Aspect | 2019 Methodology | 2022 Methodology | | ------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Basis | Ratio of regulated loads in prototype models compliant with current 90.1 vs. 90.1-2004 | New prototype models configured to align with Appendix G baseline rules | | HVAC Systems | Based on 2004 prototype configurations | Aligned with Appendix G baseline system types and assignments | | Result | \~60% of BPFs became **less stringent** | More accurate representation of actual baseline performance | **Why this matters:** The old methodology didn't account for differences between 2004 prototype model configurations and actual Appendix G baseline modeling requirements. PNNL developed new prototypes that better match what modelers actually create when following Appendix G rules. *** ### Addendum bd: Chiller Performance Curves (NEW Appendix J) A persistent pain point for energy modelers has been finding appropriate performance curves for baseline/budget chillers. This addendum adds **Appendix J: Sets of Performance Curves**. | Situation | 2019 | 2022 | | -------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------- | | Baseline chiller curves | Not prescribed; modelers used software defaults | **Prescribed curves in Appendix J** | | Budget chiller curves (ECBM) | Not prescribed | **Prescribed curves in Appendix J** | | Proposed design (no manufacturer data) | Software defaults or custom curves | **Default curves provided in Appendix J** | **Practical impact:** * Eliminates inconsistency between simulation programs using different default curves * Removes the need for modelers to create custom curves (which requires expertise most don't have) * Ensures baseline/budget chillers reflect intended IPLV values * Particularly helpful when proposed design doesn't include a chiller but baseline requires one *** ### Addendum af: Lighting Clarifications Three specific lighting modeling issues were addressed: #### Change 1: Lighting Power Method Consistency | Situation | 2019 | 2022 | | ------------------------------------ | -------------------- | ----------------------------------------- | | Lighting neither exists nor designed | Method not specified | **Same method for proposed and baseline** | | Space types known | — | Use Space-by-Space Method | | Space types unknown | — | Use Building Area Method | | Baseline when proposed uses BAM | — | Use Table G3.8 | #### Change 2: Exterior Lighting (Non-Tradable Surfaces) | 2019 | 2022 | | -------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------- | | Baseline had separate allowances | **Baseline = same as proposed** for non-tradable surfaces | #### Change 3: Retail Display Lighting | 2019 | 2022 | | -------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- | | Not specifically addressed | **Baseline = lesser of Section 9.5.2.2(b) limits or proposed** | *** ### Addendum ch: Alternative Metrics (NEW Appendix I) New **Informative Appendix I** provides alternative compliance metrics for jurisdictions that don't want to use energy cost. | Metric | Table Reference | Purpose | | ---------------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------- | | Site Energy | Table I3-1 | Direct energy consumption | | Source Energy | Table I3-3 | Accounts for generation/transmission losses | | Carbon Emissions | Table I3-2 | Supports decarbonization goals | **Why this exists:** Using cost metrics with the PRM's independent baseline can discourage electrification in areas where electricity costs are high relative to gas. Site energy, source energy, or carbon metrics can better align with policy goals. The appendix also includes: * Methodology for calculating custom BPFs using local energy costs or conversion factors * Sample amendment language showing how jurisdictions would adopt alternate metrics *** ### Addenda ck & cp: Renewable Energy Requirements #### New Prescriptive Requirement (Section 10.5.1.1) **2022 requires on-site renewable energy:** > Not less than 0.50 W/ft² (5.4 W/m²) multiplied by the sum of the gross conditioned floor area for all floors up to the three largest floors #### Impact on Performance Paths | Path | 2019 | 2022 | | -------- | -------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | | **ECBM** | 5% limit on renewable trade-offs | 5% limit **in excess of required amount** | | **PRM** | No specific treatment | PCIt equation modified with PRE term; baseline has no renewables | #### PRM PCIt Formula Change ``` 2019: PCIt = (BBUEC + BPF × BBREC) / BBP 2022: PCIt = (BBUEC + BPF × BBREC − PRE) / BBP ``` Where PRE caps renewable credit at 5% above prescriptive requirement. **Translation:** You can't just slap a huge PV array on a mediocre building and call it compliant. The building itself still needs to perform. *** ### Addendum u: ECBM Economizer and HVAC System Changes #### Economizer Type Simplification | 2019 | 2022 | | ----------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------- | | Budget economizer type = same as proposed | **Budget always uses air economizers** | **Why:** Fluid economizers are complicated to model. Air economizers are straightforward. This also clarifies what to do when the proposed design has no economizer at all. #### Equipment Capacity Methodology (New Section 12.5.2.i) Added clear rules for determining budget equipment capacities when thermal blocks are combined: | Budget System Type | Capacity Basis | | -------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- | | Types 8 and 10 | 9,000 Btu/h (2.6 kW) | | Types 5, 6, 7, 9, 11 | Thermal block load ÷ number of combined HVAC zones | | Types 1, 2, 3, 4 | Total load of all thermal blocks ÷ total number of HVAC systems | *** ### Addendum ab: PRM Baseline System Selection Clarifications The baseline HVAC system selection process was clarified with a step-by-step methodology: #### Step 1: Residential Spaces All residential spaces, regardless of building size, use **System Type 1 or 2** (based on climate zone). #### Step 2: Nonresidential Spaces on Residential Floors Corridors, storage, restrooms, lounges, offices that primarily serve residents and are on floors where majority is residential → **System Types 3 or 4** #### Step 3: Baseline System Selection Process 1. Calculate combined floor area of conditioned + semi-heated floors by building area type 2. Identify predominant nonresidential building area type (largest floor area) 3. Any building area type < 20,000 ft² (1,858 m²) → treated as part of predominant type 4. Assign baseline systems for residential, predominant, and any other types > 20,000 ft² 5. Apply zone-specific modifications based on criteria in new section *** ### Addendum co: PRM Retrofits (NEW Section G3.3) Prior to 2022, PRM didn't distinguish between new construction and retrofits, which created situations where PRM was more stringent for retrofits than other compliance paths. The fix: #### Substantial Alterations (per Section G3.1.4(a)) | Requirement | Value | | ----------------- | ------------------------------- | | BPF Adjustment | Table 4.2.1.1 value × **1.05** | | Modeling approach | Standard Appendix G methodology | #### Limited Alterations (NEW Section G3.3) | Requirement | Value | | -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | BPF | **1.0** | | Proposed model | New/retrofitted systems per design docs; existing systems per existing conditions | | Baseline model | Same as proposed, except retrofit scope items modeled at minimum prescriptive compliance | #### Mixed Projects (Existing Building + Addition) BPF = area-weighted average of: * Existing building BPF (per Section 4.2.1.3) * Addition BPF (from Table 4.2.1.1) *** ### Addendum cr: Envelope Backstop (NEW G1.2.1) This addresses the concern that weak envelopes can permanently limit building performance because envelope retrofits are expensive and unlikely. #### New Requirement for Performance Paths For new buildings, one of the following must be met: **Option 1:** Envelope complies prescriptively with Section 5.5 **Option 2:** Using Section 5.6 (Envelope Trade-Off), the proposed envelope performance factor shall not exceed the base envelope performance factor by more than: | Building Type | Maximum Exceedance | | ----------------------------------- | --------------------- | | Multifamily, Hotel/Motel, Dormitory | **15%** | | All other building types | **7%** | | Mixed occupancies | Area-weighted average | **Calculation method:** Uses COMcheck software per Appendix C methodology. **Why this matters:** You can no longer trade away envelope performance for efficient HVAC and lighting. The envelope has to be at least reasonably close to prescriptive requirements. *** ### Addendum av: Thermal Bridging Specifies how thermal bridges are modeled in baseline and proposed designs. (See Thermal Bridging section in Part 3 for details.) *** ### Addendum t: Envelope Air Leakage Specifies requirements for simulating envelope air leakage in both baseline and proposed buildings, including the change from single test method to multiple options: | 2019 | 2022 | | -------------- | ------------------------------ | | ASTM E779 only | ASTM E779, E1827, **or E3158** | *** ### Other Notable Addenda (Quick Reference) #### PRM-Specific

Addendum	Change
db	Clarifies base space conditioning categories
h	Clarifies area-weighted BPF procedure for mixed-use buildings
l	Clarifies baseline fenestration apportionment
aa	Fixes SI inconsistencies for fan power
aj	Linear interpolation for transformer efficiency between size ranges
an	Consolidates fan system operation requirements
bt	Baseline CW/HW pumps run only when load exists
cq	"Water-cooled" → "fluid-cooled" terminology
da	Aligns PRM documentation requirements with ECBM
i	Exception from baseline energy recovery for labs with exhaust > 15,000 cfm
w	Baseline chillers sized on peak coincident load
ct	Clarifies WWR determination; baseline excludes automatic shading

#### ECBM-Specific

Addendum	Change
bh	Updates PV temperature coefficient for PVWatts consistency
cs	Baseline high-capacity gas boilers and SWH must meet prescriptive requirements
k	No baseline fan power credit for energy recovery when not in baseline
s	Solar reflectance requirements for baseline walls

#### Both ECBM and PRM

Addendum	Change
be	Updates Standard 140 required testing for simulation programs
bg	Expands applicability to building sites and properties
bu	Informative note recommending ASHRAE Standard 209
v	Clarifies documentation (including simulation files) to AHJ
ad	Renumbers reference sections for consistency

*** ## PART 5: COMPLETE EXCEPTIONS COMPARISON This section lists ALL exceptions from both the 2019 and 2022 editions of Appendix G, organized by section number. *** ### Exception to G1.2.2 - Performance Rating Calculation | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------------------- | ------------------- | ----------- | | Exception to G1.2.2 | Exception to G1.2.2 | 🟡 MODIFIED | **2019:** > Energy used to recharge or refuel vehicles that are used for **off-building site** transportation purposes shall not be modeled in the baseline building performance or the proposed building performance. **2022:** > Energy used to recharge or refuel vehicles that are used for **off-site** transportation purposes shall not be modeled in the baseline building performance or the proposed building performance. **Change:** Minor wording change from "off-building site" to "off-site" *** ### Table G3.1 Exceptions - Design Model (Proposed Building) #### Exception - Heating Only Systems | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------------------- | ---------------- | ----------- | | In Table G3.1, No. 1 | In Table G3.1(1) | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > Spaces designed with heating only systems serving storage rooms, stairwells, vestibules, electrical/mechanical rooms, and restrooms not exhausting or transferring air from mechanically cooled thermal zones in the proposed design shall not be modeled with mechanical cooling. *** #### Exception - Space Use Classification | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------------------- | ---------------- | ----------- | | In Table G3.1, No. 3 | In Table G3.1(3) | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > Where space types neither exist nor are designated in design documents, use type shall be specified in accordance with Section 9.5.1 *** ### Table G3.1 Exceptions - Schedules (Baseline Building) #### Exceptions 1-3 for Schedules | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------------- | -------------- | ----------- | | Exceptions 1-3 | Exceptions 1-3 | ⚪ IDENTICAL | **Exception 1:** Set points and schedules for HVAC systems that automatically provide occupant thermal comfort via means other than directly controlling the air dry-bulb and wet-bulb temperature may be allowed to differ, provided that equivalent levels of occupant thermal comfort are demonstrated via the methodology in ASHRAE Standard 55, Section 5.3.3, "Elevated Air Speed," or Standard 55, Appendix B. **Exception 2:** Schedules may be allowed to differ between proposed design and baseline building design when necessary to model non-standard efficiency measures, provided that the revised schedules have been approved by the rating authority. **Exception 3:** HVAC system fan schedules may be allowed to differ when Section G3.2.1.2(a) applies. *(Note: 2019 referenced G3.1.1(b); 2022 references G3.2.1.2(a))* *** ### Table G3.1 Exceptions - Building Envelope #### Exceptions - Building Elements Permitted to Differ from Drawings | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------------------- | ---------------- | ----------- | | In Table G3.1, No. 5 | In Table G3.1(5) | 🟡 MODIFIED | **2019 Exceptions allowed:** * Exterior surfaces whose azimuth orientation and tilt differ by less than 45 degrees * Roof surface modeling with aged solar reflectance **2022 Exceptions (EXPANDED):** * **NEW:** Each linear thermal bridge and point thermal bridge as identified in Section 5.5.5 shall be modeled using either: * A separate model of the assembly within the energy simulation model * Adjustment of the clear-field U-factor in accordance with Section A10.2 * **NEW:** Each uninsulated assembly not identified in Section 5.5.5 shall be modeled using specified techniques * **NEW:** Any other building envelope assembly not subject to Section 5.5.5 that covers less than 5% of total area * Exterior surfaces whose azimuth orientation and tilt differ by less than 45 degrees * Roof surface modeling with aged solar reflectance *** #### Exception - Air Leakage Testing | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------------------- | ---------------- | ----------- | | In Table G3.1, No. 5 | In Table G3.1(5) | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > When whole-building air leakage testing, in accordance with Section 5.4.3.1.1, is specified during design and completed after construction, the proposed design air leakage rate of the building envelope shall be as measured. *** #### Exceptions - Baseline Building Orientation | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------------------- | ---------------- | ----------- | | In Table G3.1, No. 5 | In Table G3.1(5) | ⚪ IDENTICAL | **Exception 1:** If it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the rating authority that the building orientation is dictated by site considerations. **Exception 2:** Buildings where the vertical fenestration area on each orientation varies by less than 5%. *** #### Exception - Semiheated Space Conditioning 🟢 NEW in 2022 | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ---------------- | ------ | | — | In Table G3.1(5) | 🟢 NEW | **2022:** > Envelope components of the HVAC zones that are semiheated in the proposed design must meet conditioned envelope requirements in Tables G3.4-1 through G3.4-8 if, based on the sizing runs, these zones are served by a baseline system with sensible cooling output capacity ≥15 W/m² of floor area, or with heating output capacity greater than or equal to the criteria in Table G3.4-9, or that are indirectly conditioned spaces. *** ### Table G3.1 Exceptions - Lighting #### Exception - Lighting Power Reduction | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------------------- | ---------------- | ----------- | | In Table G3.1, No. 6 | In Table G3.1(6) | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > Lighting use can be reduced for the portion of the space illuminated by the specified fixtures provided that they maintain the same illuminance level as in the baseline. Such reduction shall be demonstrated by calculations. *** ### Table G3.1 Exceptions - Thermal Blocks #### Exceptions - Combining HVAC Zones | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | -------------------- | ---------------- | ----------- | | In Table G3.1, No. 8 | In Table G3.1(8) | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > Different HVAC zones may be combined to create a single thermal block or identical thermal blocks to which multipliers are applied, provided that all of the following conditions are met: > > * All HVAC zones in the thermal block that are adjacent to glazed exterior walls face the same orientation or their orientations vary by less than 45 degrees > * All HVAC zones in the thermal block have the same thermostat setpoints or maximum 1.1°C difference > * All HVAC zones are served by the same system or by systems of the same type *** ### Table G3.1 Exceptions - HVAC Systems #### Exception - Baseline HVAC System Types 9 and 10 | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | ----------------- | ----------- | | In Table G3.1, No. 10 | In Table G3.1(10) | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > Spaces using baseline HVAC system types 9 and 10. *(Exception to cooling system requirements)* *** #### Exception - Humidification System | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | ----------------- | ----------- | | In Table G3.1, No. 10 | In Table G3.1(10) | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > If the proposed building humidification system complies with Section 6.5.2.4 then the baseline building design shall use nonadiabatic humidification. *** #### Exception - Natural Gas Not Available | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | ----------------- | ----------- | | In Table G3.1, No. 10 | In Table G3.1(10) | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > For fossil fuel systems where natural gas is not available for the proposed building site as determined by the rating authority, the baseline HVAC systems shall be modeled using propane as their fuel. *** #### Exception - Chiller Part-Load Performance 🟢 NEW in 2022 | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ----------------- | ------ | | — | In Table G3.1(10) | 🟢 NEW | **2022:** > Exception to (a) and (b): Where part-load performance of chillers in the proposed design is not available, and design temperature across the condenser is 5.56°C, the performance curves in Normative Appendix L, as referenced in Table J-1, shall be modeled for the specified chiller. When using performance curves from Normative Appendix L, chiller minimum part-load ratio and minimum compressor unloading ratio shall be equal to 0.25. *** #### Exception - Condenser Heat Recovery | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | ----------------- | ----------- | | In Table G3.1, No. 10 | In Table G3.1(10) | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > If a condenser heat recovery system meeting the requirements described in Section 6.5.6.2 cannot be modeled, the requirement for including such a system in the actual building shall be met as a prescriptive requirement in accordance with Section 6.5.6.2, and no heat recovery system shall be included in the proposed design or baseline building design. *** ### Table G3.1 Exceptions - Service Water Heating #### Exceptions - SWH System Types | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | ----------------- | ----------- | | In Table G3.1, No. 11 | In Table G3.1(11) | ⚪ IDENTICAL | Multiple exceptions for service water heating system configurations based on fuel availability and system types. #### Exception - Natural Gas Not Available for SWH | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------------- | ---------------- | ----------- | | Exception to (h) | Exception to (h) | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > Where natural gas is not available for the proposed building site, as determined by the rating authority, gas storage water heaters shall be modeled using propane as their fuel. *** ### Table G3.1 Exceptions - Receptacle and Process Loads #### Exception - Receptacle Controls | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | ----------------- | ----------- | | In Table G3.1, No. 12 | In Table G3.1(12) | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > When receptacle controls installed in spaces where not required by Section 8.4.2 are included in the proposed building design, the hourly receptacle shall be reduced as follows: 10% for the first level of control and 15% additional for the second. *** #### Exception - Process Loads Variations | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | ----------------- | ----------- | | In Table G3.1, No. 12 | In Table G3.1(12) | ⚪ IDENTICAL | > When quantifying performance that exceeds the requirements of Standard 90.1 (but not when using the Performance Rating Method as an alternative path for minimum standard compliance per Section 4.2.1.1) variations of the power requirements, schedules, or control sequences of the equipment modeled in the baseline building design from those in the proposed design shall be approved by the rating authority... *** ### Exception to G3.1.1.4 / G3.2.1.7 - Building Envelope Air Leakage | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | ---------------------- | ------------- | | Exception to G3.1.1.4 | Exceptions to G3.2.1.7 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | > A multizone airflow model alternative method to modeling building envelope air leakage may be used, provided the following criteria are met: > > * Where the calculations are made independently of the energy simulation program, the proposed method must comply with Section G2.5. > * The method for converting the air leakage rate of the building envelope at 75 Pa, to the appropriate units for the simulation program is fully documented and submitted to the rating authority for approval. *** ### Exception to G3.1.2.2.1 / G3.2.2.2.1 - Sizing Runs | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ----------------------- | ----------------------- | ------------- | | Exception to G3.1.2.2.1 | Exception to G3.2.2.2.1 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | > For cooling sizing runs in residential dwelling units, the infiltration, occupants, lighting, gas and electricity using equipment hourly schedule shall be the same as the most used hourly weekday schedule from the annual simulation. *** ### Exception to G3.1.2.4 / G3.2.2.4 - Fan System Operation | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | ---------------------- | ------------- | | Exception to G3.1.2.4 | Exceptions to G3.2.2.4 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | > For Systems 6 and 8, only the terminal-unit fan and reheat coil shall be energized to meet heating set point during unoccupied hours. **2022 adds additional exception:** > For baseline systems serving only laboratory spaces that are prohibited from recirculating return air by code or accreditation standards, the baseline system shall be modeled as 100% outdoor air. *** ### Exception to G3.1.2.5 / G3.2.2.4 - Ventilation | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | ---------------------- | ------------- | | Exception to G3.1.2.5 | Exceptions to G3.2.2.4 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | **Exception (a):** When modeling demand control ventilation in the proposed design in systems with outdoor air capacity ≤1400 L/s serving areas with an average design capacity of 100 people per 93 m² or less. **Exception (b):** When designing systems in accordance with Standard 62.1, Section 6.2, "Ventilation Rate Procedure," reduced ventilation airflow rates may be calculated for each HVAC zone in the proposed design with a zone air distribution effectiveness (Ez) > 1.0. *** ### Exception to G3.1.2.6 / G3.2.2.5 - Economizers | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | ---------------------- | ------------- | | Exception to G3.1.2.6 | Exceptions to G3.2.2.5 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | Economizers shall not be included for systems meeting one or more of the following: | Exception | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ------------------------------------------------ | ---- | ---- | ----------- | | Gas-phase air cleaning (Std 62.1, Section 6.1.2) | ✓ | ✓ | ⚪ IDENTICAL | | Supermarket open refrigerated casework | ✓ | ✓ | ⚪ IDENTICAL | | Computer rooms (Section G3.1.2.6.1 / G3.2.2.5.1) | ✓ | ✓ | ⚪ IDENTICAL | *** ### Exceptions to G3.1.2.8.1 / G3.2.2.7.1 - Supply Air Temperature (Systems 1-8, 11-13) | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ----------------------- | ------------------------ | ------------- | | Exception to G3.1.2.8.1 | Exceptions to G3.2.2.7.1 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | **Exception (a):** For systems serving laboratory spaces, airflow rate shall be based on a supply-air-to-room temperature set-point difference of 9°C or the required ventilation air or makeup air, whichever is greater. **Exception (b):** If the proposed design HVAC system airflow rate based on latent loads is greater than the design airflow rate based on sensible loads, then the same supply-air-to-room-air humidity ratio difference (gr/kg) used to calculate the proposed design airflow shall be used to calculate design airflow rates for the baseline building design. *** ### Exception to G3.1.2.10 / G3.2.2.9 - Exhaust Air Energy Recovery | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------------------- | ---------------------- | ----------- | | Exception to G3.1.2.10 | Exceptions to G3.2.2.9 | 🟡 MODIFIED | If any of these exceptions apply, exhaust air energy recovery shall not be included in the baseline building design: | Exception | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------------------------------------------------------- | ---- | ---- | ----------- | | Spaces not cooled, heated <16°C | ✓ | ✓ | ⚪ IDENTICAL | | Toxic, flammable, corrosive fumes | ✓ | ✓ | ⚪ IDENTICAL | | Commercial kitchen hoods (Type 1) | ✓ | ✓ | ⚪ IDENTICAL | | Heating systems CZ 0-3 | ✓ | ✓ | ⚪ IDENTICAL | | Cooling systems CZ 3C, 4C, 5B, 5C, 6B, 7, 8 | ✓ | ✓ | ⚪ IDENTICAL | | **Largest exhaust <75% of outdoor airflow** | — | ✓ | 🟢 **NEW** | | Systems with dehumidification using series energy recovery | ✓ | ✓ | ⚪ IDENTICAL | *** ### Exception to G3.1.3.4 / G3.2.3.4 - Hot-Water Supply Temperature Reset | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | --------------------- | ------------- | | Exception to G3.1.3.4 | Exception to G3.2.3.4 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | > Systems served by purchased heat. *** ### Exception to G3.1.3.5 / G3.2.3.5 - Hot-Water Pumps | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | --------------------- | ------------- | | Exception to G3.1.3.5 | Exception to G3.2.3.5 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | > The pump power for systems using purchased heat shall be 220 W·s/L. *** ### Exception to G3.1.3.7 / G3.2.3.7 - Type and Number of Chillers | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | --------------------- | ------------- | | Exception to G3.1.3.7 | Exception to G3.2.3.7 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | > Systems using purchased chilled water shall be modeled in accordance with Section G3.1.1.3 / G3.2.1.6. *** ### Exception to G3.1.3.9 / G3.2.3.9 - Chilled-Water Supply Temperature Reset | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | --------------------- | --------------------- | ------------- | | Exception to G3.1.3.9 | Exception to G3.2.3.9 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | **Exception (a):** If the baseline chilled-water system serves a computer room HVAC system, the supply chilled-water temperature shall be reset higher based on the HVAC system requiring the most cooling. The maximum reset chilled-water supply temperature shall be 12°C. **Exception (b):** Systems served by purchased chilled water. *** ### Exception to G3.1.3.10 / G3.2.3.10 - Chilled-Water Pumps | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------------------- | ---------------------- | ------------- | | Exception to G3.1.3.10 | Exception to G3.2.3.10 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | > For systems using purchased chilled water, the building distribution pump shall be modeled with variable-speed drive, a minimum flow of 25% of the design flow rate, and a pump power of 250 kW/1000 L/s. *** ### Exception to G3.1.3.13 / G3.2.3.13 - VAV Minimum Flow Set Points | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---------------------- | ---------------------- | ------------- | | Exception to G3.1.3.13 | Exception to G3.2.3.13 | 🔵 RENUMBERED | > Systems serving laboratory spaces shall reduce the exhaust and makeup air volume during unoccupied periods to the largest of 50% of zone peak airflow, the minimum outdoor airflow rate, or the airflow rate required to comply with applicable codes or accreditation standards. *** ### Exception to G3.2.1.3 - Baseline System Grouping 🟢 NEW in 2022 | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | --------------------- | ------ | | — | Exception to G3.2.1.3 | 🟢 NEW | > Baseline system 5 or 7 serving laboratory spaces in accordance with Section G3.2.1.2(b) shall be modeled as a single system serving all laboratory HVAC zones regardless of floor. *** ### G3.3 Exceptions - Alterations (Other Than Substantial) 🟢 ALL NEW in 2022 #### Exception to G3.3.2.8(a) - HVAC System Types | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ------------------------ | ------ | | — | Exception to G3.3.2.8(a) | 🟢 NEW | > If the proposed design includes variable refrigerant flow heat pumps or single-zone systems with electric resistance heat, then air source heat pumps shall be used in the baseline design. *** #### Exception to G3.3.2.8(d) - Fan Power for Energy Recovery | 2019 | 2022 | Status | | ---- | ------------------------ | ------ | | — | Exception to G3.3.2.8(d) | 🟢 NEW | > When a proposed design includes energy recovery but it is not required in the baseline building design per Section 6.5.6, the fan power of the baseline system shall be equal to either the proposed design system or the fan power limit in Section 6.5.3.1 calculated without fan power credit for energy recovery, whichever is less. *** ### Summary of Exceptions Changes | Category | 2019 Count | 2022 Count | Change | | ----------------------------------------- | ---------- | ---------- | ------ | | **Formal "Exception to G#.#.#" sections** | 14 | 17 | +3 | | **Table G3.1 inline exceptions** | \~25 | \~28 | +3 | | **G3.3 Alterations exceptions** | 0 | 2 | +2 | | **Total approximate** | \~39 | \~47 | +8 | #### New Exceptions in 2022: 1. **Exception to G3.2.1.3** - Laboratory baseline system grouping 2. **Exception to G3.3.2.8(a)** - VRF/electric resistance → heat pump baseline 3. **Exception to G3.3.2.8(d)** - Fan power for energy recovery in alterations 4. **Chiller part-load performance** exception (Table G3.1) 5. **Semiheated space conditioning** exception (Table G3.1) 6. **Largest exhaust <75% of outdoor airflow** (exhaust air energy recovery) 7. **100% outdoor air for laboratory spaces** (fan system operation) 8. **Thermal bridging modeling** exceptions (Table G3.1, Building Envelope) # Is Your Free Software Costing You More Than You Think? Free software has a certain appeal. Zero dollars upfront, no purchase order approval process, and you can start using it immediately. In 2026, you've got even more options: legacy free tools that have been around forever, open-source alternatives to everything, and now AI assistants that'll cheerfully generate building energy models if you ask them nicely enough. But here's the thing about free. It's never actually free. ### The Spreadsheet Tax You know the drill. Someone on the team downloaded a free tool, got reasonably far with it, hit a wall, and now there's a spreadsheet. Actually, there are three spreadsheets. One converts the output format into something useful. Another reconciles differences between what the tool calculates and what the compliance documentation actually requires. The third tracks which version of which file is current because the free tool's project management features are, well, non-existent. Those spreadsheets represent hours. Multiply those hours by your team's hourly rate, and suddenly "free" has a price tag. And that's before anyone goes on leave and nobody else can decipher the formulas. ### The AI Experiment Let's talk about the elephant in the room. In 2026, plenty of people are experimenting with ChatGPT, Claude, or whatever's flavour of the month for building performance tasks. "Just describe your building and it'll spit out an energy model!" Sounds efficient. Except AI doesn't do building physics. It does plausible-sounding text. It can format things nicely, suggest approaches, even write scripts. What it can't do is guarantee that the thermal bridging calculation it just confidently explained actually complies with NCC 2022 Section J. Or that the daylight factor it calculated won't get torn apart in peer review. You still need to check everything. Validate the assumptions. Cross-reference the standards. Make sure the outputs aren't just convincing-looking nonsense. So now you're doing the work twice: once to prompt the AI, once to verify it didn't hallucinate the thermal properties of concrete. ### Support Is a Feature, Actually Free software doesn't come with free support. That's not a criticism, it's just how it works. When something breaks, or you can't figure out how to model a particular construction detail, or the output file won't import into the documentation template, you're on your own. You'll search forums. Read documentation that was last updated in 2019. Post questions and wait. Maybe someone responds, maybe they don't. Meanwhile, your deadline hasn't moved. Commercial software has support because people pay for it. When you hit a problem at 4pm on a Friday and the report's due Monday, that support suddenly doesn't feel like overhead. It feels like a lifeboat. ### The Integration Problem Free tools tend to exist in isolation. They do one thing, sometimes reasonably or even very well, but they don't play nicely with the rest of your workflow. So you're exporting files, converting formats, manually transferring data between platforms. Each interface is an opportunity for errors. Each manual transfer is time that could be spent on actual design work. Each workaround is technical debt that someone will have to maintain. And when you do want to upgrade to something more integrated? Good luck migrating that project library you've built up over the years. File formats don't magically translate. Templates don't transfer. You're starting from scratch, except now you're also maintaining the old system until everything's migrated. ### Scale Costs Money, One Way or Another Free tools are brilliant for learning. They're often fine for one-off projects or simple cases. They fall apart at scale. Maybe it's the lack of project templates. Maybe it's the absence of batch processing. Maybe it's just that running everything locally means you're tied to whatever machine has the software installed, and good luck collaborating with the team. You can work around these limitations. People do it all the time. But those workarounds have costs. Time costs. Coordination costs. The cost of that one person who knows how to make everything work and becomes a bottleneck because nobody else wants to learn the arcane process. ### What Are You Actually Paying For? The question isn't whether free software costs money. Everything costs money, even if it's just time and frustration. The question is whether you're paying those costs deliberately or accidentally. Better Building's [**total cost of ownership calculator**](https://betterbuilding.io/is-you-free-software-costing-you-more-than-you-think) breaks this down properly. License fees are one line item. But onboarding time? That's real money. Project setup and management? More money. IT infrastructure to run desktop software? Also money. Support requests that go unanswered? Opportunity cost, which is the most expensive kind. When you add it up, "free" often costs more than the premium option. Not always. Sometimes free tools are legitimately the right choice. But not because they're free. ### The Real Calculation Before you commit to any platform, free or paid, run the actual numbers. How many hours will your team spend learning it? How much time goes into workarounds? What's the cost of delayed projects while you troubleshoot issues? What's your time worth when you're manually doing what an integrated platform would automate? The software market in 2026 has more options than ever. Some are good. Some are free. Some are both. But "free" by itself isn't a feature. It's just the absence of an upfront cost, and upfront costs are usually the smallest part of the equation. Your time is finite. Your deadlines are real. Your projects need to be right, not just convincingly formatted. Choose accordingly. # HVAC System Replication: IESVE vs. OpenStudio vs. EnergyPlus and eQUEST When you're modelling a building with dozens of similar zones served by nearly identical HVAC systems, you face a choice. Replicate everything manually, or use whatever shortcuts your software provides. Unfortunately, none of the major energy modelling platforms agree on what those shortcuts should look like. ### IESVE: Multiplexing In ApacheHVAC, multiplexing is visual compression. You design one HVAC network diagram with all its components, controllers, and connections. Then you draw a box around the portion that repeats across multiple zones and tell the software how many times to replicate it. That single diagram now represents 20, 50, or 200 nearly identical systems. The interface collapses these into "layers." Each layer connects to a different thermal zone, but they all share the same topology. One fan coil unit on screen, 40 in the simulation. Changes propagate to all layers by default, though you can selectively edit subsets when needed. The "Assign from Room Group" feature speeds things up. Select a group of similar zones, and IESVE creates a multiplex layer for each one automatically. For buildings where HVAC follows clear patterns, this cuts model setup time by hours. There are rules. You can't multiplex components that wouldn't make sense to replicate (single chillers serving multiple systems). Controllers inside a multiplex need to point to the same node across layers, which matters more than it sounds when you're troubleshooting over-constrained flow errors. ### OpenStudio and EnergyPlus: No Multiplexing OpenStudio doesn't have multiplexing. If you need 40 fan coil units, you're adding 40 fan coil units. The interface uses a visual loop editor where you drag components onto supply and demand sides. You can drag multiple zones onto a single air loop's splitter, which works for VAV systems serving many zones. But for zone-level systems like PTACs or fan coils, you're doing it all manually. System templates exist (packaged rooftop units, VAV with reheat, water source heat pumps), but they still result in discrete systems needing individual attention. Some users work around this with API scripts or OpenStudio Measures, but that's code management on top of energy modelling. EnergyPlus, the simulation engine behind OpenStudio and Better Building, has zone multipliers, but they're not equivalent to IESVE's multiplexing. Zone multipliers are designed for multi-storey buildings with identical floors. You model a typical floor, apply a multiplier, and the simulation multiplies the loads. If you've got a 10-storey building where floors 2 through 9 are identical, model one floor with a multiplier of 8. This saves geometry and speeds up simulation, but the constraints are strict. Shading must be identical. No interzone surfaces between multiplied zones. Position the multiplied floor halfway between top and ground because exterior convection coefficients change with height. The critical difference is that you're multiplying thermal zones, not HVAC configurations. Each zone still needs its equipment defined in the model. Five zones with fan coils means five fan coil objects in the IDF file. The multiplier just tells the simulation engine to multiply the loads. You're not compressing HVAC system configuration into a single editable diagram. ### eQUEST: Wizard-Based Replication eQUEST's Design Development wizard asks you to specify "systems per zone," "systems per floor," "systems per shell," or "systems per building." Select "systems per floor" for a packaged rooftop system in a three-storey building, and eQUEST creates three systems automatically. Less flexible than IESVE's multiplexing, more automated than OpenStudio's manual approach. The wizard handles replication, you end up with multiple discrete systems in the model tree. Assignment is relatively coarse. The "Zone Groups" feature (screen 14 of the shell editor) lets you specify which zones belong to which system. This works when systems follow predictable patterns like perimeter vs core. When the pattern is irregular, you're reassigning zones to different parent systems in the detailed interface. Each zone has a parent system field you can change, but you're doing it one zone at a time. The "system per site" option gives you exactly one system. Straightforward, but if you later need multiple systems, you're going back to the wizard or creating new systems manually. ### Why This Matters? For initial setup, IESVE's multiplexing saves hours on large buildings with repetitive systems. OpenStudio requires adding each system individually. EnergyPlus zone multipliers help with truly identical floors, but you're still defining all HVAC systems manually. eQUEST's wizard automates some replication, but expect cleanup work in detailed mode. For maintenance, IESVE's global editing mode is unmatched. Change fan speed in one multiplex layer, it changes for all of them. In OpenStudio, changing 40 identical systems means editing 40 systems. EnergyPlus zone multipliers don't help because they multiply loads, not configurations. eQUEST requires manual changes to each system unless components happen to be defined once and referenced multiple times. The flip side is that multiplexing can hide mistakes. Misconfigure the base layer, that error propagates everywhere. You might not notice until you're troubleshooting results and realise 40 systems are wrong the same way. OpenStudio's lack of abstraction means errors are usually obvious because you see them repeated across the interface. ### Which Approach Works? If you're modelling large commercial buildings where every floor has 10 to 20 similar zones with nearly identical systems, IESVE's multiplexing is worth learning. The time savings are real, especially when changes happen late in design. For smaller buildings, or buildings where each system is meaningfully different, OpenStudio's manual approach isn't particularly painful. The interface is clean, system templates are solid, and transparency helps you understand what's happening in the simulation. eQUEST is reasonable if you're in the DOE-2 ecosystem and want some automation without multiplexing complexity. Just be ready for detailed interface cleanup. The real question isn't which approach is objectively better. It's which one matches your workflow and the buildings you typically model. # Understanding ASHRAE 90.1's Performance Threshold

When you're using Appendix G to demonstrate code compliance in ASHRAE 90.1-2019, PCIt is the number you need to beat. It's the Performance Cost Index Target, the threshold that determines whether your building is efficient enough to pass. The formula looks like this: **PCIt = \[BBUEC + (BPF × BBREC)] / BBP** That's not particularly illuminating on its own, so let's break down what these terms actually mean and why they're structured this way. ### The Components **BBUEC** is your baseline building's unregulated energy cost. Unregulated energy is everything the code doesn't directly control: elevators, commercial kitchen equipment, medical devices, datacenter loads, that sort of thing. ASHRAE doesn't care what compressor you spec for a walk-in freezer, but the energy it uses still gets counted in the overall budget. **BBREC** is the baseline building's regulated energy cost. This is the stuff ASHRAE does regulate: HVAC systems, lighting, service water heating, and similar building systems. The things the standard was actually written to address. **BBP** is baseline building performance, which is just the total annual energy cost of your baseline building design. This is your reference point. **BPF** is where it gets interesting. The building performance factor comes from Table 4.2.1.1 and varies by building type and climate zone. A school in climate zone 0A gets a BPF of 0.39. A warehouse in climate zone 8 gets 0.57. The lower the number, the tighter the performance requirement. This makes sense when you think about it. Schools have relatively predictable schedules and loads, so the standard expects better performance from them. Hospitals run 24/7 with specialized equipment that draws power regardless of how good your envelope is, so they get more leeway. Though "leeway" is relative when we're talking about energy code compliance. If your building has multiple use types, you calculate an area-weighted average of the BPFs. For anything not explicitly listed in the table, you use "All others," which ranges from 0.50 to 0.57 depending on climate. ### Building Performance Factors by Type and Climate Here's the full BPF table from the standard: | Building Area Type | 0A/1A | 0B/1B | 2A | 2B | 3A | 3B | 3C | 4A | 4B | 4C | 5A | 5B | 5C | 6A | 6B | 7 | 8 | | ------------------- | ----- | ----- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | ---- | | Multifamily | 0.68 | 0.70 | 0.66 | 0.66 | 0.69 | 0.68 | 0.59 | 0.74 | 0.76 | 0.74 | 0.70 | 0.73 | 0.75 | 0.68 | 0.71 | 0.68 | 0.72 | | Healthcare/hospital | 0.60 | 0.60 | 0.58 | 0.54 | 0.56 | 0.55 | 0.55 | 0.55 | 0.54 | 0.54 | 0.57 | 0.52 | 0.54 | 0.57 | 0.52 | 0.57 | 0.57 | | Hotel/motel | 0.55 | 0.53 | 0.53 | 0.52 | 0.53 | 0.54 | 0.54 | 0.53 | 0.53 | 0.52 | 0.50 | 0.51 | 0.51 | 0.50 | 0.51 | 0.50 | 0.50 | | Office | 0.52 | 0.57 | 0.50 | 0.56 | 0.53 | 0.56 | 0.48 | 0.51 | 0.52 | 0.49 | 0.51 | 0.51 | 0.49 | 0.52 | 0.51 | 0.49 | 0.51 | | Restaurant | 0.63 | 0.64 | 0.60 | 0.60 | 0.60 | 0.61 | 0.58 | 0.62 | 0.57 | 0.61 | 0.63 | 0.60 | 0.64 | 0.65 | 0.62 | 0.67 | 0.70 | | Retail | 0.51 | 0.54 | 0.49 | 0.55 | 0.51 | 0.55 | 0.53 | 0.51 | 0.55 | 0.54 | 0.50 | 0.54 | 0.55 | 0.50 | 0.51 | 0.48 | 0.50 | | School | 0.39 | 0.47 | 0.38 | 0.43 | 0.38 | 0.42 | 0.40 | 0.37 | 0.40 | 0.38 | 0.36 | 0.40 | 0.36 | 0.36 | 0.37 | 0.36 | 0.37 | | Warehouse | 0.38 | 0.42 | 0.40 | 0.42 | 0.43 | 0.44 | 0.43 | 0.44 | 0.43 | 0.46 | 0.49 | 0.47 | 0.48 | 0.54 | 0.51 | 0.57 | 0.57 | | All others | 0.56 | 0.57 | 0.50 | 0.52 | 0.50 | 0.54 | 0.53 | 0.53 | 0.52 | 0.54 | 0.51 | 0.51 | 0.50 | 0.50 | 0.50 | 0.50 | -- | Climate zones run from 0 (hottest) to 8 (coldest), with A/B/C subdivisions for humidity levels. The BPF values are calibrated so compliance represents roughly equivalent effort across these different contexts. A hospital in climate zone 0A and a hospital in climate zone 8 both show BPFs around 0.57 to 0.60, but the actual energy strategies needed to hit those targets look completely different. You'll notice schools are consistently the tightest, ranging from 0.36 to 0.47. Retail swings from 0.48 to 0.55. Multifamily is generally the most lenient, getting into the 0.68 to 0.76 range in some climate zones. Those nine categories don't cover everything you'll encounter in practice. What do you do with a vivarium? A sports complex? A manufacturing facility or data center? These don't map cleanly to the table, and "All others" ends up carrying a lot of weight. This matters because getting categorized wrong can shift your compliance threshold significantly. ### How It Works The formula takes your baseline building's unregulated energy cost and adds it to the regulated energy cost multiplied by that building-specific performance factor. Then you divide the whole thing by the baseline building performance to get your target. Your actual PCI (Performance Cost Index) uses the same formula structure but plugs in your proposed building's performance numbers instead. If your PCI is less than or equal to PCIt, you're in compliance. There's one complication worth noting. If you're generating more than 5% of your building's energy from on-site renewables (as a fraction of baseline building performance), an additional compliance check kicks in: **PCI + \[(PBPnre – PBP)/BBP] – 0.05 < PCIt** This prevents you from solar-paneling your way past mediocre envelope and mechanical design. The standard wants efficient buildings first, renewable energy second. You can't just throw photovoltaics at a poorly designed building and call it done. ### Calculating Regulated vs. Unregulated The standard requires you to calculate regulated energy cost by multiplying total energy cost by the ratio of regulated energy use to total energy use for each fuel type. Unregulated energy cost is just total energy cost minus regulated energy cost. This gets done separately for electricity, natural gas, and any other fuel sources, then summed up. It's not complicated math, but it does require tracking your energy use by end use and fuel type, which means your energy model needs to be properly detailed from the start. The BPF gets applied to adjust the regulated HVAC costs, effectively to account for unregulated loads in the calculation. For buildings where ventilation requirements or process loads dominate the energy profile, this adjustment can have significant impacts on your compliance margin. ### The Practical Impact In practice, PCIt determines how much performance headroom you have. A higher BPF means a higher target, which means your proposed building can use more energy and still comply. A lower BPF tightens the requirements. For projects using the performance path, this is the number that drives design decisions. You're constantly checking your PCI against PCIt as the design develops. Envelope improvements, mechanical system upgrades, lighting strategies all get evaluated based on whether they move your PCI in the right direction relative to this target. It's worth noting that this whole framework only applies when you're using Appendix G. The prescriptive path (Sections 5 through 10) and the Energy Cost Budget method (Section 11) have their own compliance approaches. But for larger or more complex buildings, Appendix G and its PCIt calculation is often the most practical route. The BPF values were derived from prototype building models developed by Pacific Northwest National Laboratory. These prototypes are simplified representations intended for large-scale portfolio analysis of building stock performance across different climate zones. The models were built in EnergyPlus and calibrated to represent typical construction and operation patterns for each building type. The system provides a consistent framework for performance-based compliance that accounts for the reality that buildings in different climates serving different purposes face different challenges. Whether you're working on a school in Phoenix or a hotel in Minneapolis, the BPF adjusts the compliance threshold to reflect what's actually achievable in that context. # ASHRAE 90.1-2019 Compliance Tools Are Here. And Yes, We Know Others Exist.

You can already do ASHRAE 90.1 compliance. Free tools exist. Paid tools exist. Expensive tools exist. EnergyPlus is open source and endlessly capable if you have the patience for it. People have been getting buildings compliant for years without us. So why build another solution and launch it ion 2026? Because there's a difference between "possible" and "efficient." And that difference is costing you time and $$$ on every project. Here comes the three minute justification! #### The Workflow Problem Nobody Solved Most modelling compliance workflows, regardless of what software you're running, follow the same pattern: choose a path (Section 11 or Appendix G), build the model, run the analysis, chase unmet hours and discover whether it works. If it doesn't, you loop back to the start with a different path. That loop is where weeks disappear. The diagram above tells a story. Traditional workflow: blind decision on day one, single-path modelling, discovery of non-compliance somewhere in day three or four, then a re-model using a different path. Total time: unknown. Risk level: high, because you're gambling that your initial guess was correct. This isn't a software problem. It's a workflow architecture problem. And most simulation tools, even good ones, don't address it. #### Parallel Compliance: Both Paths, Day One Better Building launches both ASHRAE 90.1 2019 Section 11 and Appendix G this month. We will kick off with Appendix G, then add Section 11 and then expand to ASHRAE 90.1 2022 in February with a specific interest in improving thermal bridging workflows. Our approach is different. We run both Section 11 and Appendix G simultaneously from a single model. You build once. The platform generates both compliance pathways and shows you the results side by side. We can even automate the reporting or let you do that bit yourself. On day one, you're not guessing. You're comparing. Section 11 showing a PCI of 0.92? Appendix G showing 12% improvement? Now you have data to choose the path that actually works for this building, not the path you hoped would work three weeks ago. The decision becomes data-driven instead of speculative. And because you're seeing both results on the same day you build the model, the entire compliance process compresses from weeks down to days or maybe even hours. That's at least 40% faster, with zero risk of the re-model loop. #### What That Means In $$$ Let's run a hypothetical. If your team runs 20 ASHRAE 90.1 projects a year and each one currently takes 1 week, you're spending 20 weeks of effort annually. Cut 40% off that 1 week per project and you're at 12 weeks per year. That's 320 hours of engineering time recovered. Even at conservative billing rates, you're looking at tens of thousands in recovered productivity for moderate users. For firms doing 50+ projects annually, the numbers quickly move into six figures. That's not software ROI math. That's actual capacity you get back. For those that love a good slider based on hypothetical scenarios, feel free to [check out our cost calculator.](https://betterbuilding.io/is-you-free-software-costing-you-more-than-you-think) #### The Platform Better Building is cloud-based, powered by EnergyPlus under the hood. No installation, no IT overhead, no hardware requirements beyond a browser. Baseline generation, reporting, and documentation are automated. The platform also handles NCC 2022, Green Star, CIBSE TM59, and NZ H1 if you're working across multiple markets. We're not claiming this makes ASHRAE 90.1 compliance simple in some absolute sense. The standard is detailed, buildings are complex. But the workflow shouldn't be the hard part. #### Try It 14-day free trial, 20-minute demo to get oriented. As we kick-off in January, for those interested in a complimentary detailed onboarding process worth $1000 USD, lock in your interest below. Lock in interest: Book a demo: [betterbuilding.io/book-a-demo](http://betterbuilding.io/book-a-demo) Start a trial: [betterbuilding.io/plans](http://betterbuilding.io/plans) # ASHRAE 90.1-2022 Thermal Bridging: What You Need to Know ASHRAE 90.1-2022 now requires you to account for thermal bridges, the weak spots in your building envelope where heat bypasses insulation. This isn't optional anymore. Whether you're using the prescriptive path, trading off envelope components, or running a full energy model, thermal bridging has to be part of the conversation. This guide gives you the big picture. For calculation details, see our Technical Reference. ### What Changed? Before 2022, energy models assumed your wall insulation connected perfectly to your roof insulation, which connected perfectly to your floor — no gaps, no shortcuts, no steel beams conducting heat straight through your carefully specified R-values. That was never true, and everyone knew it. But the standard didn't require you to account for it. Now it does. Section 5.5.5 introduced requirements for common thermal bridges like: * **Shelf angles** supporting brick cladding * **Floor slab edges** at building perimeters * **Balcony connections** penetrating the envelope * **Parapets** and roof-wall intersections * **Window perimeters** where frames meet walls These details have always mattered for actual building performance. The difference is that compliance now depends on addressing them. ### Why This Matters for Your Project Thermal bridges can account for significant heat loss through an otherwise well-insulated envelope. That's not a rounding error, it's the difference between a building that performs as designed and one that doesn't. Getting thermal bridging wrong affects: * **Energy costs** — Higher heating and cooling loads than predicted * **Comfort** — Cold spots, condensation risk, occupant complaints * **Compliance** — Failed inspections or performance shortfalls * **Liability** — Gaps between promised and delivered performance The good news: addressing thermal bridging early in design is straightforward. Addressing it late or discovering it during commissioning is expensive. ### A Word of Caution on Table Values The standard provides default Psi and Chi values in Table A10.1. These are useful for getting started, but they come with limitations you should understand. {% hint style="info" %} **Default values are conservative, sometimes very conservative.** They're designed to cover a wide range of construction types, which means they may significantly overestimate heat loss for your specific detail. This can push your envelope design toward more insulation than actually needed, adding cost without proportional benefit. {% endhint %} **When table values work well:** * Early feasibility studies * Simple buildings with standard details * Projects where envelope isn't a critical path item **When table values fall short:** * Complex building geometries * High-performance or passive house targets * Details that differ from standard assumptions * Projects where every R-value point matters for compliance If you're relying heavily on table values, you may be leaving performance (or budget) on the table. ### The Case for Thermal Bridging Modelling Detailed thermal modelling, using 2D or 3D finite element analysis, gives you actual Psi and Chi values for your specific details. This takes more effort upfront but pays off in several ways: **More accurate compliance.** You're demonstrating performance with your actual design, not a generic assumption. This matters when you're close to code thresholds. **Design optimisation.** Modelling lets you compare options: Does a thermal break at the shelf angle save enough to justify the cost? Is continuous insulation more effective than thicker cavity insulation? You can answer these questions with numbers instead of guesses. **Reduced risk.** When your energy model uses real thermal bridge values, the gap between predicted and actual performance shrinks. Fewer surprises at commissioning. **Documentation.** A thermal model creates a record of your design decisions and their justification. This is valuable for certifications, disputes, and future renovations. {% hint style="info" %} **Consider this:** The cost of thermal modelling a handful of key details is typically less than the cost of one change order. If it prevents even one late-stage redesign, it's paid for itself. {% endhint %} ### Set a Thermal Bridging Budget Early Here's a practice that separates smooth projects from painful ones: establish a thermal bridging budget during schematic design. This means deciding, before you've detailed every connection, how much heat loss you're willing to allocate to thermal bridges. It's similar to setting a fenestration budget or an energy use intensity target. #### How to set a budget 1. **Start with your envelope U-factor targets.** What does code require? What are you aiming for? 2. **Estimate your thermal bridge inventory.** How many linear metres of slab edge? How many balcony connections? How many shelf angle supports? You don't need exact numbers yet — order of magnitude is fine. 3. **Allocate a percentage.** A common starting point is **10–15% of total envelope heat loss** for thermal bridges. High-performance projects might target 5–10%. 4. **Check feasibility.** Do your preliminary details fit within the budget? If not, you know early that something needs to change — the details, the targets, or both. 5. **Track it through design development.** As details get resolved, update your thermal bridge inventory with real values. Are you still within budget? #### Why this works Setting a budget forces the conversation early, when changes are cheap. It gives the design team a clear target. And it prevents the common scenario where thermal bridging gets ignored until someone runs the energy model and discovers a problem. {% hint style="info" %} **Pro tip:** Include your thermal bridging budget in the basis of design document. This creates accountability and makes it harder for value engineering to quietly erode envelope performance later. {% endhint %} ### Practical Steps for Project Teams #### For Architects * **Flag thermal bridge locations early.** Mark shelf angles, slab edges, and penetrations on your envelope diagrams during schematic design. * **Coordinate with structure.** Steel connections through insulation are thermal bridges. The earlier structural knows this matters, the more options you have. * **Request thermal details from product reps.** Many cladding and curtain wall suppliers have pre-calculated Psi values for their systems. #### For Mechanical Engineers * **Don't ignore envelope in load calcs.** Thermal bridges affect peak loads, not just annual energy. A slab edge with a high Psi value can create localised cold spots that drive perimeter heating requirements. * **Push back on unrealistic U-factors.** If the architect's envelope spec assumes zero thermal bridging, the loads you calculate won't match reality. #### For Energy Modellers * **Use actual Psi/Chi values when available.** Default tables are a fallback, not a best practice. * **Document your assumptions.** If you're using table values, note which details they apply to and flag any that might warrant detailed analysis. * **Sensitivity check thermal bridges.** Run your model with conservative and optimistic thermal bridge assumptions. If the results vary significantly, that's a sign detailed modelling is worth the investment. #### For Owners and Developers * **Include thermal bridging in RFPs.** If you expect the design team to address thermal bridging properly, say so. Specify whether you want detailed modelling or will accept table values. * **Budget for it.** Thermal modelling and thermal breaks cost money. Projects that plan for this deliver better buildings than projects that treat it as an afterthought. ### What Happens If You Ignore This? Thermal bridging requirements are now part of code compliance. Ignoring them means: * **Prescriptive path:** You haven't demonstrated compliance with Section 5.5.5. * **Trade-off path:** Your Appendix C calculation is incomplete. * **Performance path:** Your energy model doesn't reflect reality. Beyond compliance, buildings with unaddressed thermal bridges underperform. They cost more to heat and cool. They have comfort problems. They may have condensation and moisture issues at thermal bridge locations. None of this is new information, the physics hasn't changed. What's changed is that the standard now requires you to deal with it. ### Next Steps 1. **Review our Technical Reference** for calculation methods and code references. 2. **Identify thermal bridges in your current project.** Where are the slab edges, shelf angles, balconies, and penetrations? 3. **Decide on your approach.** Table values for simple projects, detailed modelling for complex or high-performance ones. 4. **Set a thermal bridging budget** during schematic design. 5. **Document your assumptions** so future phases (and future teams) understand what was decided and why. *** # 2025 # The Wrap: 2025 So here we are at that time of year where we look back at everything that's happened in 2025, and wow, what a ride it's been! Making the switch from Speckel to Better Building really lit a fire under the team and unlocked some serious momentum for our platform. After six years of dedicated development, Speckel officially retired on June 30, 2025, making way for Better Building: a complete transformation that reflects our evolved mission as an all-in-one solution for sustainable design that's now supporting projects around the world. With nearly 6000 projects delivered on the platform this year, including almost 20,000 designs, our small but agile team have been keeping up with your requirements and still have lots more energy to continue to improve. #### Major Wins This Year We've packed in some major wins this year. We were absolutely stoked to support the Building Simulation 2025 conference in Brisbane, where we got to connect with the global building performance community and showcase how far we've come.

One of our biggest launches has been **Flows**: our game-changing project management feature that's been getting rave reviews. Flows lets you set goals, track timelines, assign responsibilities, store documents, and stay effortlessly organized right where your modeling happens. No more jumping between platforms or drowning in email threads; everything's in one place. We've even added budget management and time expense tracking to help teams stay on top of project finances. And speaking of making life easier, we've seriously beefed up our back-end with converters for everything from Rhino and SketchUp to IES and DesignBuilder. Translation? You can get your models loaded way faster now, whether you're working with EpJSON files or other formats. We've even been testing new features with early adopters to make sure these tools work seamlessly in real-world workflows. [Flows](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/sign-up-and-plans/news-and-updates/2025/flows-an-introduction-webinar) #### New Open-Source Sandbox Tools We've always believed in making sustainable design accessible to everyone, and this year we've doubled down on that commitment with some powerful free tools. Our 3D Building Geometry Creator V1.2 are for designers who need to quickly generate building models without the overhead of complex CAD software.

Even better, we launched our completely **free Heat Transfer Simulator**, which we showcased in a dedicated webinar that got amazing feedback from the community. These open-source tools are part of our mission to democratize access to quality building performance analysis, especially for students, educators, and professionals in developing regions who might not have access to expensive software suites.

We also get to grab some great feedback to consider the adoption of these tools and features within our platform next year. [Heat Transfer Simulator](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/user-guide/tools-and-plugins/heat-transfer-simulator) I [3D Building Geometry Creator](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/user-guide/tools-and-plugins/3d-building-geometry-creator) #### Breaking into the US Market As we close out the year, we're zeroing in on the U.S. market with our adoption of ASHRAE 90.1 Section 11 and Appendix G for 2019 (with 2025 coming in January 2026). This is huge: it's given us the foundation to seriously level up our HVAC modeling capabilities with new templates, an HVAC grouping feature (some call it multiplexing) and design day simulations. These advanced features will be rolling out to Plus and Premium users across all platforms when you're back from the holidays, giving you the tools to handle everything from VRF systems (yes, condenser curves matter!) to comprehensive energy modeling that meets U.S. code requirements. #### Fresh Look, Smarter Features Speaking of the new year: expect to see some exciting changes when you log back in! The biggest visual upgrade? Our brand-new **dashboards feature**. We're bringing all your project data, design work, team info, and conversations together in one central team dashboard. Finding what you need will be way quicker, and managing teams across different locations and time zones just got a whole lot easier. We will also be bringing the NZ and AU market back into focus in the New Year, to roll out updates for H1 and NCC 2025. #### Under the Hood Improvements And that's not all: we're also turbocharging our simulations with computational enhancements and extra robustness as we migrate to a more secure and reliable simulation framework. For those working in Australia and New Zealand, we've continued supporting Specification 44 for NCC 2022 thermal performance and launched our new low-cost Lite plan for H1 energy efficiency modeling. We've even partnered with NatHERS Cert IV Assessors to provide free access to Spec 44 resources. #### Looking Ahead The transition from Speckel to Better Building isn't just a rebrand; it's a complete evolution of what we set out to do. What started as a local platform focused on building material specification in Melbourne is now a global mission to enable better, more sustainable buildings everywhere. And based on what we've accomplished in 2025, we're just getting started. Here's to an amazing year ahead! Have a great Christmas all! # eQuest Convertor

For early users starting to move over to Better Building in preparation for our ASHRAE 90.1 Section 11 and Appendix G launch in January, we've made life considerably easier. Instead of rebuilding your models from scratch, we've created an in-house eQUEST to EnergyPlus geometry converter, and we'll help you migrate your last project as part of our onboarding process. ## Why We Built This eQUEST and EnergyPlus speak different languages when it comes to geometry. Completely different. eQUEST's DOE-2 engine uses simplified building shells with automatic surface generation, you sketch floor-by-floor footprints and the software handles the rest. EnergyPlus requires every surface explicitly defined with precise three-dimensional vertex coordinates. Every wall, floor, ceiling, window, and door needs its own coordinate set with proper orientation and adjacency relationships manually specified. We've watched modelers spend weeks manually translating mid-sized buildings, entering thousands of coordinate points, only to discover geometry errors that crash simulations. A single transposed digit, one reversed surface normal, window coordinates slightly outside their parent wall, any of these silent mistakes corrupt your results or halt analysis entirely. For a typical commercial building with dozens of zones, this geometry reconstruction alone can consume a week or more before you even start addressing HVAC systems, schedules, or loads. That's not how migration should work. You've already invested the engineering effort defining your building geometry. Your eQUEST model contains the physical reality of your project—validated floor areas, accurate window-to-wall ratios, correct orientations, proper zone configurations. Throwing that away to manually rebuild in a new platform wastes your expertise and introduces unnecessary risk. ## What the Converter Does Our converter reads your eQUEST INP files and automatically reconstructs the building geometry as valid EnergyPlus surfaces. It translates your shell definitions into explicit surface objects with mathematically precise vertex coordinates, establishes proper adjacency relationships between zones, correctly orients all surfaces with outward-facing normals, and places fenestration with accurate dimensional relationships to parent walls. The geometry arrives clean, validated, and ready for simulation. This is geometry translation done right. No manual coordinate entry. No transcription errors. No wondering if your zones are properly connected or if that window is actually where you think it is. The converter applies tested algorithms to generate valid EnergyPlus geometry that matches your eQUEST building definition with mathematical precision. You'll still need to configure your HVAC systems, assign schedules, and define loads in Better Building, but you're doing that with accurate building geometry already in place, not starting from a blank file spending days just getting walls and windows positioned correctly. ## What This Means for Your Practice You can transition to Better Building without the geometry rebuild bottleneck. Bring forward your most recent project's building form, compare thermal performance between platforms using geometry you know is accurate, and build confidence in the new tool without questioning whether geometric discrepancies are affecting results. For projects moving through design phases, the converter means maintaining geometric consistency from design development through construction documentation, even when switching platforms mid-project. When explaining energy performance changes to clients, you can confidently attribute differences to actual design modifications, HVAC strategies, or operational assumptions, not platform migration artifacts or geometric interpretation differences. For LEED submissions or code compliance documentation, you maintain clear geometric lineage. The building envelope in Better Building is the same building envelope from your eQUEST model, just translated into EnergyPlus's more explicit surface representation. ## Available Now for Early Users The geometry converter is ready. As part of onboarding, we'll work with you to migrate your last project's building geometry, ensuring the translation handles your specific modeling conventions and that you're comfortable with how Better Building represents your envelope. We're transparent about this being a bridge to our January launch because it matters that you have time to learn the platform, configure your systems, and validate your workflows before compliance deadlines hit. No geometry rebuilding required. Just better building performance analysis with the simulation rigor of EnergyPlus and the workflow efficiency you need. # 3D Building Geometry Creator V1.2

The Building Geometry Creator V1.2 is a comprehensive web-based 3D building modeling tool designed for energy simulation workflows. It enables architects, engineers, and energy modelers to quickly create multi-level building geometry with thermal zones, windows, and proper formatting for energy analysis software. The tool bridges the gap between conceptual design and detailed energy modeling by providing an intuitive 2D drawing interface that automatically generates 3D geometry.

Version 1.2 will be available next week, supporting significant upgrades in drawing tools, imports, shading, floor detection and more. The tool bridges the gap between conceptual design and detailed energy modeling by providing an intuitive 2D drawing interface that automatically generates 3D geometry. Darren O'Dea (CEO and Founder) will be running through the basics on Wednesday at 9am (AEDT) to show you how to model a building before your coffee gets cold. Please sign-up on Linkedin [here](https://www.linkedin.com/events/7404647434716372995/) or contact . # Heat Transfer Simulator Webinar Tuesday at 9 am (AEST)

The [Heat Transfer Simulator](/user-guide/tools-and-plugins/heat-transfer-simulator) is a comprehensive web-based thermal modelling application that enables architects, engineers, and building scientists to create, simulate, and analyze 2D heat transfer models. It provides an integrated environment for geometry creation, material assignment, boundary condition specification, mesh generation, and steady-state heat transfer simulation directly in your browser. Next Tuesday at 9 am (AEST), Darren O'Dea (CEO and Founder) will be running through the basics to show you how to use the tool in your own practice. Please sign-up on Linkedin [here](https://www.linkedin.com/events/7404653920960307200/) or contact . # Introducing Our Free Heat Transfer Simulator

It's taken time to get here. A lot of testing, learning, rebuilding, more testing. So we're excited to share something we've been working on for the last couple of months: our Heat Transfer Simulator. ### **Thermal Analysis Directly in Your Browser** The Heat Transfer Simulator is a comprehensive web-based thermal modelling application that enables architects, engineers, and building scientists to create, simulate, and analyze 2D heat transfer models. It provides an integrated environment for geometry creation, material assignment, boundary condition specification, mesh generation, and steady-state heat transfer simulation directly in your browser. **Key Capabilities:** * **Visual geometry creation** with precision drawing tools including structural steel sections * **Thermal simulation** using finite difference analysis * **Material library** with 49+ predefined building materials * **Boundary condition management** with 6 standard conditions * **Interactive results visualization** including temperature contours and heat flux vectors * **U-value and PSI-value calculation** for thermal performance analysis ### **Built on Solid FEA Principles** This is version 1.0 Beta, which means we're releasing it knowing there's more to learn, more to refine. Use it for preliminary analysis and design exploration, but verify critical results through other means. We're transparent about that because it matters. The tool is built on finite element principles similar to FEAScript, using Gauss-Seidel iteration for solving steady-state heat conduction. If you want to understand the math behind it, the documentation walks through everything from the governing equations to the numerical formulation. ### **Free Thermal Modeling Tool for Architects and Engineers** It's free to use. No barriers. Just register, open it and start modelling. Ready to get started? [Here are the docs. ](/user-guide/tools-and-plugins/heat-transfer-simulator) # Plus Plan Updates: New HVAC Templates and Design Day Simulations

If you're on our Plus plan, you may have noticed we only had four Energy Plus HVAC templates to work with. We've heard your feedback and have added some more advanced options to help with your Green Star, LEED, and other modelling projects. As of today, you'll find two new detailed HVAC systems available: * **Packaged Air Handling Unit (AHU) Systems** – great for projects requiring more control over air handling and distribution * **Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) Systems** – ideal when you need flexible zoning and energy-efficient cooling/heating solutions ### What makes these different? These detailed templates are quite a bit more advanced than our standard Energy Plus HVAC options. They give you finer control over system parameters and better represent real-world HVAC configurations, which is especially helpful when you're working on compliance modelling or need to demonstrate specific system performance. #### Key benefits of the detailed VRF template * More accurate part-load performance modelling that reflects how VRF systems actually operate * Individual zone control with simultaneous heating and cooling capabilities * Heat recovery between zones for improved energy efficiency * Better representation of outdoor unit performance across varying conditions * More realistic energy consumption predictions for VRF-specific features #### Key benefits of the detailed Packaged AHU template * Advanced air-side economiser controls for more accurate free cooling modelling * Detailed fan energy modelling with multiple control strategies (constant volume, VAV, etc.) * Better humidity control and dehumidification performance * More options for ventilation strategies and outdoor air control * Separate heating and cooling coil performance characteristics * More accurate representation of system operation and sequencing ### Design Day simulations now on Plus We've also made Design Day simulations available on the Plus plan. This lets you run single-day simulations to test peak heating and cooling loads, size equipment, and troubleshoot system performance without waiting for full annual runs. It's a great way to iterate quickly during the design phase. Learn more in our [Design Day documentation](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/user-guide/workflows/design-day). ### Getting started Because these templates have more features and settings than what you might be used to, we recommend taking some time with the documentation before jumping in. We've also put together dedicated on-demand courses for both systems that walk through the key settings and common use cases. **Helpful resources:** * [HVAC Templates](/user-guide/2d-building/building/hvac/hvac-templates) * [VRF Template](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/user-guide/2d-building/building/hvac/hvac-templates/variable-refrigerant-flow) * [VRF on-demand course](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/support-and-training/on-demand-courses/hvac-vrf-setup) * [Packaged Air Handling Units](/user-guide/2d-building/building/hvac/hvac-templates/packaged-air-handling-unit) * Packaged AHU on-demand course - Coming Soon * [Design Day documentation](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/user-guide/workflows/design-day) If you run into any questions while working with these new features, feel free to [reach out](/support-and-training/support-tickets), we're here to help. # Future Feature Testing Better Building has many new features on the way! We're taking a fresh approach to rolling these out, and we'd love your input along the journey. If you'd like to join our future feature testing group, simply drop your email address in the form below and we'll be in touch with further details. Sign-up [here](https://preview.mailerlite.io/forms/489849/168741847574774886/share) to get on the list. ## Try Before We Launch: Feature Sandboxes Over the next couple of months, we'll be releasing sandboxes where you can preview upcoming features. This gives you a chance to explore what's coming, see how it works, and share your valuable feedback with us.

## How It Works **Starting:** Wednesday, November 12th\ **Continuing:** Each Wednesday thereafter with new features We're hoping you can spend about 30 minutes with each new feature sandbox. Your hands-on experience will help us understand what's working well and what could be better. {% hint style="danger" %} **Important:** You'll need to sign up to access the sandbox tools. This helps us set clear expectations and ensure we can incorporate your feedback effectively. Sign-up [here](https://preview.mailerlite.io/forms/489849/168741847574774886/share) {% endhint %} You'll find a table below outlining all the new features in this release group. | New Feature | Scope | Release and Deadline | | ----------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------- | | Building Geometry Creator | A revised 2D geometry drawing experience with the aim of introducing new time saving concepts | 12/11 - 26/11 | | THERM Style Heat Transfer Simulator | A new dynamic heat and moisture simulation experience for calculating U-value and moisture related risk. | 19/11 - 03/12 | | Simplified Heat, Air and Moisture (HAM) Transport Simulator | A simplified HAM model simulates coupled heat and moisture transport through multi-layer wall assemblies. | 26/11 - 10/12 | | Rhino to EpJSON Converter | A drag & drop convertor from .3DM to .EpJSON | 26/11 - 10/12 | | AISI S250-21 Thermal Transmittance Calculator | A new calculator for thermal transmittance (U-factor) and thermal resistance (R-value) for cold-formed steel assemblies according to AISI S250-21 standard. | 03/12 - 17/12 | | ASHRAE Standard 90.1 Section A9 | A new calculator for thermal transmittance (U-factor) and thermal resistance (R-value) assemblies according to ASHRAE Standard 90.1, Section A9. | 03/12 - 17/12 | ## We Want to Hear From You After trying each feature, we'd love your feedback on: * Your overall experience * Features you found particularly useful * Areas where you see room for improvement * All feedback to be provided on Fridays towards the end of the year in [20 min demo session](https://calendly.com/betterbuildingsupport/14-day-trial-demo). # Global Expansion & Platform Updates

It's been a long time coming, almost seven years in the making. Creating new features, learning, testing, pushing, learning, testing, testing, testing. Yet here we are, thrilled to share that Better Building is expanding into the United States and other international markets, making our simulation platform available to people worldwide. Our journey to this point has been long and thorough. We started as a small team with a vision to build something far greater than ourselves, something only achievable through a shared commitment to create better buildings. Today, that vision reaches beyond Australia and New Zealand to designers, architects, and engineers around the globe. ## **A New Way to Access the Platform** To support our growing global community, we've created a unified access point for everyone. If you've been using [au.betterbuilding.io](https://au.betterbuilding.io) or [nz.betterbuilding.io](https://nz.betterbuilding.io) platforms, you'll now find us at [app.betterbuilding.io](https://app.betterbuilding.io).

New users joining through [app.betterbuilding.io](https://app.betterbuilding.io) will have access to our full range of simulation capabilities, completely independent of region-specific compliance processes. This means you can create designs and run simulations tailored to your needs, with access to our complete toolkit: thermal, moisture, and carbon calculations, elemental tools for walls, roofs, and floors, plus our 2D and 3D simulation workflows. ## **Moving to US Dollar Pricing** As we expand globally, we're transitioning to US dollar pricing to better serve our international audience. * **If you're an existing Australian or New Zealand customer:** Don't worry, nothing changes for you right now. Your current pricing stays exactly as it is, unless you choose to modify your account settings or pause your subscription. If you do pause and then restart, your new charges will be in US dollars. Based on today's exchange rates, we don't expect this to significantly affect your monthly or annual costs, though there may be small variations due to currency fluctuations. * **If you're a new customer:** All new accounts will be billed in US dollars, with monthly or annual payment options. You'll find our updated pricing displayed below. ## USD Pricing Post the 7th of November 2025, all future pricing on new plans are based on USD.

	Lite	Classic	Plus	Premium
No. of Seats	1	3	5	8
Per Month	$29	$79	$199	$329
Additional Team Member Per Month	+ $14.50	+ $26.50	+ $39.50	+ $41.50
Per Annum	$290	$790	$1990	$3290
Additional Team Member Per Annum	+ $145	+ $265	+ $395	+ $415

## **What This Means for You** We're genuinely excited about this expansion, not just into the US, but worldwide. Whether you're in India, Brazil, or anywhere else, you now have access to our platform and all its features (except for region-specific compliance workflows, which remain tied to their respective locations). # ASHRAE 90.1 Section 11 and Appendix G 2019 Landing in Jan 2026

We're super excited to announce that Better Building will launch our comprehensive support for ASHRAE 90.1 Section 11 and Appendix G 2019 in January 2026! Whilst we're not the first platform to support ASHRAE 90.1-2019 standards, we're confident we've built the smartest solution. Better Building will cut your modelling time by 50% compared to other products, both free and paid alternatives.\ \ We've reimagined the compliance workflow from the ground up to eliminate redundant tasks, automate complex calculations, and give you back valuable hours to focus on design optimisation.\ ‍\ Here's what sets Better Building apart: you can now run both Section 11 and Appendix G compliance simultaneously. No more choosing your compliance path upfront and hoping it provides the flexibility your design needs. No more discovering late in the process that you've been working with the wrong baseline or your unmet hours have dropped out.\ \ With Better Building, explore both pathways at once and let the data guide your decision. Understand which compliance option offers the most design flexibility for your specific project before you commit. {% hint style="success" %} If you'd like to here from us when our ASHRAE 90.1 Section 11 and Appendix G 2019 automated workflows drop, please simply add your email address in the form below and we'll be in touch with further details.Sign-up for early access [here](https://tinyurl.com/yyvse2xk) {% endhint %} ### **The Game-Changing Advantage: Simultaneous Compliance Paths** Here's what sets Better Building apart: you can now run both Section 11 and Appendix G compliance simultaneously. No more choosing your compliance path upfront and hoping it provides the flexibility your design needs. No more discovering late in the process that you've been working with the wrong baseline or your unmet hours have dropped out. With Better Building, explore both pathways at once and let the data guide your decision. Understand which compliance option offers the most design flexibility for your specific project before you commit. ### **The Baseline Control You Need** Better Building introduces a unique workflow for overriding baseline models to meet specific local code requirements or LEED certification criteria. Many jurisdictions have amendments to ASHRAE 90.1, and LEED projects often require specific baseline adjustments. Our intuitive override system lets you customise baseline assumptions whilst maintaining full traceability and documentation, ensuring your models meet both standard requirements and project-specific needs without starting from scratch. ### **Complete Feature Set** \- Automated baseline system generation for both Section 11 and Appendix G\ \- Parallel compliance processing: see both results instantly\ \- Flexible baseline override controls for local codes and LEED\ \- Comprehensive reporting for code officials and certification bodies\ \- Real-time design feedback to optimise performance outcomes\ \ Better Building continues our commitment to supporting industry professionals with tools that don't just meet standards but transform how you work. Mark your calendars for January 26 and discover how we're setting a new standard for energy modelling efficiency.\ ‍\ For more information, contact our [support team](mailto:support@betterbuilding.com?subject=SHRAE%2090.1-2019%20Compliance%20Tools). # Hygrothermal Specification & Modelling: On-demand Training

One of our most accessed on-demand courses is [Moisture](/support-and-training/on-demand-courses/moisture), a 54-minute course that provides a comprehensive understanding of advanced moisture assessments. Available on most plans, it's been a great detailed introduction to the topic. But we've heard your feedback! By popular request, we're developing an advanced version of this course for users particularly interested in the challenges of hygrothermal simulation for wall and roof systems. Launching **November 12th**, this advanced course will cover challenges across both typical and advanced construction, from precast panel systems all the way through to straw bale and rammed earth construction. We'll be using multiple software options, including **Better Building, WUFI, and Delphin**, to explain how best to approach these systems and fully comprehend hygrothermal modelling outputs. The course will also provide a strong focus on the fundamentals: the mathematical background behind hygrothermal modelling, plus a detailed appraisal of the inputs that go into the process. Our goal is to deliver a complete, third-party explanation without influence from suppliers or other biased opinions. Interested in early access? We'd love to hear from you! Simply click the link below, and we'll add you to our list and drop you a line before launch. {% hint style="success" %} Register your interest [here](https://preview.mailerlite.io/forms/489849/169631420018328704/share) {% endhint %} # Access via Speckel.io: Closing in November It's been a few months now since we rebranded to Better Building, and the response has been amazing. Thank you for your support! But as we move forward, it's time to fully break ties with our past. If you're still using a bookmark or accessing the platform through speckel.io, here's an important heads up: **by the end of November 2025 (that's November 30th)**, we'll be removing access via that domain. From that point forward, the only way to access the platform will be through betterbuilding.io. What does this mean for you? Simply update your bookmarks and any processes you're using to access Better Building. It's a quick change that ensures you'll have uninterrupted access to all your projects and features moving forward. # Thermal Bridging in ASHRAE 90.1-2022 ASHRAE 90.1-2022 introduced new rules for dealing with thermal bridges, those spots in your building envelope where heat sneaks through faster than it should. Think of shelf angles, floor slab edges, parapets, and balcony connections. These areas have always been energy weak points, but until now, the standard mostly ignored them. That's changed. Section 5.5.5 now requires you to account for thermal bridging, and this guide breaks down what you need to know, including the specific calculation methods for different framing types. ### How to Use This Guide Thermal bridging requirements touch multiple sections of 90.1-2022 and reference external standards. Use this decision tree to find your path: {% stepper %} {% step %} #### **Step 1: What are you calculating?** **Option A:** Thermal bridge impact (Psi/Chi values) → Go to Thermal Bridge Compliance **Option B:** Assembly U-factor → Continue to Step 2 {% endstep %} {% step %} #### Step 2: What's your framing type? | If your assembly is... | Then use... | Reference | | ---------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------- | ------------------ | | **CFS attic roof** (≤600mm spacing, insulation at ceiling) | AISI S250 (required) | CFS Attic Roofs | | **CFS wall** — covered by Sections A2–A8 | Pre-calculated tables | Appendix A | | **CFS wall** — not in A2–A8 tables | AISI S250 (with conditions) | Steel-Framed Walls | | **Wood framing** | Parallel path calculation | Section A9 | | **Mass wall** | Isothermal planes or 2D calc | Section A9 | | **Metal building** | Section A9.4.6 equations | Section A9 | | **Other / non-standard** | Section A9 procedures | Section A9 | | {% endstep %} | | | {% step %} #### Step 3: Which compliance path? (for thermal bridges) | Path | What you do | Key reference | | ---------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------- | | **Prescriptive** | Meet Section 5.5.5 requirements directly | Section 5.5.5 | | **Trade-off** | Use Psi/Chi values from Table A10.1 in Appendix C calculation | Table A10.1 | | **Performance** | Adjust insulation conductance in energy model | Section A10.2 | #### Quick Reference | What You Need | Where to Find It | | ----------------------------------- | -------------------------- | | Thermal bridge Psi/Chi values | Section 5.5.5, Table A10.1 | | CFS wall U-factors | AISI S250-21 or Section A9 | | CFS attic roof U-factors | AISI S250-21 (required) | | Calculation method by assembly type | Section A9.2 | | Air film and material R-values | Section A9.4 | | Pre-calculated assembly U-factors | Sections A2–A8 | | Alternative assembly procedures | Section A9 | | {% endstep %} | | | {% endstepper %} | | ### Why This Matters For years, energy models assumed building assemblies connected perfectly, no thermal shortcuts, no weak spots. But real buildings don't work that way. A steel beam punching through your insulation creates a heat highway that your U-factor calculations never accounted for. As insulation requirements got stricter over successive 90.1 editions, this gap between modeled and actual performance grew wider. The new thermal bridging provisions close that gap. ### The Three Types of Thermal Bridges #### Clear-Field Thermal Bridges These are the repeating elements spread across your assembly, studs, masonry ties, fasteners, metal girts and purlins. Appendix A handles these through assembly U-factor calculations, so Section 5.5.5 doesn't cover them. #### Linear Thermal Bridges Any element running along a line (horizontal, vertical, or diagonal) that cuts through your insulation layer. Floor edges, parapets, shelf angles, and window perimeters all fall here. You'll calculate these using the Psi-factor (ψ): > **Psi-factor** = thermal transmittance per unit length > > * IP units: Btu/(h·ft·°F) > * SI units: W/(m·K) #### Point Thermal Bridges Discrete penetrations — a beam poking through a wall, a column through a roof, structural anchors. You measure the cross-section at the outer face of your outermost insulation layer. You'll calculate these using the Chi-factor (χ): > **Chi-factor** = thermal transmittance of the point bridge > > * IP units: Btu/(h·°F) > * SI units: W/K ### Compliance Paths You've got three ways to comply, same as other envelope requirements. #### Prescriptive Path (Section 5.5.5) The simplest approach. The standard tells you exactly how much extra insulation to add at each thermal bridge location. No calculations required, just follow the requirements for your specific condition. Section 5.5.5 covers five categories:

Section	What It Covers
5.5.5.1	Roof/wall intersections (for insulation above deck)
5.5.5.2	Floor edges, with and without balconies/overhangs
5.5.5.3	Shelf angles and cladding support
5.5.5.4	Window-to-wall interfaces (four options based on window placement)
5.5.5.5	Everything else, requires area-weighted calculation

{% hint style="info" %} **Wood gets a pass.** Materials with thermal conductivity below 3.0 Btu·in/(h·ft²·°F) or 0.433 W/(m·K) are exempt. Wood falls under this threshold. {% endhint %} #### Trade-Off Path (Section 5.6 / Appendix C) Can't meet prescriptive requirements at one location? Trade it off against better performance elsewhere in your envelope. Here's how the math works: 1. For each thermal bridge that doesn't meet prescriptive requirements, use the Unmitigated Psi or Chi value from Table A10.1 2. For thermal bridges that do comply prescriptively, use the Default values from Table A10.1 3. For high-performance details that exceed requirements, enter actual calculated Psi/Chi values — you'll get credit toward overall performance Each linear or point thermal bridge calculation gets assigned to its associated floor, wall, or roof assembly in the Appendix C calculation. {% hint style="info" %} You can also use Psi and Chi values from other recognized sources per Section A10.1, you're not limited to Table A10.1. {% endhint %} #### Performance Path (Section A10.2) For whole-building energy models using the Energy Cost Budget Method (Section 12) or Performance Rating Method (Appendix G). The modelling approach: Adjust the conductance of insulation layers in your modeled assemblies to account for thermal bridging. You're not changing material properties — you're modifying layer conductance to reflect real-world thermal bridge impacts. Same rules apply: indicate whether each intersection complies prescriptively, then input unmitigated or mitigated Psi/Chi values with quantities. ### U-Factor Calculation Methods by Assembly Type Section A9 spells out exactly which calculation methods you can use for each type of construction. If your assembly isn't covered by the pre-calculated tables in Sections A2–A8, you'll need to use Section A9 procedures. {% hint style="info" %} **Alternative Assemblies (Section A1.2):** For assemblies not addressed by, or different from the specifications in Sections A2–A8, use the testing, calculation, and modeling procedures in Section A9 to determine U-factors, C-factors, F-factors, or heat capacities. {% endhint %} #### Acceptable Methods by Construction Type Two- or three-dimensional finite difference/finite volume computer models work for everything. Beyond that, here's what's allowed: **Roofs** | Roof Type | Acceptable Methods | | ------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | Insulation entirely above deck | Testing or series calculation | | Metal building roofs | Testing, or calculation per Section A9.4.6 (single/double layer) | | Attic roofs, wood joists | Testing or parallel path calculation | | Attic roofs, steel joists | Testing, parallel path with Table A9.2-1 adjustment factors, or modified zone method | | Attic roofs, concrete joists | Testing, parallel path (solid concrete), or isothermal planes (hollow sections) | | Other roofs | Testing or 2D calculation | **Above-Grade Walls** | Wall Type | Acceptable Methods | | -------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Mass walls | Testing, isothermal planes, or 2D calculation. **Parallel path not acceptable.** | | Metal building walls | Testing, or calculation per Section A9.4.6 | | Steel-framed walls | Testing, series path with Table A9.2-2 adjustment factors, or **AISI S250** (see conditions below) | | Wood-framed walls | Testing or parallel path calculation | | Other walls | Testing or 2D calculation | **Below-Grade Walls** | Wall Type | Acceptable Methods | | ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Mass walls | Testing, isothermal planes, or 2D calculation. **Parallel path not acceptable.** | | Other walls | Testing or 2D calculation | **Floors** | Floor Type | Acceptable Methods | | ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Mass floors | Testing, parallel path (solid concrete), or isothermal planes (hollow sections) | | Steel-joist floors | Testing or modified zone calculation | | Wood-joist floors | Testing, parallel path, or isothermal planes | | Other floors | Testing or 2D calculation | **Slab-on-Grade Floors** No testing or calculations allowed — use the prescribed values. ### Steel-Framed Walls: AISI S250 Requirements For steel-framed walls, you can use AISI S250-21, but there are specific conditions that affect how you apply it. #### When AISI S250 Applies Without Modification Use AISI S250 directly (no adjustments) when: * The wall has no cavity insulation and relies on continuous insulation only, framing can be at any spacing * The wall has less than 23% framing factor #### When You Need to Adjust AISI S250 Inputs If your steel-framed wall has higher framing factors, you'll need to use more conservative inputs: | Your Actual Framing | Required AISI S250 Input | | ----------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------- | | 600 mm (24") o.c. with 23% framing factor | Use next lower spacing input values | | 400 mm (16") o.c. with 25% framing factor | Use next lower spacing input values | #### Non-Standard C-Shape Framing For steel framing members that aren't standard C-shapes, AISI S250's "calculation option for other than standard C-shape framing" is permitted. This involves testing per ASTM C1363 and developing correction factors. ### Cold-Formed Steel Attic Roofs: AISI S250 Required {% hint style="info" %} **Mandatory:** U-factors for attic roofs with CFS conventional C-shape framing or CFS trusses, where insulation sits at the ceiling joist or bottom chord and framing spacing ≤ 600 mm (24") on-center, shall be determined in accordance with AISI S250. {% endhint %} #### Joist and Rafter Framing (Section B4.1) For steep-pitched roofs with C-shape ceiling joists or rafters: ``` Ur = 1 / (Rs-roof + Fc · Rins) ``` Where: * `Rs-roof` = Cumulative R-value of roof components (excluding steel and cavity insulation) * `Rins` = R-value of cavity insulation between joists * `Fc` = Correction factor from Table B4.1-1 **Correction Factors (Fc) for Joist Framing:** | Joist Depth | Spacing | R-30 | R-38 | R-49 | | ----------- | -------- | ---- | ---- | ---- | | 3.5" to 4" | 16" o.c. | 0.94 | 0.95 | 0.96 | | 6" | 16" o.c. | 0.81 | 0.85 | 0.88 | | 8" | 16" o.c. | 0.65 | 0.72 | 0.78 | | 10" | 16" o.c. | 0.27 | 0.62 | 0.70 | | 12" | 16" o.c. | 0.27 | 0.51 | 0.62 | | 3.5" to 4" | 24" o.c. | 0.96 | 0.97 | 0.97 | | 6" | 24" o.c. | 0.86 | 0.88 | 0.91 | | 8" | 24" o.c. | 0.72 | 0.78 | 0.83 | | 10" | 24" o.c. | 0.35 | 0.69 | 0.76 | | 12" | 24" o.c. | 0.35 | 0.61 | 0.69 | *Linear interpolation between table values is permitted.* #### Truss Framing (Section B4.2) For C-shape truss framing with ≥24" spacing and ≤3 web penetrations per 4 ft of truss: **Without rigid foam below truss:** ``` Ut = 1 / (0.864 · Rins) + 0.330 ``` **With R-3 rigid foam between gypsum and bottom chord:** ``` Ut = 1 / (0.864 · Rins) + 4.994 ``` **With R-5 rigid foam between gypsum and bottom chord:** ``` Ut = 1 / (0.864 · Rins) + 7.082 ``` Where `Rins` = R-value of cavity insulation at the bottom chord. ### AISI S250 Wall Calculations: The OTZ Method For walls with standard C-shape studs at 6", 12", 16", or 24" on-center spacing, AISI S250 uses the Overall Thermal Zone (OTZ) approach. {% stepper %} {% step %} **Step 1: Calculate the OTZ** ``` OTZ = C₀ + C₁·Rcav + C₂·Rshe + C₃·Rcav² + C₄·Rshe² + C₅·Rcav·Rshe ``` Where: * `Rcav` = Total R-value of the wall cavity (insulation + any air space) * `Rshe` = R-value of exterior continuous insulation (not including wood or gypsum) * `C₀` through `C₅` = Coefficients from Table B3.1.1-1 based on framing spacing and steel thickness {% endstep %} {% step %} **Step 2: Calculate the C-Shape Framing Factor** ``` FFcs = (CFSt / 1000) / CFSflange ``` {% endstep %} {% step %} **Step 3: Calculate Thermal Transmittance at Cavity** ``` U₁ = (1 - FFcs) / Rins + FFcs / Rs-wall ``` {% endstep %} {% step %} **Step 4: Calculate Overall U-Factor** ``` Uo = (1 - FFotz) / Rspc + FFotz / Rsps ``` {% hint style="info" %} **Shortcut:** AISI S250 Appendix 1 provides pre-calculated U-factors for common wall assemblies with 43-mil steel at 16" and 24" spacing. {% endhint %} {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} ### Section A9 Calculation Assumptions When you're doing your own calculations, Section A9.4 specifies the values you must use. #### Air Film R-Values | Condition | R-Value (m²·K/W) | | ----------------------------------- | ---------------- | | All exterior surfaces | 0.03 | | All semi-exterior surfaces | 0.08 | | Interior horizontal, heat flow up | 0.11 | | Interior horizontal, heat flow down | 0.17 | | Interior vertical surfaces | 0.12 | #### Air Space R-Values Use Table A9.4.2-1 values based on effective emittance, provided: * Air space is enclosed and unventilated * Located interior of continuous air barrier * Reflective insulation (if used) is fitted closely and sealed * Air spaces < 13 mm have no R-value * Use 89 mm values for air spaces up to 300 mm #### Insulation R-Values * **Uncompressed:** Use rated R-value * **Uniformly compressed in confined cavities:** Use Table A9.4.3 * **In steel joist attic roofs:** Use Table A9.2-1 adjustment factors * **In steel-framed walls:** Use Table A9.2-2 adjustment factors ### Testing Requirements If you're going the testing route instead of calculations: #### Material Properties (ASTM C177, C518, or C1363) * For concrete: multiply oven-dried conductivity by 1.2 to account for typical installed moisture content #### Assembly U-Factors (ASTM C1363) * Use production-line or consumer-representative samples * Test must include: panel edges, joints, typical framing percentages, and thermal bridges * If assembly is too large, test representative portions or multiple portions with weighted average ### Steel Thermal Properties AISI S250 thermal conductivity values by steel thickness: | Designation Thickness (mils) | Thermal Conductivity k (Btu/h·ft²·°F) | | ---------------------------- | ------------------------------------- | | 33 | 381 | | 43 | 495 | | 54 | 622 | | 68 | 783 | {% hint style="info" %} **Conservative assumption:** AISI S250 assumes C-shapes without web holes (punchouts). Framing with punchouts performs better than calculated. {% endhint %} ### Calculation Requirements Summary | Assembly Type | Primary Method | Alternative Methods | | --------------------------- | ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------- | | Steel-framed walls | AISI S250 (with conditions) | Testing, series path + Table A9.2-2 | | CFS attic roofs (≤24" o.c.) | AISI S250 required | Testing | | Steel-joist attic roofs | Parallel path + Table A9.2-1 | Testing, modified zone | | Wood-framed walls | Parallel path | Testing | | Mass walls | Isothermal planes or 2D | Testing. Not parallel path. | | Metal building | Section A9.4.6 equations | Testing | | Thermal Bridge Type | Factor | Units (IP) | Units (SI) | | ------------------- | ------- | ------------- | ---------- | | Linear | Psi (ψ) | Btu/(h·ft·°F) | W/(m·K) | | Point | Chi (χ) | Btu/(h·°F) | W/K | ### Quick Reference: Table A10.1 Values | Compliance Status | Which Column to Use | | ------------------------- | --------------------------------- | | Doesn't meet prescriptive | Unmitigated | | Meets prescriptive | Default | | Exceeds prescriptive | Calculate actual value for credit | ### Training, If You Need It To support practitioners navigating these requirements, we've developed on-demand training specifically focused on linear thermal bridging using LBNL THERM. The course walks through the calculation methods and modelling approaches you'll need for compliance, particularly when moving beyond prescriptive requirements. You can find details at . As we continue developing our documentation and workflow tools, we want to ensure they actually support your practice. Are you finding the 50mm fenestration alignment manageable? How are the balcony percentage limits affecting your designs in colder zones? We'd love to hear how you're approaching these requirements and what would make compliance more efficient. # Rhino to EpJSON: New Feature Testers

Over the next 6 months, Better Buildings will be rolling out various features as we track local changes to the National Construction Code, updates to the New Zealand Code, and some major new workflows for international markets, including the United States and Canada. As we implement these features, we want to ensure they actually benefit your work. With that in mind, we're looking to formalise our user testing process and would love to hear from you. In early November, we'll be updating our timeline, but until then, we're particularly keen to hear from folks with an interest in 3D modelling in Rhino.

If you'd like to join our early access testing group, starting with our new Rhino workflow, simply drop your email address in the form below and we'll be in touch with further details. {% hint style="success" %} Sign-up [here](https://preview.mailerlite.io/forms/489849/168741847574774886/share) {% endhint %} # Feedback Friday - November 2025

It's official... we are in listening mode and have called it Feedback Friday. As we look to next year, we want to hear from you about how we are doing, what we can do to make life easier, and where you would like to see us evolve over the coming 12 months. For example, you might want to discuss: * Are we communicating effectively? Is our response time meeting your expectations? Are you satisfied with the quality of our service or product delivery? * Would streamlined processes help? Do you need better documentation or training materials? Could improved integration with your existing systems save you time? * What new features or services would benefit you most? Are there emerging challenges in your sector that we should address? How can we better support your growth plans? The process is simple. [Book a 20-minute slot](https://calendly.com/betterbuildingsupport/14-day-trial-demo?month=2025-10\&date=2025-10-24) on any Friday during November and we can discuss any topic in complete confidence. Your feedback and ideas may be included in our pipeline for next year. To provide feedback, click the link below to set up a call with Darren O'Dea (CEO and Co-founder). {% hint style="success" %} [Book a Feedback session today ](https://calendly.com/betterbuildingsupport/14-day-trial-demo?month=2025-10\&date=2025-10-24) {% endhint %} # Special End-of-Year Offer: Streamlined H1 Energy Efficiency Modelling

As we approach the festive season, we're making it easier and more affordable to achieve building consent for H1 Energy Efficiency compliance. Our team will demonstrate the power of Better Building workflows while handling the technical modelling for you. {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Send Us Your Drawings Email your project drawings to and we'll provide a time estimate for your model. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### **Get Your Quote** Most projects take just two hours to complete. Through to the end of the year, we're offering special pricing: * Small residential projects (<350 m²): Starting at $295 * Larger projects (>350 m²): Starting at $395 {% endstep %} {% step %} ### **We Build Your Model** Once we agree on the budget and specifications, we'll model your design and track our time throughout the process, ensuring complete transparency every step of the way. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Submit to Council The last step is up to you. Once our modelling matches your drawings and specifications, you are ready to send your H1 Energy Efficiency report to Council. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} # SketchUp to EpJSON: New Feature Testers

To date, we've been encouraging the use of the [SketchUp OpenStudio plug-in](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/support-and-training/other-support/tutorials/speckel-tutorial-archive/openstudio-sketchup-plug-in) as a useful way to export gbXML files. It's a solid plug-in, but we reckon we can do better by creating our own. This would provide improved saving facilities and create a more streamlined 3D workflow for your projects in 2026. If you'd like to join our early access testing group, starting with our new SketchUp plug-in, simply drop your email address in the form below and we'll be in touch with further details. {% hint style="success" %} Sign-up [here](https://preview.mailerlite.io/forms/489849/168741847574774886/share) {% endhint %} # VRF Condenser Curves Matter!

Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) systems use one outdoor condenser unit to serve multiple indoor units throughout a building. Unlike traditional systems that operate at fixed capacity, VRF systems modulate refrigerant flow to match the precise heating or cooling demand in each zone. This variable capacity operation makes them highly efficient and increasingly popular in commercial buildings, hotels, and residential developments. But this continuous modulation also makes them more complex to model accurately. ## **The condenser curve challenge** VRF condensers exhibit significantly different performance characteristics across their operating envelope. A unit with a nominal capacity of 35 kW at standard rating conditions (35°C outdoor, 27°C indoor wet-bulb) might only deliver 28 kW at 40°C outdoor temperature, or provide 40 kW at milder 20°C conditions. Outdoor dry-bulb temperature, indoor wet-bulb temperature, part-load ratio, and combination ratio all influence both thermal capacity and compressor power draw. Yet simplified modelling approaches treat rated capacity as constant, ignoring performance degradation at temperature extremes or variations across the part-load operating range. Without accounting for these variations, you might oversize equipment by 15-20%, underestimate annual energy costs by thousands of $$$$, or miss comfort issues that only manifest at peak outdoor conditions. ## **Performance curves address this directly** Condenser performance curves mathematically describe capacity and energy input ratios as functions of operating conditions. Capacity modifier curves adjust output based on temperatures, whilst energy input ratio curves account for compressor efficiency variations. Boundary curves define transition points where performance characteristics shift between operating regimes. EnergyPlus includes default VRF performance curves that work well for generic modelling and early design studies. However, to accurately model your specific system, these defaults need replacing with technical performance data from the manufacturer. Different VRF models from Daikin, Mitsubishi, Toshiba, or other suppliers have distinct performance characteristics. A high-efficiency unit will have different capacity degradation at extreme temperatures compared to a standard model, and part-load curves vary between inverter designs and control strategies. This matters particularly for VRF because these systems rarely operate at full rated output. Understanding coefficient of performance (COP) at 30% part-load versus 80% part-load is fundamental to capturing actual energy consumption patterns. ## **What this means for your projects** Our platform now allows you to input manufacturer-specific performance curves, so your energy models reflect the actual VRF system you're specifying rather than generic assumptions. This yields more accurate load calculations, appropriate equipment sizing, and defensible energy predictions that directly impact project outcomes and operational performance. # Flows: Feedback Request

Flows, our project management system, has been live for a few months now, and we've been steadily adding functionality. The latest additions include: * Budget management capabilities * Time and expense tracking We've also implemented both backend improvements and frontend visual enhancements to the dashboard, making the system more robust and easier to navigate. ## We Need Your Feedback To continue improving Flows in ways that benefit your workflow, we need to hear from you. Your practical experience with the system is invaluable for guiding our development priorities. Oh, and our feedback incentive is simple. Share your thoughts in a quick 3-minute survey and we'll add 50 credits to your account as a thank you. {% embed url="" %} ## New to Flows? If you haven't explored Flows yet, we recommend taking our free on-demand course first. This will give you a solid foundation in the system's capabilities and help you provide more informed feedback about this key feature for your future applications. # Platform Performance Updates and Storage Guidelines

## Recent Infrastructure Improvements Over the last quarter, we've observed substantial growth in Better Building platform usage: more users are taking on-demand courses, submitting support tickets, and utilising flows for data storage. This increased activity prompted us to optimise the underlying operating system that supports your Better Building experience. We've implemented significant performance enhancements to our data handling systems, achieving a 10x improvement in processing speed. You should notice considerably faster response times across the platform. ## New Storage Limits As part of our infrastructure review, we're introducing storage limits for: * Documentation within flows * Saved results from batch processing operations These limits are designed to be generous enough that most users won't encounter them during normal usage. We'll monitor usage patterns over the next 6 to 12 months and adjust as needed. As such, these aren't meant to restrict your work. Rather, they help us establish clear expectations about data storage capacity whilst ensuring optimal platform performance for all Better Building users. The specific total storage limits are detailed below. | Lite | Classic | Plus | Premium | | ---- | ------- | ----- | ------- | | 2GB | 20GB | 100GB | 500GB | We expect these changes to have minimal impact on your current workflows whilst significantly improving overall platform stability and speed. # Linear Thermal Bridging: LBNL THERM (On-demand Training)

We’re excited to announce a new [120-minute training course ](/support-and-training/on-demand-courses/linear-thermal-bridging-lbnl-therm)on linear thermal bridging analysis using THERM software. As a part of our Advanced Courses, access is not a part of Plans and purchased directly on the platform. Designed for building physics professionals, façade engineers, and energy consultants, the course blends theory with hands-on modelling practice. You’ll gain the skills to quantify and optimise thermal bridge performance in building envelope details while meeting international standards. ## **Key highlights include** Our new THERM training course has just gone live, offering comprehensive linear thermal bridging analysis for building physics professionals, façade engineers, and energy consultants who need to quantify and optimise thermal bridge performance in envelope details. The course covers psi (ψ) calculation fundamentals for geometric, construction, and hybrid thermal bridges, addressing impacts on energy performance, moisture risk, and durability. You'll work directly with ISO 10211 and ISO 6946 standards, learning boundary conditions and film coefficients for various exposure scenarios. Practical sessions start with THERM setup and library configuration, then progress through five modelling exercises: external/internal wall corners, mid-floor systems, wall-roof junctions, and balcony connections. Each demonstrates the complete workflow from geometry creation (native THERM tools or DXF imports) through results interpretation and L2D/L1D calculations with isotherm verification. We've built in systematic quality control procedures, plus automated reporting workflows that process THERM outputs into verified psi values for building certifier submissions. The course includes optimisation strategies to identify improvement opportunities in your designs. ## Certificate of Completion Pass the final quiz (80%) for all parts of the course to receive your Certificate of Completion. ## Pricing This [Advanced Course](/sign-up-and-plans/plans) sits outside our standard Plans. [Team members](/create-your-first-project/create-a-team) get direct platform access at $395 + GST per person. # Spec 44 Area Correction Factors If you're working with Specification 44 for Class 1 or Class 2 NCC compliance, you've probably encountered the area adjustment factor equations and wondered what they're actually doing.

These factors aim to fix a fundamental fairness problem. Small buildings need more heating and cooling per square meter than large ones due to basic physics, higher surface-to-volume ratios and relatively larger windows. Without area adjustment factors, energy rating systems unfairly penalised smaller homes with lower star ratings. A well-designed 100m² house would score worse than an identical 300m² house, even though both were built to the same standard. Researchers solved this by simulating an ideal house at sizes from 49m² to 625m², using 196m² as the baseline. Buildings smaller than this get positive adjustments to their load limits, while larger ones get reductions. The result? Those equations in Specification 44. ## Area Adjustment Factor - Heating (FH) Let's first look at how area adjustment factors actually work in practice with S44C2 heating load limits. Specification 44 sets a heating load limit, then adjusts it based on your building size using the blue curve below. This adjustment either makes your life easier or harder depending on your building's habitable area. The magic habitable area number is 194.7m². Hit exactly this size and you get a factor of 1.0, meaning no adjustment at all. Your heating load limit stays exactly as written in the code.

But here's where it gets interesting. Smaller buildings (under 194.7m² habitable area) get factors above 1.0, which actually increases your heating load limit. You're allowed to use more energy for heating. This makes sense because small buildings naturally need more heating per square meter due to their physics. Larger buildings (over 194.7m² habitable area) get factors below 1.0, which decreases your heating load limit. You're forced to be more efficient. This also makes sense as big buildings should achieve better heating efficiency. In summary, the closer you get to 194.7m², the tougher it becomes. It's like a reverse sweet spot. Buildings much smaller than 194.7m² have clearer paths to compliance. ## Area Adjustment Factor - Cooling (FC) Now, lets jump to the S44C3 cooling load limits. Cooling's "sweet spot" arrives sooner (green line below). You start getting penalised (factors below 1.0) at 178.9m² rather than waiting until 194.7m² like heating. This means cooling compliance gets tougher faster as buildings grow. So, while heating bottoms out at FH 0.84 (16% tighter limits), cooling can drop to FC 0.71 (29% tighter limits) because cooling systems achieve better economies of scale through advanced controls and thermal zoning.

## What Does It Mean? If you're designing smaller buildings, Specification 44 is your secret weapon. Buildings under 180-195m² get favorable area adjustment factors that increase your allowable heating and cooling loads by 15-37%. This isn't a regulatory gift, it's physics recognition. Small buildings naturally need more energy per square meter due to higher surface-to-volume ratios and proportionally larger windows, and Specification 44 finally gives you credit for fighting against these inherent disadvantages. Larger buildings face the opposite reality. Once you cross those 178.9m²-194.7mm² thresholds, the area factors flip against you, reducing your load limits by up to 29%. Buildings approaching 200m² hit the worst zone, losing small building benefits without gaining large building efficiencies. The strategy seems pretty clear. Keep your buildings small and you might be able to leverage Specification 44. f you're large, you might need to look elsewhere. # Specification 44: Class 1 Performance Solution Training: Now Available {% embed url="." %} We're thrilled to announce our comprehensive advanced training course on [Specification 44](/sign-up-and-plans/news-and-updates/2025/specification-44-class-1-performance-solution-training-now-available), designed for professionals seeking expertise in thermal performance and energy modeling. This 139-minute course delivers practical knowledge on H6P1 thermal performance, climate-specific modeling approaches, and whole-of-home energy analysis (H6P2). Perfect for building designers, energy assessors, and sustainability consultants looking to master Class 1 performance solutions. [Read more](/support-and-training/on-demand-courses/specification-44-a-class-1-performance-solution). {% hint style="danger" %} FREE access for 60 days is available until September 12th (valued at $395). [Registration](/sign-up-and-plans/news-and-updates/2025/exciting-news-for-nathers-cert-iv-assessors-free-access-to-spec-44.) is mandatory to secure your spot. Once free access expires, this course will only be accessible as a paid course. {% endhint %} ## **What sets this course apart?** ✅ **Rigorous 90% pass requirement ensuring true competency** We've set the bar high with a 90% minimum pass mark because we believe in developing genuine expertise, not just surface-level understanding. This ensures you'll master the workflow intricacies and process sensitivities that are critical for real-world application. When you complete this course, you'll have the confidence and competence to implement Specification 44 solutions without hesitation. ✅ **Comprehensive coverage from warm to cold climate applications** Unlike generic training programs, we address the full spectrum of climate conditions you'll encounter in practice. Learn specific modeling techniques for warm climate zones, adapt strategies for cold climate challenges, and understand how thermal performance requirements shift across different environmental contexts. This versatility makes you valuable across diverse projects and geographical regions. ✅ **Self-paced online learning with recorded sessions and quizzes** Access high-quality recorded content on your schedule, pause and replay complex sections, and test your knowledge through targeted quizzes. This flexible format allows you to balance professional development with work commitments while ensuring you fully absorb each concept before moving forward. Perfect for busy professionals who need quality training without disrupting client projects. ✅ **Team enrollment options for organizational training** Upskill your entire team with our streamlined group enrollment process. Create consistency in your organization's approach to Class 1 performance solutions, establish a common knowledge base across departments, and build internal expertise that drives competitive advantage. Ideal for firms looking to standardize their sustainable design practices. ## **How to Access the Course** ### **Step 1: Get Your Access** #### Existing users**:** Navigate directly to "Specification 44: A Class 1 Performance Solution".

Next, locate 'Buy Course' and proceed to the payment. Don't worry, we will identify you and 100% discount the total cost of the course.

#### **New users:** * [Sign up](/sign-up-and-plans/sign-in) for a 14-day trial account * Navigate to the course, as above. ### **Step 2: Apply Your Free Platform Access** If you are looking to expand your new Specification 44 skills and want free access to do so, you must achieve the minimum 90% pass mark * Existing users: No restrictions * Access will be validated against [registered users only](/sign-up-and-plans/news-and-updates/2025/exciting-news-for-nathers-cert-iv-assessors-free-access-to-spec-44.) * Valid until October 31st {% hint style="danger" %} **Note:** Only those who have [registered interest](/sign-up-and-plans/news-and-updates/2025/exciting-news-for-nathers-cert-iv-assessors-free-access-to-spec-44.) will receive access. Unregistered accounts will have access revoked. {% endhint %} # Detailed Results Viewer (Webinar)

Join us on 5th September at 10:00 AM for an exclusive presentation by Darren O'Dea, Co-founder and Director, as he unveils our groundbreaking new detailed results viewer. This game-changing feature marks a significant evolution in our platform capabilities. For the first time, all detailed verification processes that were previously conducted outside the platform will now be seamlessly integrated within our system. Starting this week, you'll have the power to assess every zone in your model for any output from the EnergyPlus IDF model, all within a single, unified interface. With this comprehensive verification functionality at your fingertips, you can: * Streamline your model verification workflow * Ensure accuracy with greater confidence * Prepare your detailed model submissions for rigorous third-party review with ease Don't miss this opportunity to discover how this powerful new tool will transform your modelling and verification process. [Attend here](https://www.linkedin.com/events/7366705566179602432/) # Exciting News for NatHERS Cert IV Assessors! Free access to Spec 44. Ready to take your thermal performance expertise to the next level? We're thrilled to announce **FREE access** to our exclusive [Specification 44 workflow](/user-guide/workflows/energy-efficiency/specification-44), but only for a limited time! We believe every NatHERS Cert IV Assessor deserves the confidence to master Specification 44 and nail those H6P1 Thermal performance requirements. That's why we're opening our doors and letting you build on the solid foundation you've already earned through your certification. We're putting the finishing touches on our comprehensive training documentation this month, and we want YOU to be among the first to experience it. Simply register your interest below, and you'll be first in line when we launch. **What's in it for you?** Two full months of completely free access (until October 31st) to upskill, dive deep into Specification 44, and become the thermal performance expert you're meant to be. **What's in it for us?** Your valuable feedback as you navigate the training, helping us create something truly exceptional for the industry. It's a win-win that could transform how you approach thermal performance assessments. First 50 individuals only. Ready to level up? Yes... Sign-up below. {% embed url="" %} # Understanding Specification 44: A Practical Guide to NCC 2022 Thermal Performance

Following recent inquiries and discussions sparked by the release of our dedicated Specification 44 workflow, we've prepared this comprehensive guide to address common questions and concerns about this new first-principles approach to NCC 2022 residential compliance. Our objective is to clearly explain the why, what, and how of Specification 44, clarifying its intent and limitations while providing practical guidance for its application in real-world projects. *** ## Why Does Specification 44 Even Exists? You might wonder why Specification 44 was developed, especially given that DTS provisions have become significantly more challenging to apply under NCC 2022 and the significant focus on NatHERS 7-stars. This concern is understandable and deserves explanation. The root of Specification 44 existence lies in how NCC 2019 handled Performance Requirements for housing energy efficiency. These were written in qualitative and subjective terms, creating significant interpretation challenges for practitioners who struggled to determine exactly what was required and how to demonstrate compliance effectively. This ambiguity also allowed certain practitioners to deliver poor outcomes to homeowners, particularly in South and Western Australia. All while flying the banner of sustainability!! The result was inconsistent assessments, made up DTS provisions and ongoing disputes over what constituted adequate thermal performance. Recognising these issues, the Australian Building Codes Board determined that NCC 2022 needed quantified, measurable standards to eliminate ambiguity. This new approach establishes specific numerical targets that buildings must meet while maintaining the same overall performance level of 7-star equivalent energy efficiency. Specification 44 emerged as the technical solution to address these challenges. Instead of subjective assessments, practitioners now have detailed calculation methods for determining maximum allowable heating loads, cooling loads, and total thermal energy loads. This provides the mathematical framework needed to definitively determine whether a building meets the thermal performance requirements under H6P1. *** ## What is Specification 44? Specification 44 comprises three interconnected calculation methods that work together to define thermal performance limits deemed equivalent to 7-star NatHERS performance. However, it's crucial to understand that any relationship with NatHERS ends there. Specification 44 uses different simulation engines, internal areas, internal loads, and climate files, which means outputs cannot and should not be compared with NatHERS results, even when using the same units. Here comes the technical bit. **S44C2 - Heating Load Limit (HLL):** This calculation determines the maximum permissible annual heating energy for a building. The formula takes the greater of either 4 MJ/m².annum (baseline value) or ((0.0044 x HDH) – 5.9) x FH (climate-adjusted calculation). The formula incorporates heating degree hours (HDH) specific to the building's location and an area adjustment factor (FH) derived from lookup tables based on total habitable room area. This approach ensures buildings in colder climates receive appropriate heating load allowances while maintaining consistent performance standards. **S44C3 - Cooling Load Limit (CLL):** The cooling calculation reflects the complex nature of cooling loads across Australia's diverse climate zones. The formula CLL = (5.4 + 0.00617 × (CDH + 1.85DGH)) × FC incorporates cooling degree hours (CDH), dehumidification gram hours (DGH), and an area adjustment factor (FC). This accounts for both sensible cooling (temperature control) and latent cooling (humidity control), making it particularly relevant for Australia's hot, humid northern regions. **S44C4 - Thermal Energy Load Limit (TLL):** This represents the most comprehensive calculation, combining heating and cooling considerations into a single thermal energy budget. The formula TLL = 19.3HLL + 22.6CLL − 8.4 − 15/(Tr + 10.74) incorporates the previously calculated heating and cooling limits along with the annual average daily outdoor temperature range (Tr). This creates a holistic thermal performance envelope that reflects the total energy requirements of the building. *** ## How you Apply Specification 44 in Practice? The primary application of Specification 44 is in developing first principles Performance Solutions, where you demonstrate compliance with H6P1 through direct assessment against the Performance Requirements. This approach offers maximum design flexibility but requires thorough understanding of both the technical calculations and the Performance Solution development process. In other words, you need to know what you are doing! When using this pathway, you function as the thermal performance assessor, calculating whether your specific building design meets the heating, cooling, and thermal energy load limits. With appropriate upskilling, registered NatHERS Cert IV assessors are ideally positioned to deliver Specification 44 assessments, given their existing familiarity with Class 1 assessments. This process itself can involve gathering local climate data, determining your building's thermal characteristics, and conducting detailed thermal modelling to predict actual loads. You then compare these predicted loads against the Specification 44 limits to demonstrate compliance. This approach proves particularly valuable for building designs that don't align well with standard compliance pathways. Whether you're designing homes with unconventional materials or earth-coupled thermal systems, a first principles approach using Specification 44 allows you to demonstrate that these innovations achieve required thermal performance without being constrained by prescriptive requirements. However, it needs to be clear that it is not limited to unconventional designs and can be used for standard homes. When developing a Performance Solution using Specification 44, the specification becomes central to your Performance-Based Design Brief (PBDB). The PBDB must establish clear acceptance criteria, and Specification 44 provides the quantified benchmarks that form these criteria. Your PBDB would typically state that the proposed design will achieve heating loads not exceeding the Specification 44 heating load limit, cooling loads not exceeding the cooling load limit, and thermal energy loads not exceeding the thermal energy load limit for the specific climate and building size. This creates clear, measurable targets that all project stakeholders can understand and building surveyors can objectively assess. However, it's important to remember that while Specification 44 addresses H6P1 thermal performance requirements, you must also satisfy H6P2 energy usage requirements. Thermal performance represents only one component of the overall energy efficiency compliance framework. *** ## Do I Need Specification 44 Training? While commercial ESD engineers and consultants are generally skilled in more complex energy modelling, registered NatHERS Cert IV assessors may need to upskill to fill in knowledge gaps to consider using Specification 44. To bridge the knowledge gap, Better Building are providing free training to registered NatHERS Cert IV assessors and offer project reviews to ensure your next project provides a robust and compliant solution for the National Construction Code. Better Building are currently seeking a partnership with a third party to provide a review service for Specification 44 models. # Flows Update: Introducing Budget Management and Time Expense Tracking Thank you for all the valuable feedback you've been sharing over the past few weeks. Your comments have been instrumental in helping us improve Flows, and we're excited to announce two key feature developments that directly address your needs. ## What's New?

### Budget Management You can now set an estimated budget (in hours) for any flow. This allows you to: * Define expected time requirements upfront (e.g., 10 hours for an energy model flow) * Track actual progress against your budget * Measure project success from a time perspective ### Time Expense Tracking We've introduced two ways to capture time spent on your flows: #### **Manual Time Expenses** * Add time for activities not automatically tracked by the platform * Account for document reviews, meetings, and other project-related work * Get a complete picture of time invested in your project delivery #### **Automatic Time Tracking** * When you connect a subflow to your designs, time is automatically tracked * Data is collected in 6-minute intervals for precision * Seamlessly integrated as automatic expenses ## Enhanced Visual Dashboard

All this information comes together in an intuitive front-end visualization that: * Shows total expenses accumulated over time * Compares actual time against your budget * Provides clear insights into project tracking and performance ## Why These Changes Matter? These features give you comprehensive control over project time management, combining both manual and automatic tracking methods to ensure no effort goes unaccounted for. You'll have better visibility into resource allocation and project efficiency. ## Keep Your Feedback Coming Your input has been invaluable in shaping these improvements. Please continue sharing your thoughts and suggestions as we work to further enhance your Flows experience. # Specification 44: A NatHERS Replacement? 29.07.25

Australia's NCC 2022 Specification 44 energy modeling pathway for residential buildings represents a significant advancement in the National Construction Code. While this performance-based approach is gaining momentum among forward-thinking practitioners, many architects and engineers are still discovering its transformative potential. As energy efficiency requirements continue to evolve, this session will demonstrate how NCC 2022 Specification 44, soon to be available as a dedicated workflow on the Better Building platform, delivers superior design flexibility while effectively preventing overheating risks that commonly plague projects using traditional deemed-to-satisfy provisions and simplified calculation methods. Join Darren O'Dea, CEO of Better Building, as he guides you through a proven, streamlined process to seamlessly integrate NCC 2022 Specification 44 energy modeling into your daily practice. In just one hour, you'll master this powerful approach to: * Unlock greater value and differentiation for your clients * Expand your design possibilities with confidence * Equip your team to identify and eliminate risks before they become costly problems Leave this session ready to implement comprehensive energy modeling for under $50 per month, transforming what was once a cost barrier into a competitive advantage. [Linkedin Sign-up](https://www.linkedin.com/events/7355768651880304641/) # Navigating H1-VM1 for Residential Buildings 22.07.25

New Zealand's H1-VM1 energy modeling pathway for residential buildings has long been part of the building code, but it's only recently gained traction. As the stringency within H1 has increased, architects and engineers are discovering its true potential. This session will explore how H1-VM1 can offer greater design flexibility while also preventing the risk of overheating, a common issue when relying solely on Schedule and Calculation modelling pathways. Join Darren O'Dea, CEO of Better Building, as he guides you through a streamlined process to integrate H1-VM1 energy modeling into your practice. In just one hour, you'll learn how to leverage this powerful tool to: * Deliver greater value to your clients. * Enhance your design capabilities. * Empower your internal team to foresee and mitigate risks associated with traditional schedule and calculation methods. By the end of this session, you'll be fully equipped to undertake energy modelling for less than $50 a month using the platform, making cost concerns a thing of the past. [Attend here](https://www.linkedin.com/events/7353185952233631744/comments/) # New On-demand Course Policies 21.07.25 For the past year, all our on-demand courses have been freely available. We're now evolving our approach to better support your journey. Going forward, your access to these valuable courses will align with your chosen plan: Lite, Classic, Plus, or Premium.

Each Plan now includes a curated bundle of courses, specifically designed to provide the most relevant support for the features available to you. We've thoughtfully selected the most useful courses for each plan's focus, ensuring you'll have exactly what you need, right at your fingertips. From **July 21**, access to our On-demand courses are as follows: * **Included in Bundles**\ Access is now part of our annual plan bundles, check below for what’s included in each tier. * **Team Courses – $99 each/30 day access**\ Available to Lite and Classic users who want targeted training normally included in higher-tier plans. * **Advanced Courses – $249 each/per person/30 day access**\ A new range of in-depth training, including content on non-Better Building software. More details coming soon. {% hint style="success" %} Our On-Demand courses qualify as Continuing Professional Development (CPD), typically categorised as informal CPD points, with each hour of activity equating to one point. All On-Demand courses involve a self-directed learning component, followed by a formal Q\&A session requiring a minimum 80% pass mark. A Certificate of Completion will be issued upon successful completion. We advise you to consult with the receiving entity to confirm the certificate's applicability to their scheme's specific requirements. {% endhint %} | Course Title | Lite | Classic | Plus | Premium | | ------------------------ | :--: | :-----: | :--: | :-----: | | Geometry - Commercial | - | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Geometry - Residential | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | H1 AS1 & VM1 | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | H1 AS2 & VM2 | - | - | ✅ | ✅ | | NCC 2022: J1V3 | - | - | ✅ | ✅ | | Dew Point | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Moisture | - | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Themes | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Daylight | - | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Total R-values | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | NCC 2022: J1V5 | - | - | ✅ | ✅ | | DTS Façade Calcs | - | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Part J4 Building Fabric | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | 3D Geometry in SketchUp | - | - | ✅ | ✅ | | BESS: Daylight Access | - | - | ✅ | ✅ | | DQLS: Daylight Modelling | - | - | ✅ | ✅ | | HVAC Sizing | - | - | - | ✅ | | Green Star: Daylight | - | - | ✅ | ✅ | | CIBSE TM59 | - | - | ✅ | ✅ | | G7 Natural Light | - | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | | Advanced Shading | - | - | ✅ | ✅ | | IDF Exports and Imports | - | - | ✅ | ✅ | | 2D to 3D Specification | - | - | ✅ | ✅ | # Building Simulation 2025: Day 1 12.07.25 Get ready for [BS2025](https://bs2025.org/), it's shaping up to be massive! And this incredible list of 176 papers is just a taste of Day 1's content. Prepare to dive deep into crucial topics like advanced energy modelling, urban climate resilience, lifecycle carbon analysis, and cutting-edge AI-driven design. Discover innovative approaches to smart systems, renewable energy, and data-driven simulations that are genuinely shaping tomorrow's built environment. Your next big insight is undoubtedly waiting among these pioneering presentations. ## Climate Change Mitigation and Adaptation * Future Overheating Risks in Buildings complying with current Codes * Urban heat resilience evaluation and climate-responsive urban design for climate change adaptation * Assessing the impact of future climate on building energy performance with downscaled weather data in Korea * Energy-efficient building spatial layout strategies under future climate change scenarios * Bio-retrofit: Potential of mycelium-based composites to future-proof India and Australia’s residential buildings against extreme climate events post-2040 * Divergent: Passive buildings provide thermal resilience in a dystopian warming climate. * Embodied carbon emissions of the residential building stock in the united states and the effectiveness of mitigation strategies * Towards a low-carbon countryside: Lifecycle embedded carbon emission analysis and reduction recommendations for farmhouses in Ningbo * Predicting Energy Demand discrepancies in building simulation under climate change for thermally sensitive mental health care environments * How much will future climate change affect building retrofits for energy equity? * Urban climate control strategies and buildings’ retrofitting: a simulation study in the UNESCO heritage site of Valparaiso, Chile * Building for the Future – considering future weather and extremes in assessing building energy efficiency * Modeling the impact of diverse extreme climate scenarios on residential buildings with renewable energy and storage in cold regions: A techno-economic analysis * Single family residence energy efficiency impacts on emissions reduction and energy saving life cycle analysis * Estimating life-cycle carbon mitigation potential of building integrated photovoltaics (BIPV) facade at the city scale * Techno-economic and environmental feasibility study of non-cloud based Smart Dual Fuel Switching System (SDFSS) for hybrid space heating in cold climates * How optimal building decarbonization pathways differ when considering energy burden and job creation * Steering Building Design in India towards net zero with a Whole-Building Carbon Protocol * Optimizing a latent heat energy storage tank for a solar collector system: moving towards zero carbon. * Alternative pathway for a nearly zero emission building stock in 2050 * ZEB retrofit planning methodology for existing office buildings using building energy simulation * Exploring the energy and CO2 emissions implications of climate-responsive design strategies applied to residential dwellings in Latin America ## Energy Efficiency and Sustainability * IFC-based semiautomated building energy model creation and simplification for Building Energy Simulations * Building performance analysis at the design stage: A study into the challenges of BIM and BEM integration in the Swedish AEC industry * Building Information Model (BIM) and Life Cycle Analysis tools: A comparative study with specialized software for environmental performance of buildings * Comparative analysis of cost-benefit quantification methods for equitable resource allocation in building stock decarbonization: A case study of a small US municipality * Dynamic factors in life cycle assessment: systematic review and categorization * Carbon emissions during the design and construction phases of public works: a case study of council housing in Taiwan * Multi-objective optimization design of windows combining granular aerogel glazing and double glazing systems * Integrating spatial proximity analysis and explainable machine learning to evaluate building energy retrofit potential under urban heat island effects * Using EPPY scripts to enable automated building electrification modeling with flexibility and scalability * From correlation to causality: Heat pump control with field data using Double Machine Learning (DML) * Identification of simplified control strategies in multisource optimisation for electric demand flexibility in building energy management * A decision-making method based on economic and environmental life cycle analysis for sustainable controlled environment agriculture (CEA) design and operation * Using timber-based panels to retrofit old university buildings in Korea for carbon emission reduction: A comparative study using LCA and energy performance evaluation * Operational carbon impact of integrating alternative cooling systems and renewables in arid homes * Clarifying carbon reduction claims and pathways to their achievement using real-world buildings * Renewable energy communities in Sweden: a techno-economic analysis of single-owner, multiple-consumer building-level energy sharing * Design guidance for net zero energy mixed-use buildings in Seoul * RapidRate’s role in helping Australia move towards zero carbon homes * Activation strategies for decentralized booster heat pumps based on dynamic pricing models * Simultaneous heating and cooling in museums: evaluation of micro-encapsulated phase change slurry as a thermal storage medium for multi-purpose heat pumps * Modeling and integration of photovoltaic thermal hybrid solar collectors in a fifth-generation district heating and cooling network * Verification of the accuracy of the Degree Day method using building simulation * A comparative study of residential building energy performance in Belgium utilizing three different solar panel configurations * A shadow-cost-based long-term model predictive controller for a solar-based district heating system with tank thermal energy storage * Advanced solar radiation decomposition model: utilizing Random Forest-Symbolic Regression across diverse climatic zones * Quantifying the compound impact of urban heat island and climate change on cuilding energy consumption in Nanjing’s traditional urban center * Developing building shape indexes at the city-scale for understanding building energy consumption * Shaving monthly peak load by overestimating future load in microgrid model predictive control * A knowledge graph-based performance evaluation framework for sustainable residential block design * Characterization of the building stock in the mountain environment: correlations between natural context, building geometry and energy performance * Practically feasible and novel approach for predicting electrical power demand of multiple dwellings using a digital tool in building services industry * A Q-Lattice and EnergyPlus coupled modelling approach to estimate HVAC energy consumption and natural ventilation usages * Adaptation of the heating curve for heating systems * Review of a dynamic simulation approach for heating system sizing * Development of a simulation tool to assess heat pump integration in Canadian homes * Optimization of cold climate air-air heat pump sizing using simulation data * Energy consumption pattern analysis of housing in warm-humid climate * Developing practical approaches and tools for optimizing zeb designs * Impact of Space Utilization on Energy Cost and Energy Performance of a nearly Zero-Emissions Office Building * Impact of refrigerant undercharge and overcharge faults on building indoor conditions and HVAC system performance during cooling seasons: Field measurements * Radiant floors as a feasible solution for residential heating and cooling: a simulation-based performance analysis * The impact of irregular days on machine learning predictions of office building load and corresponding optimization * Quantum approximate optimisation algorithm (QAOA) for surplus energy distribution in urban microgrids * Archetype generation for the district-scale Life Cycle Assessment of buildings * Coupling of multi-zone dynamic energy simulations with life cycle assessment for residential building renovation * Implementing Dynamo in IFC2Modelica framework for enhanced parametrization * Innovative Miscanthus-based materials * A data‐driven approach for simulating the energy performance of closed‐loop hydronic heating systems * Evaluating the Practical Energy Saving Potential of a Personal Cooling System in the Tropics * Simple Tool to Evaluate the Performance of Model Predictive Control of Space Heating in the Early Stages of Building Design * Energy performance assessment of climate adaptive building envelopes using shading masks * Thermo-bimetal responsive building skins: comparative analysis of self-actuated geometric patterning and user override on daylight and energy efficiency * Surrogate modeling of heat transfer in 3D-printed facades with active learning * A stable geometry transformation module from 3D geometry data to building energy model * A cross-scale normative encoding representation method for 3D building models suitable for graph neural networks * Building Performance Simulation of a semitransparent Trombe wall Coupled with a Latent Thermal Energy Storage * Variations in Operational Performance of an Occupant-Centric Design due to Uncertainties in Occupants and Building Operation * Simplifying decision-making in model-based co-design of building energy systems through automatically generated optimal controls * Prediction of internal pressure and door operation risk in high-rise buildings under time-varying external conditions ## Innovative Design Exploration and Industry Transformation * Using Large Multimodal Models (LMM) to digitalize scanned HVAC Schematics into Metadata Schemas for Buildings * A workflow for designing VR experiments for daylight and view-out studies using real-time stereoscopic videos * Exploring the consistency of UGR calculations, measurements, and evaluations * Exploring on evaluation of human response to indoor daylighting environment using UE5 virtual reality modelling: a pilot study * Data-driven assessment of daylight metrics for building visual environmental quality * Validation of multispectral simulation tools for predicting non-visual lighting metrics across diverse daylight scenarios * Comparative Analysis of Glare Indices in indoor Environments Affected by Reflected Sunlight * Comparative analysis of daylight, view, and visual privacy: a New York City case study * Including households’ comfort elasticities in model predictive controllers * BuildSysPro-IAQ : Impact of Energy systems in French residential buildings on IAQ and Energy Consumption * Assessing inter-sensor variability and calibration of low-cost IAQ sensors through co-location with reference devices * Depressurization risk assessment in multi-unit residential buildings using pressurized corridor ventilation systems * Experimental and simulated study on thermal environment of large-scale indoor spaces using radiant panel heating-cooling system * Analysis of the influence of CCT and Ra of common lighting sources on visual experience and energy efficiency * Evaluating front yard greenery for enhanced indoor environmental quality and energy efficiency * Performance comparison of lighting design objectives parameters based on calculation and simulation: case study of a pool hall and café * Lighting quality evaluation in underground public spaces — An integrated field and simulation study * Exploring energy implications in a mixed-mode building by linking air quality and occupant behaviour * Personal Comfort Models in shared spaces: a review of trends, challenges, and future directions * Machine learning-driven optimal control method for subway station VAC systems * A novel occupant-centric control framework for building to urban scale hybrid-energy simulation * Generation of synthetic load profiles for different typologies of residential users through metadata-driven generative AI models * The Cornwall: Improving wellbeing for rural older population in cold climates using locally available agriculture waste. * Socio-techno-economic optimization of energy systems with seasonal thermal storage: a study on a Swiss single-family house * From Poverty to Power- Investigating essential energy services in low-income households in developing nations * Rebuilding in conflict-affected built environments: a simulation-based framework * An integrated EnergyPlus simulation framework for Building Information modelling based building envelope generative design * Development and comparison of urban morphological solar energy and building energy consumption models using ANN and linear regression * Thermal performance predictor for campus exterior spaces: a smart campus mobile application development * Development of convolutional neural network-based turbulence modelling framework for outdoor wind field simulation * Fast prediction of urban wind distribution with deep learning-based surrogate models * Shaping digital twins: exploring uav and web-based 3d modeling technologies for sustainable building simulation * Predicting urban air temperature using UVA Infrared thermography and an artificial neural network * Urbanflow: an AI-driven platform for collaborative, multidisciplinary building-level and urban-scale analysis * Innovative approach to enhancing the reliability of urban microclimate simulations * Optimizing urban open space morphology for enhanced cooling and ventilation performance * Reducing the gap between predicted and measured urban microclimate through handling parameter uncertainty and model form uncertainty * The influence of ancient city wall on cooling effect of water: A case study of Nanjing Ming City Wall * CFD Simulation Analysis of the Impact of Additions on the Environment of Historical Settlements under Humid and Hot Climate Conditions * Clustering-based framework for large urban studies: A case study in Taipei City * Identification of simple dynamic Building-Stock Energy Models for the heat dynamics in residential buildings * Optimization of HVAC planning of large high-ceiling room for spacecrafts and satellites using CFD and optimization algorithm * Building design approach in stack effect calculation for complex cases. Multi-instrumental solution * Demonstrating the feasibility of LLMs to develop complex building energy models * Integrating artificial intelligence in urban design: A neural network-driven approach for noise mitigation optimization * Transfer learning of surrogate models for building energy prediction ## Urban Planning and Smart Cities * Urban microclimatic simulation as a tool for social cohesion and improvement in deprived areas, a case study * Long-term analysis of felt-based living green walls: microclimate monitoring and simulation calibration * Heat Where It Hurts – Spatiotemporal weighting for efficient heat impact assessment in Vienna * High-resolution downscaling simulation of urban wind-thermal environments: An interpretable machine learning analysis of urban morphology * Machine Learning-based thermal environment classification and prediction for historical neighborhoods * Data acquisition on building systems and operations in Urban Building Energy Modeling * Deep learning-based surrogate modeling for optimal control of climate-responsive adaptive faCade systems * The influence of vegetation structure on urban microclimate: A CFD analysis of urban block and vegetation densities * Evaluating green roof performance in Korea: heating and cooling load impacts under future climate scenarios * Examining the effect of heat mitigating strategies on outdoor air temperatures in an educational facility under the hot humid climate of Oman * Geometric model, thermal environment of bus shelters and cooling behaviors of pedestrians in hot–humid areas—a case study in Guangzhou * The impact of Chinese wellness habits on cooling-related behaviors of urban residents * Optimization of ventilation corridor design parameters based on ventilation performance across different urban forms * Integrating CityJSON with building performance simulation: A case study of summer indoor overheating in Antwerp * A novel BIM-to-UHI workflow for integrating UHI analysis as a key driver in BIM retrofit projects * Scaling impact of urban green infrastructure on urban climate and energy: A critical review * Stochastic simulation of uncertain input parameter in urban building energy modelling * Urban form and energy demand- Impact of height and density height and density for low-energy design in Tropical climate * Urban building energy simulation for performance analysis of an energy community model in the Italian context * Constructing three-dimensional urban models for Urban Building Energy Modeling using UAV oblique imagery * Sensitivity analysis of albedo input settings for vertical facades in community-scale solar irradiance simulation * Urban spatial microclimate prediction with morphological map-based ensemble deep learning method * Empowering urban building energy modeling with city information models: A critical review on the benefits and challenges * Integrating UHIE mitigating measures in the urban planning process ## Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ) * IFC-based setup of interior spaces for thermal comfort simulations using CFD * Evaluating the effectiveness of building retrofit strategies for reducing indoor overheating risks in elderly apartments * Implications of window opening assumptions in English overheating regulation on assessing residential heat resilience under uncertain climate * Nationwide longitudinal study on summertime overheating risk in English care homes * Evaluating occupant behavior model performance considering long-term time use change * How to combine direct and indirect adiabatic cooling into an air handling unit for resilient tertiary buildings * Analytical dehumidification performance evaluation of a novel window-type liquid desiccant ventilation system based on CFD simulation * The influence of vegetation on the thermal comfort of open transitional spaces * Investigating the built-environment and behavioural prerequisites for occupant satisfaction within the low-income settlements of Mumbai, India # New Course - Flows: Project Management 10.07.25 We are thrilled to announce the release of our comprehensive new course, Flows: Project Management. This course is meticulously designed to equip building professionals with the skills to effectively leverage the 'Flows' solution for seamless project tracking and enhanced collaboration.

## Course Overview: This course provides a thorough understanding of 'Flows,' a robust project management solution for the building sector. Participants will learn how to harness 'Flows' for comprehensive progress tracking, from initial design phases right through to project completion. ## What You'll Learn: * **Understanding Flow Structures:** Master the hierarchical system of main flows and nested sub-flows for optimal project organisation. * **Efficient Project Initiation:** Learn to set up various project types, including automated 'One-off Projects' and flexible 'Independent Projects' tailored for diverse processes. * **Detailed Workflow Management:** Gain expertise in adding sub-flows, assigning 'doer' and 'reviewer' roles, and linking designs directly to their respective workflows. You'll also learn to implement 'Multi-stage Project Flows' to manage projects through distinct phases. * **Comprehensive Progress Tracking:** Understand how the system automatically tracks time spent on design work within sub-flows, enabling accurate effort assessment and accumulation. * **Enhanced Review & Collaboration:** Become proficient in navigating work status progressions and utilising the flexible options available to reviewers, such as approval, returning work for revisions, or placing tasks on hold. * **Integrated Communication & Access:** Discover how automatic email notifications keep relevant individuals informed and how reviewers gain quick, direct access to associated models via dedicated links for efficient review and commentary. The course also covers creating new flows for existing projects. ## Who is this course for? This course is ideally suited for building professionals seeking to optimise their project management practices and improve collaborative workflows within the Better Buildings environment. ## How to Enrol: The Flows: Project Management course is [now available](/support-and-training/on-demand-courses/flows-project-management). Enrol today to elevate your project management capabilities. # Flows: An Introduction (Webinar) 09.07.25 Flows is now available, with the aim of boosting project efficiency by offering a comprehensive way to manage projects. It allows users to connect their designs to a project management system, enabling them to track progress throughout a project's lifecycle, including setting goals, managing timelines, assigning roles, and facilitating reviews. ## Webinar - 09.07.25 {% embed url="." %}

Transcript

00:14 hi all. Let's, uh, let's go ahead and jump into this session. So, uh, thanks a million for jumping on. I do appreciate, uh, everyone's time. \ 00:22 Um, I'll try and scoot through this in 20 minutes or so. It's a promise that I very rarely keep getting these things done on time, but I will do my best. \ 00:31 Um, now, uh, we'll just jump into it. Uh, a lot of you guys know, know who I am. If you don't, my name is, uh, Darren. \ 00:41 I'm one of the, uh, guys behind the platform previously known as Speckle. Still getting used to not calling the platform Speckle. \ 00:49 Um, but we've, uh, we've had, um, a lot of support as we've transitioned over from Speckle to better building, and, um, we really do, do appreciate it. \ 01:00 Uh, I've got the, the praise hands, the thank you hands here just because I wanted to give a thank you both to the folks that have been supporting us for all these years as we've kind of transitioned over to really what we believe we represent now is a more of an all-in-one solution for sustainability \ 01:18 . And we'll design as opposed to pretty much a specification platform for our failures, believe it or not, that's where we started. \ 01:24 Uh, but also that those, those, uh, thank you little hands there were for, um, Alistair, who has been deeply involved in this project, one of the team in Melbourne. \ 01:36 And, uh, he has come up with, uh, I think something that is a really great solution for project management and project, uh, quality assurance. \ 01:48 And that's very much what we'll be talking about today. So I'm going to turn that camera off there for a second so I can focus and we'll get into it. \ 01:55 So many of you if you haven't been on my platform since we rebranded, you know, if you don't like our energy, you may, uh, not like the look of the platform, but we've got loads of support and we, we pretty much, uh, really, uh, rebranded the platform because, uh, because of two things we're, uh, venturing \ 02:16 overseas now. So we're, we, uh, operating further overseas than New Zealand. We up until now been in Australia, New Zealand market, uh, but we're operating in, uh, South America now, uh, the U S, uh, and we're providing more and more support for folks over there. \ 02:32 So we really wanted something that was a bit more self-explanatory from a branding perspective. And also there was a actually another company called Speckle systems overseas. \ 02:43 And we wanted to make sure that there was a departure, uh, from, uh, you know, from people confusing us with them. \ 02:52 So, um, yeah, so let's, uh, let's get into it. So we've got a website, uh, better building.io go ahead and have a look at us. \ 03:00 Uh, we've also got some docs now. I just wanted to spend a couple of minutes just talking about the docs because it did take me the best part of two months to rewrite the documentation. \ 03:11 So yes, I did get a little bit of help from AI, but there's only so far it can actually take you. \ 03:18 So go ahead and do check out the docs because, uh, there is a lot of detail in here. Um, and they have been completely rewritten. \ 03:28 So if there were gaps that we were, we had left from a documentation point of view, and I know there were quite a few, I'd say that documentation was probably about 70% previously. \ 03:40 This should take us back up to about 90 odd percent. And you'll see lots of information in here that should make your life easier. \ 03:49 Speaking of making your life easier this AI search function has now been enabled both on the platform and is also enabled here and you really will get lots of answers from this that weren't previously available because effectively the, uh, the, the, uh, language model is learning our documentation. \ 04:14 So it should get better and better with time. Uh, just by way of an introduction, go ahead, write a question, topical question in terms of today's session. \ 04:24 how do I create a flow and you'll get some answers very very quickly. This is available all across the platform and in our documentation so lots of support there. \ 04:38 Getting into flows, what is a flow? Well, as the claim states here, uhm, every project starts with a flow and what that means is that we are engaging in effectively project management on all new projects moving forward. \ 04:54 Uhm, we will be, uh, effectively creating a flow and you'll learn what that is over the next ten minutes. but simply put a flow allows you to set project goals allows you to engage in timelines so deadlines key milestones keep your project on track it allows you to assign responsibilities to team members \ 05:22 whether that's someone doing the work or someone reviewing the work it allows you to effectively track multiple projects all at one time and look at the efficacy related to the delivery of projects it allows you to review so it has a dedicated kind of review system that if you imagine a project project \ 05:45 A has got to a point and person A or B or C has delivered part of that work then they can submit a review to and then that reviewer can then accept or reject and provide information to back to the person and finally reports this is lagging a bit this particular feature but reports enables you to effectively \ 06:07 see exactly how much time and effort is being undertaken on in certain designs in certain projects so you could again balance the efficacy of potentially the the project value versus how much resources were committed to it and go from there so lots of stuff here but we're going to go straight into demos \ 06:30 so effectively this discussion here for 10 minutes will go for will be about how to use this it's available now on the platform and you're going to engage in it to start with in one or two ways we imagine you're going to either going to create a flow from an existing project or you're going to effectively \ 06:50 use the system uh the automator system to create a flow automatically for a new project and then i'm going to give a couple of examples of how flows can be used Okay, so we jump in here, let's navigate. \ 07:06 So a bunch of screenshots here, we don't even need to go to the platform, effectively I've just taken all of these off of production, off the actual production this morning, so we can be as clear as possible as to how you would engage in flows. \ 07:22 Over on the left hand side there, you can see the term flows, this is where you will potentially engage in it but you can engage in it in multiple places. \ 07:33 Now you're seeing a big blank screen here, there are no flows at all in here at the moment, so what we're going to do to start with is we're going to create a flow for an existing project. \ 07:46 So I just happen to have an existing project here, it's called Mixed Use Buildings, and I want to go ahead and create a flow. \ 07:55 So attach effectively a project management system them. To this project, there's nothing there at the moment, so I've got to do a little bit of work. \ 08:06 I'm going to navigate into the project itself and I guess by way of this introduction there is an assumption here that you've seen the platform already and I'm looking at the list of names here and I can see most of the names are certainly people that have engaged in the platform. \ 08:23 So I just step back there for a second, you've got a project, you click on the project, you go into the project and then you want to go and effectively go and create a flow so you're going to navigate there to the left and then you're going to find yourself with another blank screen because we've got \ 08:41 no flow created. So we're going to create a flow, okay. Click create flow, okay, and then we're going to nominate some information into this form here and it's going to be the title, the start date and the end date and the project manager involved in the flow, okay. \ 09:04 So first of all, let's call this concept design, okay, it's a name, it could be anything. okay the concept design is the title of the flow the start and the end date I've just popped this to the 23rd of this month so that's starting I guess that's starting today and it runs to the 23rd of this month \ 09:25 and then I've assigned myself as the project manager what that means is that if someone is working on a design and submits that design to a flow they are effectively they are doing the work and then I being me being the project manager will receive information about that project moving forward so I can \ 09:46 go ahead and review it. So it's a start we click create and then we navigate back to the flow area. \ 09:55 But before we do just by way of a quick clarity you will receive an email about this so you as the I guess the reviewer or the project manager you will go ahead and find this is created and it's flicked over to you so you can then hit that link there and then that will take you over to this next screen \ 10:21 here. So this is kind of giving you that timeline saying okay cool we're we're hitting off today and it's running toward the 23rd something called concept design has been created and it's related to this mixed use building project but really it's just saying okay there's there's work that's going to \ 10:39 be done here the fundamental piece missing at this point in time is well what is that work okay so we're going to add in a flow now and just click add flow and then once you do you'll see another project so effectively what we're doing is adding in a sub flow at this point in time so it's directly connected \ 10:59 to that flow that project management concept design stage there And we're saying okay, do you know what we're going to do? \ 11:07 We're going to do it a J1 V3 model And we're going to put it into this concept design stage And we're going to we're going to track this component because this is what we want to connect to We want to know how much time is being, uhm, is being, I guess, used to deliver against this J1 V3 And we've got \ 11:30 a bit of information that we need to populate So, subject to what's, who's in your team, those team members are going to be available in the drop down menus for assignee Assignee and for Reviewer. \ 11:45 So in this case, let's say I'm a lone soldier, I'm the Assignee plus I'm the Reviewer. That could be a scenario, very likely to be a scenario for many. \ 11:56 But or you could see it could be David Carroll, my partner in crime. He could be the Assignee and then I would be the Reviewer, meaning Dave would be doing the work and I would be reviewing. \ 12:10 Once you add those in, quite simply, you set the start and end dates. So in this particular example, I've just set the exact same start and end days as the, as the concept design. \ 12:22 So it's just saying, yeah, you've got this much time to do the work and then you set the goal. So you just slap in exactly what you want that person to do. \ 12:31 So I'm effectively telling myself what I'm going to do here but if the assignee was Dave then I would be saying okay, Dave, you know, assess the current building design. \ 12:41 Here's some attached drawings and you can see a file in the next step and you're going to run a J1V3 model. \ 12:48 Okay, that's what you're going to do. And you're going to attach your drawings here and push them, push them straight over. \ 12:53 And then there's an add to end, which is just a function to organize how the flow appears. Not particularly important from in this conversation. \ 13:03 And then you're going to click create. And then once you do that, then you're going to go into this kind of summary screen where you can see the J1-V3 model so that's the subflow that we're working on you can see you can see the dates and you can amend and all of this. \ 13:20 So this is just really a bit of trivia to start with. You can see the goals. So this is going to be the constant goal for this flow. \ 13:29 And you know, from a goals perspective, you know, this could be a copy and paste from a proposal, for example, so that could be directly popped in there. \ 13:39 And then we've got something called links, which is where you actually link the design that you're working on to this flow to this J1-V3 model flow. \ 13:49 I'm going to show you a bit about that in a minute. And then you've got some history there where you can toggle between seeing all, seeing comments, seeing documents and seeing updates. \ 13:59 And this is just, this is going to build out over time in order for you to effectively track everything related to the communication of this flow. \ 14:11 And you can see how this is beneficial because it means that you lock in all information into one place. Next step, you go ahead and start the flow. \ 14:22 So we've just locked in data, we've locked in information, we've locked in the intent do something but we haven't actually said that we're going to start doing that something. \ 14:31 So we then go ahead and start the work and then we're going to then want to link to a design. \ 14:39 So once you left click this, you go ahead and find yourself a design. So I'm just going to grab that concept model there. \ 14:49 It is a model and it allows us to then see in the building modeling and you'll see this in walls, roofs, floors, whatever, everywhere else. \ 15:00 There is this nomination of link to flow and this provides the person doing the work, the ability to connect back to the project management and effectively all they're going to do is say, do you know what, I'm going to link to the flow and they're automatically going to see the population. \ 15:19 Of the flows available to them. So in this case, we've only got J1 V3, right? So they're going to link that. \ 15:27 And that's really it. So by the time they link that back, then we can start to see the momentum where tracking is enabled on the platform. \ 15:38 So you've got this connection now between what someone is doing and the summation of the project management. And that's really interesting, because then it can kind of give you an idea of where things are at as you go at the beginning of each week, for example, or each month, depending on the duration \ 15:55 of the projects, and it provides a form of guidance. A form discussion, really, and this area here in particular is going to grow out to have a lot more value added to us once we start stepping through this next stage and getting feedback from you. \ 16:12 So the more we hear back from you guys, the better it is, because we can then really hone down as to what is useful. \ 16:21 Now, let's go ahead and jump back into the J1-V3 because I wanted to show how now that design is linked, so that concept of the design being linked is there, and that could, that linked design could be 10 designs, could be 20 designs for all we know, we don't know what you're doing or don't care what \ 16:40 you're doing, we just enable the facility for you to track as many designs as you want. Next, we're going to want to take the next step in the process, we're going to want to submit this for review. \ 16:56 So if you're doing the work, you can go, OK, I've done what I wanted to do, I'm going to submit this for a review, and here I've updated this so David Carroll is now the reviewer so you can change this as you go along should you want it should things change and I've just said hey can you please review \ 17:16 for submission to the project team all all glazing wall roof systems have been checked against specifications will issue report once you have given me the OK now if I know Dave he will be going through this with a fine tooth comb and once he's done so he's going to well he's going to receive a link and \ 17:36 he's going to say hey I need to go and review this for Darren and then once he gives me go ahead then it's back to here where we can then update the project to be complete or the flow to be complete and effectively close it out at that point in time. \ 17:55 And then effectively what we'll see moving forward is that the accumulator cumulative number of hours will be presented in order for you to assess the success of the project and you'll be able to, I guess, see where people need more support, need less support, you'll be able to keep everything locked \ 18:15 down in the same place and, yeah, really, provide a consistent way of reviewing information in a in a way that is directly connected to the project rather than having some third-party way to do this. \ 18:33 So this is all available now and that right there was an example to create a flow from a existing project. \ 18:40 Now I'm going to jump over into a secondary example to create a flow from a new project, okay. So creating a flow from a new project is super easy, okay, where you can currently add a project and I'm going to call this one new flow example, terrible name, but we'll give it a and we'll give it a start \ 19:05 date and an end date and we'll give it project manager just happens to be me once again and now when you do this on your next project you're automatically going to be generated a flow new flow example and once you do that you can go through the same process that I've just shown you and add lots of flows \ 19:28 so effectively flows can be three deep so in this particular example I've said okay cool I've got new flow don't don't know what it is don't care what it is I have subflow one subflow 1.1 subflow 1.1.1 and these can all be interconnected to the main new flow example and And light as possible to to try \ 20:01 and not make it an overbearing tasking you know task orientated process. Effectively this would this would displace other trivial management processes in a flash and it could represent it could represent one of a number of use cases. \ 20:20 Now I I personally think this is where things will kick off okay this is where you have this kind of one-off project flow and you've got a project and that that project X there is your so-called project flow okay so this is just a nomination that I use project flow is the main core flow and then beneath \ 20:44 that you have a subflow subflow so it doesn't make a difference what it is whether it's h1 whether it's j1 v3 j1 v5 whatever it is that's how it would be managed the most simple version of this is that and I see that being super useful because it means that at least you can start tracking the efficacy \ 21:04 of your of your designs and how much time you spend on projects and get a feel for where improvements can be made and potentially other things that we haven't thought about. \ 21:16 So that's the one-off project flow, the simple version. Then you've got this kind of what I call a multi-staged project flow so where that you've still got this project and the project is the main thing that you're focused on but then you've got multiple stages you've got concept design schematic design \ 21:36 and detail design and they've all got sort of energy models and data models within them so a very quick easy example wasn't meant to be overly complex but then you've you know then we'll call the concept design stage, the schematic design stage, the detail design stage in construction they're going to \ 21:53 be subflows and beneath those then you can have energy models and daylight models. You could orchestrate your entire entire project around this so that would represent a multi-stage project flow. \ 22:08 Finally, you may very well have flows that are completely independent from the platform and I'm just going to give one one completely independent which would be a pass fast certification for example and the other would be Greenstar where you may have some modeling or something like that being undertaken \ 22:30 . But you'll be able to do this in exactly the same way here where effectively project flows and sub flows can all be added in the mix in order to account for them across the project. \ 22:42 And as we move forward for this kind of independent project flow, what we're working on at the moment is a feature where you can effectively send a link to anyone directly from the platform and say that hey I need information for X for example for a Greenstar credit and then they actually provide you \ 23:05 the information through a little form and the ability to upload information and then that automatically gets populated straight into the subflow itself. \ 23:16 The same is true Passive House Certification. The platform for certification at the moment is less than nice to deal with. \ 23:25 So this process allows you to go OK, cool, I need my material information provided from a supplier, from a builder, from a designer, whoever it is, please dump your insulation products into this flow. \ 23:42 and therefore I can then review it and close it out all in one place where you've got a seamless communication with the other party and they're effectively doing the work for you rather than you having to receive information find a home for it. \ 23:59 And that makes me so much more sense when you're planning projects. So there you go, I have kind of kept, kept on time. \ 24:08 It went for 25, 26 minutes. I'm going to crack that open for questions. I'm going to, let me do the first one. \ 24:17 Did that make sense? Just a hand up, or we can open up the mics, if you give me some, it did? \ 24:31 Yep, it did. Thank you. I just had one question, Darren, can we edit the end dates and start dates? Absolutely, you can edit everything. \ 24:41 Sorry, I didn't pick up on that one. I should have made that clearer. Everything is editable, so you can, you know, if someone, if someone, if the team changes, you can change the people associated to the designs. \ 24:55 You can change the start date, the end date. You can put the, put the flow on hold. You know how projects go on hold, right? \ 25:03 some will go on hold for a year, two years, some will go on hold for two weeks. You want to be able to do all of that so that it's that type of that type of feedback that I'm really hoping to get moving forward over the next month or two. \ 25:19 Because we want to realistically have this as a, as a value add, particularly for consultancy to ensure that they can keep everything organized as well as possible and see how to best prioritize, you know, things coming forward because, you know, obviously from a consultancy point of view, we often have \ 25:43 projects that only allow for a certain amount of time, let's say 10 hours, let's say 12 hours, let's say 20 hours. \ 25:49 and you really want to make sure that you know you can forecast moving forward that you've got enough work coming through the door so this is what this is intending to ultimately achieve down the line. \ 25:59 Thanks for that, Angad. Any other, any other questions there, guys? Thank you. My pleasure. So I didn't get any kind of feedback there on whether the presentation there was, was clear enough. \ 26:21 Can I just request that one again, just if you can put your hands up, raise your hand if you thought it was clear enough or if there's anything else that you'd like me to elaborate on. \ 26:31 Thanks Sim. Angelo, Ben, Steve. Okay, cool. We're going to get a bit of feedback there. Okay, cool. Hey, Alex. Um, thanks for that. \ 26:43 Um, that's fine. Uh, I never know how many people are actually actively listening. Um, so, um, yeah, um, that's great to get that feedback there. \ 26:53 Cool. Um, so, uh, next steps. Okay. Next steps are going to be, um, to, uh, bring a few more little things to the front and hopefully get as much feedback from you, from you guys now well I got a Justin's got a question for me here thank you Justin now Justin say it was clear I think it will make take \ 27:21 a few times playing with it to make pure sense fit Justin I completely agree um it there there is a I presented uh quite a lot here um so I think you are right um and one of the challenges we've had so far is that you know how much do we bring to the front because we've got more features that we could \ 27:41 have brought to the front but we wanted to really make the automation of the flow pertaining to a new project really the starting point of discussion so yeah I do agree do you think I'll get you to put your hands down for a second because I would just wanted to fire over another another question there \ 28:08 do you see it being something that could be potentially used for multiple projects across your your business or do you think that your in situ processes would would would be better for your business. \ 28:30 So has it got potential? Has it got legs? Because it's been one of the ones that's been definitely unclear for us as to what other folks are doing. \ 28:39 So it looks like it didn't receive any feedback on that one. Put a hand up if you think it has Angelo. \ 28:47 Thank you, mate. Can I make it Darren? Can I make a comment on that? It's Daniel here. Sure you can. \ 28:54 Yeah, so as I was watching it, it looks like it's producing a Gantt chart of your proposed workflows and targets. \ 29:05 And the reason I'm piping up now is because it's in direct response to what you just asked. Is there a way to view, because I'm just thinking how I may use it, Is there a way to view the current? \ 29:19 I suppose you would say status of all projects or is the workflow contained per job? It's both, Daniel. So you can see a top-down view of all flow activity across your team. \ 29:36 So if you've got a thousand flows, you can see a thousand flows. I don't know if you'd want to. So, you can filter those flows from a week to a month to a quarterly to a year view. \ 29:49 And then as you dive down into the project, then you're going to be only seeing the flows pertaining to that project. \ 29:58 So you have a both available. I didn't actually show the, the project one because, uh, uh, I guess I thought it might be, uh, probably going a bit too far in terms of the amount of information that we showed, but yes, you can, you can, um, and, uh, we'll, uh, we're coming, we're coming up with an archiving \ 30:17 functionality now as well for things that you no longer want to see, because trust me, by the time you start seeing loads and loads of flows, uh, you'll want a way of controlling them. \ 30:27 Um, uh, because because it can be a lot of information. Anyone else, guys? Okay. \ 30:46 Well, if that's it, uh, I will leave it there. Uh, feel free to hit, hit, hit us up as usual, um, in the, uh, in our support ticket system. \ 30:57 Um, and, uh, we'll get back to you as soon as possible. Um, again, thanks for your support over the last few weeks. \ 31:05 It has been, uh, an absolute rollercoaster getting us to, to this level. Uh, and we're about to kind of make a few more, uh, interesting steps before we really push for full-on international application of the of the platform now. \ 31:20 So, um, uh, this will be made available somewhere, probably, uh, probably in a new YouTube channel. Um, and, uh, we'll, um, um, yeah, leave it there. \ 31:30 So, uh, any feedback that you can provide would be super, super appreciated. Um, feedback is always, always, always a thing that we get the least amount when we, when we really legitimately want it. \ 31:42 So if you can provide any feedback, that would be awesome. Again, appreciate your time, guys. Best of luck with the project. \ 31:55 And yeah, keep flows in mind. Thanks, Aaron. Thank you.

# Building Simulation Workshop 06.07.25 As part of [Building Simulation 2025](https://bs2025.org/), [UNSW](https://www.linkedin.com/company/unsw/) and [Tsinghua University](https://www.linkedin.com/company/tsinghua-university/) are joining forces to host a free workshop in Sydney on August 29th.

If your interests lie in urban heat mitigation & adaptation, climate-resilient buildings and cities, net-zero carbon buildings, advanced modelling and simulation, or AI applications in the built environment, this is an event you won't want to miss.\ \ It's a fantastic opportunity to engage with leading experts and expand your knowledge in these critical areas.\ \ 🎫 Spaces are limited.. so register quick.
# MBIE Kicking Schedule Method to the Curb 05.07.25

The rumors were true! MBIE is ditching the stale Schedule Method for H1 insulation by late 2025. Good riddance; it often led to poor design and overheating.\ \ What's left? The Calculation and Modelling methods. These are effective, cheaper, and might save you $15,000 on a new home! Modelling promises better design flexibility, though the Calculation method still carries design risks with no consideration of solar loads. There's also concern that chasing savings might compromise construction quality.\ \ The kicker? Full implementation won't happen until 2027, as the 12-month transition is delayed a year. If it's about savings, why the wait? Let the market choose now!\ \ On a positive note, MBIE's exploring a separate Far North climate zone for insulation, which seems reasonable. Overall, it's about building smarter and more efficiently in NZ!\ \ 👉 Read More - # Lite: The New Low-cost H1 Solution 04.07.25

We're thrilled to announce [Lite](/sign-up-and-plans/plans), our brand-new, low-cost modelling plan designed for smaller better buildings! Time to bin those spreadsheets folks! Lite is specifically tailored for professionals working on residential projects up to 350m² in New Zealand. It's the perfect entry-level solution for small businesses, offering a single seat with the flexibility to pay as you go on a month-by-month basis at only $49 or $490 annually. Need to bring in more hands? You can easily add additional team members for just $24.50 per month. With Lite, you'll gain the power to conduct crucial assessments, including: * H1 AS1, AS2 and VM1 compliance * Thermal Bridging * Condensation Assessments * Carbon Assessments * Energy Modeling * Thermal Modeling * Daylight Modeling Start building better, more efficient homes today with Lite! [Grab a FREE 14-day trial today.](/sign-up-and-plans/demo-grab-a-trail) # Building Simulation 2025 05.07.25 Better Building is proud to support Building Simulation 2025, hosted in Brisbane from August 24–27, 2025.

Join us and global experts to explore how building performance simulation is shaping a net-zero future, without compromising health or comfort. This major event, presented by IBPSA Australasia and AIRAH, follows the successful 2023 conference in Shanghai. The conference features an impressive lineup of speakers, including: * **Associate Professor Jen Martin** (University of Melbourne): Keynote speaker renowned for her work in science communication. * **Winitha Bonney OAM**: Award-winning leader and speaker specializing in inclusion and organizational transformation. * **Professor Pieter de Wilde** (LTH Faculty of Engineering): Expert in AI applications in building performance simulation. * **Associate Professor Michael Donn** (Wellington School of Architecture): Focused on quality assurance in building performance simulation. * **Ian Beausoleil-Morrison** (Carleton University): Researcher in solar housing and occupant behavior. * **Veronika Richter** (RWTH): Specialist in linking BIM to building energy models. * **Ang Yu Qian** (National University of Singapore): Presenter on urban building energy modeling. Find out more: [bs2025.org](https://bs2025.org/) ## Ticket giveaway As proud sponsors, Better Building is thrilled to be supporting the IBPSA Australasia /AIRAH Building Simulation Conference 2025. This is the event for anyone serious about sustainable building, net-zero goals, and cutting-edge design. Check out the program here: \ \ We've got **2 free general registration tickets up for grabs (worth $1400 each!!!!!)**, and we want to ensure they go to passionate individuals like you, or someone you know! Here's how to enter:\ \ 👍 Like or share [this post](https://www.linkedin.com/feed/update/urn:li:activity:7352866975959670785/?actorCompanyId=40954051) with your social network to spread the word.\ 🗣️ Tell us one innovative idea (in Linkedin comments) you have for making buildings more sustainable.\ \ We'll select the lucky winners on Friday, August 1st at 3 PM AEST. Good luck, and hope to connect with you at BS2025! # Speckel Has Evolved – Say Hello to Better Building After six years of dedicated development, Speckel is formally retiring on the 30th of June 2025. What began as a local platform focused on building material specification with a focus on the building envelope, is now a global mission: Better Building, an all-in-one solution for sustainable design.

We've grown beyond our roots in Melbourne, Australia, to support projects around the world, championing low-carbon, efficient, and resilient built environments that go far beyond compliance. More than a brand, Better Building reflects our belief that every building can improve, through innovation, accessibility, and impact. Our platform will continue to evolve, addressing diverse global needs while remaining affordable and educational, especially for developing regions. As we look ahead to the next five years, we invite you to join us on this journey, to empower design, enrich communities, and truly enable Better Buildings for everyone. ## What does this mean for you? Here’s a quick FAQ to walk you through what’s coming and what it means for you.

Why is Speckel updating the platform?

After six years of steady growth, Speckel has become much more than just an app for designing walls, roofs and floors. With hundreds of daily users and thousands more dropping in regularly, we’ve evolved into a full-featured all-in-one sustainable design platform. We’re now focused on enhancing the user experience, adding powerful new features and ensuring top-notch security. As we step into international markets, we’re also refining our brand to stand out, because while we love the name Speckel’ we’ve learned it can be a bit abstract in some regions.

What features are in the 2025 pipeline?

The 2025 roadmap is another a big one, with plenty of powerful new features on the way. Here’s a sneak peek at what we’re working on: * Detailed results analysis for energy modelling, giving you deeper insights and more control * Kiva integration for advanced ground floor calculations * Expanded workflows, including ASHRAE 90.1 compliance * Updates to our thermal bridging calculations for even greater accuracy * Improvements to hygrothermal simulations, helping you model moisture and heat movement more effectively

How long will the update to the platform take?

After months of careful planning, we’re thrilled to unveil a major refresh of the platform, packed with new features, improvements and a fresh new look. To complete the transition, the platform will be in maintenance mode from Friday 27 June to Sunday 29 June. During this time, access will be limited and support may be slower than usual, so we recommend holding off on platform use if possible. Alongside the above, we’ll continue adding new features that our community of users have requested throughout the rest of the year, with our full feature set expected to land by the end of 2025.

What happens to my existing Plan after 30 June?

All current Plans will transition to our new structure on 30 June and will switch over on your next billing cycle. For example, Essentials becomes Classic and Practice becomes Plus. There’s nothing you need to do, your account will be updated automatically. Read more about the new [Plans](/sign-up-and-plans/plans) here.

What features are changing between the old and new Plans?

The key differences are in model size limits and the number of users (seats) each [plan](/sign-up-and-plans/plans) includes.

Are Plan prices changing?

Yes. We’re introducing a new low-cost [Lite Plan](/sign-up-and-plans/plans) for solo users, while also adjusting prices on our existing Practice (+25%) and Enterprise Plans (+4%) to reflect added features and improvements. We believe our Plans still offer great value. Read More.

What is the new Lite Plan?

Lite is built for small-scale residential projects and low-carbon wall, roof and floor design. It supports buildings up to 350 m² and is ideal for NZ H1 or Spec 44 compliance. You’ll be able to generate reports via our Credit system at 25 credits per whole-building report.

What happens with monthly or annual payments after 30 June?

All ongoing payments will reflect the new Plan structure and pricing. If you’d like to lock in your current annual pricing, you’ll need to submit a written request by 30 June.

Are Plans still locking to a number of seats?

No. Each Pan can expand the number of seats in all new Plans, allowing additional team members to be added to a Plan without the need to upgrade.

Will I lose seats under the new Plans?

Only on the Premium Plan (Current Enterprise Plan). If you want to retain your current seat count, you can upgrade to an annual plan at the current rate, just let us know in writing before 30 June.

When is the last day I can purchase or update an existing Plan?

30 June is the final day for purchasing or updating any existing Plan. From 1 July onwards, only the new Plans will be available. For example, if you’re on a monthly Essentials Plan, your next billing cycle after 30 June will switch you to the Classic Plan.

What’s happening to the Community Plan?

We’re phasing out the Community Plan, as usage has declined over the past two years. You’ll still have access to your Projects until 31 August. After that, you can move to our new Lite Plan, which is designed to support smaller projects at a low cost. At the end of the year, all Community Plans will be deleted from our servers.

What’s changing with Supplier templates and products?

We’ll be reducing Supplier templates where Suppliers opt out of participating on the updated platform. However, verified Supplier Products will remain available as long as they’re kept up to date and reviewed.

Will the Terms & Conditions change with the new Plans?

Yes. All users will be prompted to review and agree to our new combined Platform Terms & Conditions, which consolidate all relevant policies in one place.

What are Flows?

Flows are a major new feature that help you manage your Project more efficiently by linking your Designs with a project management system. This lets you track, review and stay on top of everything throughout your project lifecycle.

Can I use Flows with existing Projects?

Yes, existing Designs within your current Projects can be updated to use Flows. It’s a great way to bring older Projects into the new workflow.

Can I still access On-Demand Training?

Our on-demand courses have been free for the past eight months, but from the 1st July, access will change. You will still be able to access the results of your existing training but all training modules will be updated and superseded during July. Access is now part of our annual plan bundles. Read More.

# Create your first Project Learn how to set up a Team, create a Project, apply a Flow and add a Design. This section walks you through the essentials. # Create a Team Teams are the central hub for all your Projects, providing a unified space for efficient project management and also act as a cost centre. As the Team Owner, you’re the super admin, fully in control of team settings, permissions, and collaboration. You manage members, projects, and access across your entire Team workspace. If a Team already exists within your office or organisation, locate the creator, they can add you as a Team Member for shared access and collaboration. **Team Owner -** When you create a Team, you become the Team Owner by default. As the Owner, you can invite Team Members to collaborate on Projects within that Team. **Team Member -** Invite Team Members to collaborate on Projects and Designs, reviewing, editing, and saving changes across the Team. The key distinction: Team Owners hold administrative privileges, Members do not. **Team Guest -** Invite Guests to your Invite Guests to specific Projects for design review and collaboration. Guests have view-only access, they cannot access your Team or other Projects, nor can they save changes to any Design. ## Create A Team To create a Team, start by assigning a Team 'Name', this is usually the name of your company or organisation. Avoid using Project names or individual names, as this can lead to confusion and limit scalability as your use of Better Building grows. Before setting up a new Team, it's important to check whether someone in your office, or perhaps in another regional location, is already using Better Building under an existing Plan. If they are, ask to be invited to join their Plan as a Team Member instead. This ensures everything stays connected and avoids creating duplicate Teams.

# Create a Project Create Projects from your Dashboard, they come preloaded with default settings for building code compliance and workflow. Each Project is linked to a single [Team](/create-your-first-project/create-a-team) to keep things organised. ## Start a Project Click ‘+ Create Project’ and add key details: 'Title', 'Project Code', 'Location', 'Storeys' (Estimated storeys of building), 'Floor-to-Floor Height' (Typical floor to floor height of building), 'Start and End Date', 'Project Manager' (A project manager plans, reviews, executes, and delivers projects), 'Building Code', 'Class', and 'Climate' Zone. These fields may vary by region and workflow, but they’re essential for auto-mapping the right local code, making compliance faster and easier. {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Start with a name and location To begin setting up a project, start by entering a 'Title' (typically the name of the Project), a 'Project Code' (typically an internal reference used to identify a Project), and a 'Location'. The location can be approximate (e.g. Melbourne) or a specific address, which can also be selected directly from the map. This location helps us automatically assign a relevant climate file for your Project.

{% endstep %} {% step %} ### Provide basic geometry Next, provide basic geometry information, including the number of 'Storeys' and the typical Floor to Floor Height', both of which can be adjusted later if needed.

{% endstep %} {% step %} ### Set up a Flow You’ll then create the Project Flow, which is the foundation of our project management system. Simply enter a 'Start and End Date', and assign a 'Project Manager'. A Project Manager plans, reviews, executes, and delivers projects. This can also be updated again later of things change.

{% endstep %} {% step %} ### Set up a Workflow Finally, set up a Workflow by choosing either a local building code or designer mode. If using a building code, you’ll need to specify the 'Building Class' and the 'Climate Zone'. Once these details are in place, hit '+Create' and you're ready to begin your first design.

{% endstep %} {% endstepper %} # Create a Flow A Flow is a simple yet powerful way to manage your project in Better Building. Simply put, they allow you to connect your Designs to a project management system to track them over the lifecycle of your project. ## Start a Flow Every project starts with a Flow, and we get the ball rolling for you. Once a Project is created, you can update the goals, timelines, assign roles, and track progress. You can also store project documents, review work, and generate reports to keep quality high and teams aligned. Everything you need, in one place. Throughout the Flow experience, you will receive emails to communicate the creation, submission and updates to Flows. {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Add a Flow to your Project When setting up a [Project](/create-your-first-project/create-a-project), a Project Flow is created by adding the 'Start and End Date' and 'Project Manager' . The 'Project Manager' is also the reviewer and typically responsible for the Project's delivery.

{% endstep %} {% step %} ### Define your Sub-Flows A Sub-Flow can represent stages of a Project or stages defined by a scope of work. Indeed, a Flow or Sub-Flow does not need to be connected to activities on Better Building and be completely independent from the platform and for any suitable purpose. See [Flow Examples](https://docs.betterbuilding.io/create-your-first-project/copy-of-create-a-flow-update-when-images-are-available#flow-examples) below. To create a Sub-flow within your Project, navigate to the Flow area and click 'Add Flow'.

This opens a form where you can enter key details such as the 'Title', 'Assignee', 'Reviewer', 'Start and end dates', 'Requirements'. You can also upload a file by clicking 'Select File' and choosing one from your system to share with your team. Them click 'Create' to add the subflow to your project.

You can repeat this process to add as many Sub-flows as needed, including nesting subflows within others, up to three levels deep beneath the main Project Flow. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Update the Flow Status Once you're ready to begin work, navigate to the Sub-flow you're working on and find the status labelled 'Created'. Click on it and select 'Start Work' from the drop-down menu and then 'Change to in Progress'. This is where you manage the Status of your flow throughout the Project. If needed, you can also pause progress by selecting 'Put On Hold', or 'Cancel' the flow entirely if the work is no longer required.

{% endstep %} {% step %} ### Add Comments and Documents Comments and documents can be added to a Flow at any point, and can form the basis of all project based discussions, keeping all info in one place and out of your inbox. To add comments or documents, hit the '+' next to the buttons, and then either add a comment or upload a document. This will then be sent to any Assignee connected to the Flow.

{% endstep %} {% step %} ### Add a Budget The concept of Time in Flows enables management of time over the projects delivery. A Budget enables an estimate of time (hours) to be added to a Flow that can be used to infer project delivery efficiency. For example, to add a 10 hour budget for a Flow, click '+' next to the Time button, select 'Budget' and then add the Estimated Hours, as below.

{% endstep %} {% step %} ### Add an Expense An Expense is a manual mechanism to account for time based on hours included in the delivery of a Project but not automatically captured when working on a connected Design. For example, to add a 2 hour Expense to a Flow, click '+' next to the Time button and then 'Expense'. Next, add the Hours required,, who they are Performance By, when were Performed On and then connect to a Flow, if available. Once a added, both Expenses and Budget are available by hovering over the Project hours.

{% endstep %} {% step %} ### Connect to a Design to a Flow or Sub-Flow Next, when you create a Designs across for your Project, you get the opportunity to connect it to the applicable Sub-Flow. This results in Activity (6 minute intervals) related to that Sub-Flow becoming accountable and represented on the Flow Dashboard as time spent on the Project. Once connected, 'View Flow' and under the tab 'Links', you will see all Design connected to the Flow.

{% endstep %} {% step %} ### Review Once you've completed your work on a Flow or Sub-Flow, head back to the Flow Dashboard and click 'Submit for Review' where it says 'In Progress' in the top right corner. You’ll have the option to leave 'Comments' for your reviewer and update the reviewer if needed. Once you're ready, click 'Submit'. The Project Manager will then be notified by email that your work is ready for review and will either 'Review and Approve' your deliverable or 'Return to in Progress' for work to continue.

{% endstep %} {% endstepper %} ## Flow Examples ### One-Off Project Flow A One-off Project Flow refers to a project with a single, clearly defined outcome. For instance, delivering an energy model that meets local building code requirements would qualify as a one-off project. In this case, the main flow is named after the overall project, Project , while the one-off deliverable, 'Energy model', is created as a subflow. To manage delivery, simply connect the relevant design to the 'Energy model' subflow. This keeps everything focused and easy to track from start to finish.

### Independent Project Flow An Independent Project Flow is a standalone flow that isn’t directly connected to activities on the Better Building platform. It’s ideal for managing external frameworks like Green Star, LEED or Passive House certification, where you can structure categories and credits as flows and subflows to keep things organised.

In this example, the main Flow is named after the overall project, Project X, while the certification goal (such as Green Star, LEED or Passive House) is set as a Sub-flow. Beneath that, the specific categories and credits from the chosen framework are also represented as Sub-flow, helping you manage each step of the process clearly and efficiently. ### Multi-Staged Project Flow A Multi-Staged Project Flow refers to a Project multiple deliverables over a long period. For example, the Sub-Flows might include Concept Design, Schematic Design, Detailed Design, and Construction.

Within each Sub-Flow stage, further nested Sub-Flows could represent energy modelling or daylight analysis. Once happy with all Sub-Flows, be sure to left click the date to revise the Start, End and Due dates and assign the person Delivering the Sub-Flow. # Create a Design Within a Project, create Designs for specific Building Elements, like walls, roofs, floors, or glazing, or run a full 2D or 3D Building Simulation. Each Design inherits the Project’s settings to keep everything aligned and consistent. ## Start a Design Choose the Project where you want to create a Design. Click ‘+ Create Design’, add a 'Title', select a Design type, then hit ‘+ Create’ to save it. Designs can be duplicated or shared with Guests, making it easy to reuse work and collaborate with external partners, all while keeping Team access controls in place.

# Support & Training Need a hand? You'll find ticketing options, project support, on-demand courses, webinars, tutorials and help with testing and verification. # AI Search Better Building's AI Search is your first place to go when a question arises and you need a quick answer. When engaging with Better Building's AI Search, you have the ability to ask direct questions from our docs. If you cannot find an answer here, please issue a Support Ticket. ## Create an AI Search {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Ask a Question An AI Search is undertaken on the upper ribbon across the platform. Simply type your question and you will get two responses, one from the AI Search and the other from the relevant area within our docs. For example, 'How do i add a Design to my Project?' will return the following results.

{% hint style="danger" %} Note, while Better Building's AI Search is reliable, AI applications can make errors. {% endhint %} {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Review Answers Next, left click the blue arrow to review the answer. Importantly, the AI Search only sources information from our docs, so please refer to the 'Sources' for the original article. In this example, 4 steps are returned to illustrate how to a Design to my Project., with additional links to related subject matter below.

{% endstep %} {% endstepper %} # Support Tickets Need help, have a question, or want to suggest a feature? Open a Support Ticket, we’ll get back to you. For quick answers, try searching our docs using keywords and phrases. Your feedback helps us improve, and we’re always here to help. {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Support Ticket Request From the relevant Project or Design, head to ‘Support’ and click ‘Raise a Ticket’.

Fill in the 'Subject' and 'Description', being as clear as possible, include your goal, what you expected, and what actually happened. Provide a concise summary of your issue or request’ with ‘Brief, clear title that summarises your issue. Next, enter a detailed explanation of your issue or query including a detailed explanation of the problem, what you expected, what actually happened, error messages, steps to reproduce errors, and when the issue started. Your current URL of the page you are viewing are added automatically to speed up support. If you’d prefer we don’t access your Project or Design, remove the URL from the input field. Please note, this may limit how much we can help as most of our tickets are based on your experience of the platform. Lastly, include a screenshot or video to help explain your support request by clicking 'Select File' and uploading from your local device, then click 'Send'. {% hint style="warning" %} Please note that a low or no priority is given to unclear tickets and descriptions. {% endhint %}

{% endstep %} {% step %} ### Receive Confirmation Email Once submitted, you’ll get a confirmation email letting you know your Support Ticket request has been received. Our team will be notified right away and will start reviewing the details you’ve provided. Should you wish to add another image or other information, you can do so under 'Attachments', where you can source your document by clicking 'Select File' and then 'Upload' to submit.

{% endstep %} {% step %} ### Ticket Review Once we start reviewing your ticket, you’ll get a status update to let you know we’re on the case. Here’s what each status means: * **In Progress** – We’ve picked up your ticket and have started looking into it. * **Completed** – We’ve resolved the issue and your ticket is now closed. * **Cancelled** – We’ve determined the ticket is no longer needed or valid. During the review, we may check the URL you’ve provided or reach out with a few follow-up questions. You’ll get an email each time we respond, with a link to continue the conversation in the Support Ticket area on the platform. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Ticket Closeout Tickets are automatically closed at the end of each week of inactivity following our last response. If you need more time, just reply to keep the conversation going. You will also receive a final Status update notifying you that the process is 'Completed'. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} # Consulting We now offer rapid modelling services, delivering models that cover roughly 70% of the work straight to your Better Building account. It’s a quick, efficient option that’s perfect if you're short on time or resources.

## **What We Offer**


Speed	Most energy, daylight, carbon or moisture models are delivered in 48 hours or less and typically take 3 hours to deliver. That's fast!
Convenience	Your models are seamlessly integrated into your account, so you can take over the design process.
Affordability	Pricing starts at $395 + GST for one hour of modeling. Depending on your project's complexity, additional time and services are available upon request.

## **How We Work** Send over your project details and modelling requirements, and we’ll handle the rest. Once it’s ready, your finished model will land straight in your Better Building account, ready to go. No delays, no hassle, just a smooth, straightforward process that keeps your projects moving. {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Get In touch Share your project drawings and requirements with us, and we’ll set up a quick demo to walk you through your objectives and goals. It’s a great chance to see how we can support you from the start. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Modelling Time Working with Better Building? We can take care of part or all of the modelling process for you. Just let us know what you need. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Model Integration Once the model is ready, we’ll send over a quick support video showing how to integrate it into your Better Building account. Every minute we work is logged in our activity tracker, so you only ever pay for the time we’re actually on the job. No hidden fees, no fuss. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Delivery When it’s time to hand over, we step back and let you take it from there. You get full credit for a job well done, we’re just glad to be part of the team. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} ## **Get Started Today!** Ready to streamline your modeling process? [Submit your project details ](/support-and-training/contact-us)and we will handle the rest. # On-demand Courses Whether you're starting fresh or building on existing knowledge, our On-Demand Courses are designed to fit your schedule. With flexible modules, you and your team can learn at your own pace. Your access to these courses is based on your specific plan. Our On-Demand Courses count towards Continuing Professional Development (CPD), generally recognised as informal CPD points (one point per hour of activity). Each course involves self-directed learning followed by a formal Q\&A session where you'll need a minimum 80% pass mark. Upon successful completion, you'll receive a Certificate of Completion. We recommend checking with the relevant entity to confirm how this certificate applies to their scheme's requirements. ## Our On-demand Courses Each course includes straightforward video lessons and multiple choice quizzes to help build your confidence and track your progress. {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Pick a Course You’ll find all your courses in the User Menu. Just head to the top left corner and click on 'Courses'. Browse the list, choose the one you’re interested in, then click 'Start Course' to begin.

{% endstep %} {% step %} ### Watch a Recording Each course comes with recordings, pre-recorded videos that dive into the course topic. To start watching, just click the play button. For a better view, you can switch to full screen mode. When you're done, click 'Continue' to move on. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Interactive Quizzes After each recording, you’ll have the chance to take a multiple-choice quiz based on what you’ve just watched. The numbers of questions vary and are dependent on the course length and subject matter. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Certificate of Completion To earn a Certificate of Completion, you’ll need to score 80%, but there’s no pressure, retakes are unlimited, so you can keep going until you get there. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %}


Geometry: Commercial	V 1.1 I 68 mins	More	/files/sUneSOa4caBYdW9jBK8I
H1 AS1 & VM1	V 1.1 I 78 mins	More	/files/EQrlq2xSNrGmiD7A1VfQ
NCC 2022: J1V3	V 1.1 I 49 mins	More	/files/7iYV58tsP4gv0A4kcgai
Moisture	V1.1 I 54 mins	More	/files/Grkl62e4Y4JujKmOQrnW
Daylight	V1.1 I 64 mins	More	/files/GYmci7IzQAjOwEhUOljn
Upfront Carbon	V1.1 I Coming Soon		/files/uKVu5ZW3V9RSH3ZHIldN
DTS Façade Calcs	V1.1 I 68 mins More		/files/g0M0o5PkXP557uBj9xAy
Themes	V 1.1 I 24 mins	More	/files/Y6HQ6Tw16P0n7rzy4eTn
Total R-values	V1.1 I 20 mins More		/files/AcI5sdff4pifhgQ98QGQ
NCC 2022: J1V5	V1.1 I 66 mins More		/files/T8ah8aJPdAIoOsugakcg
Part J4 Building Fabric	V1.1 I 31 mins More		/files/vivcIVsZJ6LSEHXpwLVT
H1 VM2	V1.1 I 93 mins More		/files/N9iKOunMOm6V8oqepCiq
CIBSE TM59	V1.1 I 47 mins More		/files/6epK5o6p6pD27U9iBNtp
3D Geometry: SketchUp	V1.1 I 33 mins More		/files/ZqLwd8Rst3UsPhlRFAH5
G7 Natural Light	V1.1 I 52 mins More		/files/a124Vh4yIskpyv7aBZb0
HVAC Sizing	V1.1 I 15 mins More		/files/kthNWco64EQneurfX3IB
BESS: Daylight Access	V1.1 I 28 mins More		/files/sISk6WPGSSjof9ewzeyi
Green Star: Daylight	V1.1 I 23 mins More		/files/ISO7CymcGWfKf8411LkD
Dew Point	V1.1 I 26 mins More		/files/owMcmVqn8OGNpaKvH0yq
DQLS: Daylight Modelling	V1.1 I 25 mins More		/files/uc7K4JyjIFl3uhyQl4q1
Advanced Shading	V1.1 I 14 mins More		/files/TqicFpuFCVy8CqU7nlEt
IDF Exports and Imports	V1.1 I 9 mins More		/files/4NUW74wXgQsVKxwOQDnO
2D to 3D Specification	V1.1 I 15 mins More		/files/0Pg65K66JmTbvhp6Azvb
Geometry: Residential	V 1.0 I 90 mins More		/files/Bhxnq0cooRGT7Lf1q97S
Flows: Project Management	V1.0 I 18 mins More		/files/ZZznLRclRbUTZVJ6YbYD
Specification 44: A Class 1 Performance Solution	1.0 I 139 mins More		/files/hmcE9q5s7jceU4pHvxGZ
Linear Thermal Bridging: LBNL THERM	1.0 I 120 mins More		/files/gs8vGEBldonbklhyTy8X
Detailed Results Viewer	1.0 I 27 mins More		/files/hf1XBb8P1xMm0L4MXniW
HVAC: VRF Setup	V1.0 I 39 mins More		/files/Lv74nU9AGgvP6NNReung

# HVAC: Packaged Air Handling Units Setup

This 40-minute course provides a comprehensive introduction to Packaged Air Handling Units, covering both EnergyPlus HVAC templates and detailed system configurations for energy modelling. Through practical demonstrations, participants will master configuring air handling systems, understanding component interactions, and interpreting design day simulation outputs to validate sizing decisions and diagnose performance issues. ### Key Course Content This course walks you through packaged air handling unit modelling, focusing on how these self-contained HVAC systems deliver heating and cooling through integrated components including supply and return fans, heating and cooling coils, filters, dampers, and controls. You'll gain hands-on experience configuring multi-zone models and learn practical techniques to specify system components through systematic workflows. You'll start by understanding the differences between EnergyPlus HVAC templates and detailed configurations, learning when simplified templates become insufficient for compliance pathways such as LEED, Green Star, or NABERS. The course covers essential model parameters including space types, occupancy and lighting loads, infiltration settings, thermostat controls, and HVAC availability schedules. From there, you'll dive into detailed system configuration, learning to specify air handling unit settings (sizing based on ventilation, sensible, or total load; set point manager options; flow strategies), fan parameters (motor efficiency, design power sizing methods), outside air system components (flat plate or rotary heat exchangers, economiser control, demand controlled ventilation), and heating and cooling coils (hot water, electrical resistance, or gas heating; chilled water or direct expansion cooling). You'll also configure air terminal units with variable or constant control options and supplementary heating coils. The course provides extensive coverage of design day simulation outputs, including zone sizing results, summer and winter scenario analysis (temperature profiles, humidity trends, carbon dioxide concentrations, zone load breakdowns), HVAC node analysis, component load summary reports, air terminal and fan system performance, and coil metrics. The analysis section teaches you to interpret unmet hours, identify zones failing to maintain setpoints, and diagnose root causes such as over-ventilation or insufficient heating capacity. ### Learning Outcomes By the end of this course, participants will be proficient in configuring packaged air handling units for energy simulation, interpreting design day outputs to validate sizing assumptions, and diagnosing system performance issues through systematic analysis. ### Course Completion A Certificate of Competency will be awarded upon achieving an 80% pass mark on the final assessment, demonstrating practical understanding of packaged air handling unit configuration and troubleshooting techniques. {% hint style="info" %} All courses are available in your Team. [Read more](/support-and-training/on-demand-courses). {% endhint %} # HVAC: VRF Setup

This 39-minute course provides a comprehensive introduction to Multi-Zone VRF (Variable Refrigerant Flow) Systems, covering both simplified HVAC templates and detailed system configurations for energy modelling. Through practical demonstrations and real-world examples, participants will master the fundamentals of configuring VRF systems, understanding performance curves, and interpreting simulation outputs to validate design decisions and optimise system efficiency. ## **Key Course Content** This course walks you through the essentials of VRF system modelling, focusing on how refrigerant-based heating and cooling systems offer individualised climate control through modulated flow based on specific zone requirements. You'll get hands-on experience configuring multi-zone models and learn practical techniques to specify VRF components including outdoor condensing units, indoor terminal units, and performance curves through systematic modelling workflows. You'll start by understanding the key differences between EnergyPlus HVAC template systems and detailed VRF configurations, learning when simple templates with concealed assumptions become insufficient for accurate system representation. The course teaches you to configure essential model parameters including space types and tagging, infiltration and occupancy settings, thermostat controls, and HVAC availability schedules. You'll discover how to reference the platform documentation to understand VRF input definitions, default values, and technical parameters for both simple and advanced system specifications. From there, you'll dive into detailed system configuration, learning to specify condenser settings (COP values, waste heat recovery options, air-cooled versus evaporative-cooled configurations), terminal unit parameters (supply airflow rates for cooling, heating, and ventilation modes, parasitic loads, fan efficiency), performance curves (bi-quadratic capacity modifier curves, energy input ratio curves, boundary curves defining operating regimes), and piping considerations (length corrections, heating and cooling mode factors). The course demonstrates how manufacturer-specific data can replace EnergyPlus defaults to improve accuracy, whilst acknowledging the practical challenges of obtaining detailed supplier performance data. You'll then explore simulation outputs including zone sizing results (design loads, supply airflow requirements, peak occurrence timing, sizing factors), zone metres (electrical demand and thermal energy tracking with monthly summaries), plant metres (central condensing unit performance for heating and cooling), fan system performance (airflow delivery and power consumption at design and part-load conditions), terminal unit outputs (refrigerant flow modulation, coil performance), and complete system metrics (diversity sizing opportunities, capacity ratios, efficiency validation). The course emphasises how low diversity—zones peaking at different times—enables outdoor units to be sized smaller than total indoor capacity, delivering both cost savings and efficiency gains. ## **Learning Outcomes** By the end of this course, participants will be proficient in configuring multi-zone VRF systems for energy simulation, interpreting detailed performance outputs to validate design assumptions, and using manufacturer data to optimise system specifications for compliance and performance analysis. ## **Course Completion** A Certificate of Competency will be awarded upon achieving an 80% pass mark on the final assessment, demonstrating practical understanding of VRF system configuration methodology, performance curve applications, and simulation output interpretation techniques. {% hint style="info" %} All courses are available in your Team. [Read more](/support-and-training/on-demand-courses). {% endhint %} # Detailed Results Viewer

This 27-minute course provides a comprehensive introduction to the Detailed Results Viewer, a powerful analysis tool for interrogating energy simulation outputs and identifying modelling errors. Through practical demonstrations and real-world examples, participants will master the fundamentals of using the detailed results interface to validate model assumptions, analyse building performance data, and troubleshoot compliance issues. ### **Key Course Content** This course walks you through the essentials of the Detailed Results Viewer, focusing on how to extract meaningful insights from energy simulation data beyond standard compliance reporting outputs. You'll get hands-on experience navigating the interface and learn practical techniques to interrogate environmental conditions, meter data, HVAC performance, and zone-level results through systematic analysis workflows. You'll start by understanding the key differences between standard and detailed results viewers, learning when resolution suitable for compliance reports becomes insufficient for thorough analysis. The course teaches you to access and interpret multiple signal types including environmental data (outdoor air temperatures, ground temperatures, solar radiation), facility-level meters (HVAC electricity, equipment loads, lighting consumption), HVAC system outputs (cooling coil energy, heating performance), and zone conditions (air temperature, operative temperature, CO2 levels). You'll discover how to reference the EnergyPlus documentation within Support and Training sections to understand signal definitions and technical parameters. From there, you'll dive into practical analysis techniques, learning to load and compare multiple signals simultaneously, customise axis ranges for better data visualisation, navigate temporal views (annual, monthly, weekly, daily), and identify performance patterns through correlation analysis. The course demonstrates real troubleshooting scenarios including detecting excessive CO2 levels indicating inadequate ventilation, analysing heat transfer patterns through building fabric, examining equipment load profiles to validate schedule assumptions, and understanding temperature relationships critical for PMV assessments. ### **Learning Outcomes** By the end of this course, participants will be proficient in accessing detailed simulation results, interpreting multiple data signals to validate model inputs, and using systematic analysis workflows to identify optimisation opportunities and substantiate design decisions. ### **Course Completion** A Certificate of Competency will be awarded upon achieving an 80% pass mark on the final assessment, demonstrating practical understanding of detailed results analysis methodology and data interpretation techniques. {% hint style="info" %} All courses are available in your Team. [Read more](/support-and-training/on-demand-courses). {% endhint %} # Linear Thermal Bridging: LBNL THERM

This 120-minute course provides comprehensive training in linear thermal bridging analysis using THERM software, covering theoretical foundations through practical modeling applications. Designed for building physics professionals, facade engineers, and energy consultants, it develops expertise in quantifying and optimising thermal bridge performance in building envelope details. ### **Key Course Content** This course establishes thermal bridging fundamentals through the core psi (ψ) calculation equation, covering geometric, construction, and hybrid thermal bridge types and their impacts on energy performance, moisture risk, and building durability. You'll work with international standards ISO 10211 and ISO 6946, learning boundary conditions and film coefficients for different exposure scenarios. Practical training begins with THERM software installation and configuration, including material library setup and optimal workflow settings. The course teaches multiple geometry creation approaches: native THERM drawing using polygon tools with keyboard input, plus DXF import from SketchUp and Rhino for complex details. Five progressive modelling sessions cover common thermal bridge details: external wall corners, internal wall corners, mid-floor systems, wall-roof junctions, and balcony connections. Each demonstrates complete workflows from geometry creation through material assignment, boundary condition setup, simulation execution, and results interpretation. You'll master L2D and L1D calculations, learning to isolate boundary conditions and verify accuracy through isotherms analysis. The course emphasises quality control through systematic verification procedures, error identification techniques, and professional documentation standards. Advanced topics include thermal bridge optimisation strategies and automated calculation workflows using integrated tools that process THERM outputs into verified psi values for building certifier submissions. ### **Learning Outcomes** Participants will develop comprehensive skills in linear thermal bridging analysis, from theoretical understanding through practical THERM modelling capabilities, enabling them to quantify thermal bridge performance, identify optimisation opportunities, and produce professional-grade documentation for building performance assessments and compliance submissions. ### **Course Completion** A Certificate of Completion will be awarded upon achieving an 80% pass mark on the final quiz. {% hint style="info" %} All courses are available in your Team. [Read more](/support-and-training/on-demand-courses). {% endhint %} # Specification 44: A Class 1 Performance Solution

This 139-minute course provides a comprehensive introduction to Specification 44, a performance-based compliance pathway for residential energy efficiency under the National Construction Code. Through detailed modeling demonstrations and practical examples, participants will master the fundamentals of using Specification 44 for Class 1 building energy assessments and compliance reporting. ### **Key Course Content** This course covers Specification 44 within the NCC's H6 Energy Efficiency provisions, focusing on thermal performance for homes between 50-500 square metres through hands-on modeling and practical optimization examples. You'll master the NCC compliance framework, distinguishing performance solutions from deemed-to-satisfy approaches, and the four-stage performance-based design brief process. The course teaches the three key load limit equations (heating S44C2, cooling S44C3, thermal energy S44C4) incorporating degree hours calculations, dehumidification gram hours, and area adjustment factors based on habitable room areas. Through practical modeling, you'll learn how to use the tagging systems for space classification, distinguishing habitable areas (bedrooms, living rooms, kitchens) from non-habitable spaces affecting compliance calculations. You'll apply H6V2 Verification Method assumptions including infiltration settings, natural ventilation parameters, realistic lighting loads, occupancy patterns, and equipment specifications addressing problematic kitchen loads. Climate-responsive optimisation covers building envelope improvements, strategic window selection, effective shading design , and natural ventilation strategies. You'll use zone load analysis with EnergyPlus 22.2 simulation (15-minute timesteps, TMY2020 climate files) for iterative design decisions. Advanced topics include H6P2 whole-of-home calculator covering NCC parts 13.6/13.7 with building limits, net equivalent energy usage calculations (Part A vs Part B), equipment efficiency factors, PV system impacts, and pool/spa calculations. Both H6P1 thermal performance and H6P2 whole-of-home requirements must be met for complete compliance. ### **Learning Outcomes** By the end of this course, participants will be proficient in creating compliant Specification 44 models from initial geometry through final compliance documentation, interpreting detailed zone load analysis results to guide design optimization decisions, implementing climate-responsive strategies for different Australian climate zones, and understanding the complete performance-based design brief framework for building certifier engagement and professional documentation requirements. ### **Support Material** Omnirate Spec 44 calculator - ### **Course Completion** A Certificate of Competency will be awarded upon achieving an 90% pass mark on the final assessment, demonstrating practical understanding of Specification 44 modeling methodology, load limit calculations, optimization strategies, and compliance procedures for professional building energy assessment practice. {% hint style="info" %} All courses are available in your Team. [Read more](/support-and-training/on-demand-courses). {% endhint %} # Flows: Project Management

This 18-minute course offers a comprehensive understanding of 'Flows,' a robust project management solution designed for the building sector. Through engaging content, participants will learn to harness 'Flows' for comprehensive progress tracking, from initial design phases right through to project completion. ### **Key Course Content** This course introduces you to the fundamentals of project flow management, defining "Flows" as flexible folder-like structures that streamline project organisation and workflow. You'll learn how to create main project flows upon initiation, set up goals and timelines, assign roles effectively, and manage everything from simple one-off tasks to complex multi-stage projects with comprehensive tracking and review processes. You'll explore different flow structures to suit various project needs, starting with simple "one-off project flows" for single tasks like energy models where progress and responsibilities can be easily assigned. The course then delves into more sophisticated approaches including "independent project flows" for managing external certifications such as Green Star or Passive House by organising categories and credits, with insights into future features like URL-based information submission. You'll also master "multi-stage project flows" that allow you to manage project phases from concept through to detailed design using sub-flows for different analyses within each stage. The hands-on component walks you through the practical steps of creating project flows, defining project details, setting start and end dates, and assigning project managers effectively. You'll gain experience adding sub-flows, assigning "doers" and "reviewers," attaching design files, and progressing workflow status from 'in progress' to 'submit for review.' The course covers linking existing designs to flows, understanding the complete review process including reviewer actions like approving or returning work, and monitoring project timelines and activities within the Flows interface for optimal project oversight. ### **Learning Outcomes** By the end of this course, participants will be thoroughly equipped to conduct hygrothermal simulations meeting National Construction Code requirements, interpret complex moisture analysis results, and generate professional compliance reports for building projects. ### **Course Completion** A Certificate of Completion will be awarded upon achieving an 80% pass mark on the final quiz. {% hint style="info" %} All courses are available in your Team. [Read more](/support-and-training/on-demand-courses). {% endhint %} --- [Next Page](/llms-full.txt/1)

50 Credits

250 Credits

500 Credits

1000 Credits

Lite

Classic

Premium